JP7723972B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), enclosed gaming machines, and slot machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines, for example, are well-known examples of gaming machines. Pachinko machines typically have obstacles in the playing area of the game board that change the direction in which the gaming ball falls, as well as prize holes, starting holes, and variable prize holes into which the gaming ball can enter. When a gaming ball enters these holes, the player is given a special benefit, such as the payout of a prize ball (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Some of these gaming machines are equipped with vibration means.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-200302

However, there is room for improvement in the vibration means of conventional gaming machines.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the present invention aims to provide an amusement machine with distinctive vibration means.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
a first vibration means capable of performing a first vibration motion;
a display means capable of displaying a first image associated with the first vibration means at a certain timing;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying a changing display of decorative patterns,
the display means is capable of displaying a first reach effect,
the display means is capable of displaying a second reach effect having a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than the first reach effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a variable icon,
the first vibration means is capable of starting to execute the first vibration action after the first image is displayed;
The display means is capable of displaying an image relating to a pass/fail determination result after displaying the first image,
There are a first case in which the first vibration action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started at the certain timing, a second case in which the first vibration action is executed at a second timing after the display of the first image is started at the certain timing but later than the first timing, and a third case in which the first vibration action is not executed during the execution of the second reach performance even if the display of the first image is started,
the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the first case, and also displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the second case,
the first vibration means ends the first vibration operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case,
an execution period of the first vibration operation in the second case overlaps with a part of a display period of the certain image,
the first timing is a timing during execution of the second reach effect,
the second timing is a timing during execution of the second reach effect,
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the first case than in the third case,
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the second case than in the third case,
The first image is not an image showing the variable icon,
When the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing , there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, and when the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing .
It is characterized by:

The gaming machine of the present invention can provide a gaming machine with distinctive vibration means.

1 is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 seen from the back side. 1 is a simplified front view of the game board 200 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine 100. These are examples of display patterns for a pachinko machine 100, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of a dip switch board. 1. (a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after the jackpot game, and (b) is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a stepwise transition from the normal stage to the rear stage. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 12. This is a diagram showing an example of the steps from entering the sea zone to the sky zone until hitting the jackpot. 15A to 15C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 14. This is a diagram showing an example in which power is interrupted during the final display of a decorative pattern but is immediately restored. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of event look-ahead prediction in stages. 18A to 18C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 17. 19A to 19C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 18. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example of event pre-reading advance notice in stages. 10A is a diagram showing a table relating to reel vibration effect A, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a table relating to reel vibration effect B. FIG. This is a diagram showing the stages when the reel vibration effect A is performed and when it is not performed. 22(3) is a diagram showing another example in stages, continuing from FIG. 22(3). 10 is a diagram showing another example in which the reel vibration effect B is performed in stages. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table relating to button vibration effects. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of button vibration effects in stages. 10A is a diagram showing a table relating to background effects, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a table relating to mini character effects. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of mini character presentation in stages. This is a diagram showing an example in which the reel vibration effect B and mini character effect are performed in stages. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of the time-shortened game state ending and transitioning to a non-time-shortened game state shortly before the time-shortened game state ends. 31A to 31C are diagrams showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 30 in stages. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which the length of the pullback period is different from the example shown in FIG. 31 in stages. 33A to 33C are diagrams showing a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of a case where there is no pullback period. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is not met, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a list of songs that can be selected when a predetermined condition is met. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of songs that are selected after a predetermined condition is met at least once. 30(h) is a diagram showing an example different from the example shown in FIG. 30 in stages, continuing from FIG. 30(h). This figure shows a step-by-step example in which the first reserve icon h21 among the reserve icons of special chart 2 is displayed in gold at the time when the pattern change display of the last special chart that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of operating the operation key unit 190 in a stepwise manner while the music selection display MC is displayed. This is a diagram showing a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that starts without a predetermined condition being met. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine applicable to the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). 1 is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, seen from the front side (player side). This is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a simplified front view of the game board as seen from the front (player's side), and (b) is an enlarged view of various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board located on the game board. FIG. 1 is a functional block diagram of a pachinko machine. These are examples of display patterns on a pachinko machine, where (a) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 1, (b) shows an example of a stop display pattern for special pattern 2, (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern, and (d) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by a main control unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether a regular drawing is correct or not, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a table for determining whether special drawings 1 and 2 are correct or not, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of a distribution table for determining special drawings. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the first sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. A flowchart showing the processing flow in the second sub-control unit of a pachinko machine, where (a) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit main processing, (b) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control processing. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of a role ratio/setting display, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of a dip switch board. This is a diagram showing an example of a presentation, step by step, centered on the decorative pattern display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 42. A figure showing the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 42. A diagram showing the decorative body provided on the second performance movable body 8. This is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background when displaying a reach title are related. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an example of a zone effect in which animation is displayed on the sub LCD display device in stages. This is a diagram showing an example of a super reach effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related to each other. This is a diagram showing in stages an example of a presentation in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative body provided on the second presentation movable body 8 are related. This is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a performance similar to the performance in which the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59 moves. 10A is a diagram showing a reach title background color determination table, FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a light emission color determination table for the light emitting unit 71, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing a lord's kimono color determination table. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the front side (player side).

Below, using Figures 1 to 41, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100) will be described in detail. Note that, as a general rule, the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 41 will only be used in explanations using Figures 1 to 41, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 1 to 41 will take precedence in explanations using Figures 1 to 41.

<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that allows players to win profits when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as the base shaft of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via hinges 112. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape, with a space 114 inside. Staff at the store (gaming parlor) where this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and it is equipped with a main body opening sensor 104S that detects when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door element that is attached via a hinge 112 to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and is equipped with a locking function so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped, with an opening 116 on the inside. Gaming parlor staff can also open and close this front frame door 106, and it is also equipped with a front frame door sensor 106S that detects when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116 of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The rear of the front frame door 106 and the front of the game board 200 define a space in which the play area 124 is located. In this embodiment, LED light sources are also referred to as lamps.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing the opening lever 1080, which can be operated when the front frame door 106 is open. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The ball storage tray door 108 comprises an upper tray 126 capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128, a ball discharge lever 132 operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a cash box), and a ball ejection lever 132 for ejecting the game balls guided to the launching device 110 by the player. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a ball launch handle 134 that launches balls into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that changes the effect mode of various effect devices 2-4 (see FIG. 3) when operated by the player, a button lamp 138 built into the effect button 136 and illuminates the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the gaming parlor, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, and a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full of game balls. The operation key unit 190 also includes a select button 1903 between an upper button 1901 and a lower button 1902. The select button 1903 may also function as a second effect button.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, this launching device 110 launches a game ball toward the play area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), and is an example of a launching means.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The play area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. Note that the specific configuration of the play area 124 is not shown in Figure 1, and its specific configuration is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 1.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 consists of a cylindrical member, and inside it is equipped with a dispensing motor, sprocket, and dispensing sensor (not shown). This dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to gaming balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 4) when a gaming ball is passing, and the other signal, either a high or low, when a gaming ball is not passing. Gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel along a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to that award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for presentations based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for presentations based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error release switch that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and releases errors when operated by a gaming store employee. The system is equipped with a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 equipped with a switch 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see Figure 4) that performs control processing related to the launch of gaming balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see Figure 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that is operated by a gaming store clerk to turn the power on and off, and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on to output a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 606 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated provided that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of several settings with at least different jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may also be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed.

The reel ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and located inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the reel ratio/setting display 196 consists of two digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, with a single digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. The reel ratio monitor is an indicator that reports the reel ratio (YH) and consecutive reel ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a single-color red LED, for example, but it may also be capable of emitting light in three colors: red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a portion of the reel ratio/setting display 196 may be mounted on the game board 200, for example, to be visible to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 3 is a simplified front view of the gaming board 200. Here, arrows d1 to d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d1 indicates the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the near side sometimes referred to as the front or front, and the far side sometimes referred to as the back or rear. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-to-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the left hand sometimes referred to as the left when viewed from the front, and the right hand sometimes referred to as the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, with the higher side sometimes referred to as the top and the lower side sometimes referred to as the bottom.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

A variety of structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, one possible structure is to insert the left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the game board 200 as seen from the front into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front, and then rotate the game board 200 around this position while pressing the right side (right side) 200b of the game board 200 against the main body 104 to set it in place. This structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to a plate-shaped main body 201. The main body 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the main body 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game to prevent further play) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may also be a magnetic sensor or other fraud detection sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, defining a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

Areas on the game board 200 other than the play area 124 may be referred to as non-play areas. The play area 124 and non-play areas can be distinguished by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, the area inside the area through which game balls pass when the game ball's launch strength is at its maximum may be referred to as the play area 124. The play area 124 may include areas through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the play area 124. The play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because game balls do not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but areas through which game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may also be referred to as non-flow-down areas.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. Below the play area 124, there are located a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserve lamp 216, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, and a second special symbol reserve lamp 220. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative patterns and effects, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display a different decorative pattern, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used in the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with 7-segment LEDs.

The regular symbol reserve lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The first special symbol reserve lamp 218 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The second special symbol reserve lamp 220 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games.

It also has a time-saving lamp TL, a right-hit indicator lamp RL, and a high-probability lamp HL. The time-saving lamp TL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a time-saving game state, in which the normal map fluctuation display time is shortened and the blade members 232a of the electric tulip (electric chute), described below, are likely to open for a long period of time. The right-hit indicator lamp RL is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state, in which the player can benefit by hitting the right. The high-probability lamp HL is a lamp that indicates that the game state is, or will become, a high-probability state in which a jackpot is likely to occur.

Around the decorative symbol display device 208, predetermined ball entry ports, such as general winning ports 226a and 226b, a general symbol start port 228, a first special symbol start port 230, a second special symbol start port 232, and a variable winning port 234, are arranged.

One or more general winning openings 226a, 226b are provided on each of the left and right sides of the play area 124. Here, the general winning opening located on the left side of the play area 124 is referred to as general winning opening 226a, and the general winning opening located on the right side of the play area 124 is referred to as general winning opening 226b. When a ball enters general winning opening 226a, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into general winning opening 226a, the payout device 152 is activated and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls) are dispensed onto the upper tray 126 as prize balls. When a ball enters general winning opening 226b, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning entry into general winning opening 226b, the payout device 152 is activated and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 1 ball) are dispensed onto the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged into the upper tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and these configurations allow prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the winning result. In this embodiment, game balls that enter the general winning opening 226a and game balls that enter the general winning opening 226b are detected by separate ball detection sensors. Furthermore, if multiple general winning openings 226a are provided on the left side of the playing area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that enter may be merged and detected by a single common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a separate ball detection sensor. Furthermore, if multiple general winning openings 226b are provided on the right side of the playing area 124, the ball paths that guide the game balls that enter may be merged and detected by a single common ball detection sensor, or each may be detected by a separate ball detection sensor. Balls that enter the general winning openings 226a and 226b are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the playing island side.

The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which determines whether a ball has passed through a specified area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is located on the right side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the general winning ports 226a and 226b, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not discharged to the play island side. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 begins normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special symbol start hole 230 is located at the bottom center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering this first special symbol start hole 230, the payout device 152 (described later) is activated, a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three) are discharged as prize balls onto the upper tray 126, and a special symbol variable game is initiated by the first special symbol display device 212. Note that a ball that enters the first special symbol start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island. In this embodiment, due to the location of the first special symbol start hole 230, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first special symbol start hole 230 when hit from the right. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the system is designed to initiate the variable display of special symbol 2 before special symbol 1 (a pachinko machine with such a design is sometimes referred to as a "special symbol 2 priority variable machine").

The second special symbol starting opening 232 is composed of an electric tulip (electric chute) and is located below the first special symbol starting opening 230. It has blade members 232a that can be opened and closed left and right. Balls cannot enter the opening while the blade members 232a are closed. When a player wins the normal symbol variable play and the normal symbol display device 210 displays a winning symbol, the blade members 232a open and close at predetermined time intervals and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special symbol starting opening 232, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three) are discharged as prize balls onto the upper tray 126, and the special symbol variable play is initiated by the second special symbol display device 214. Balls that enter the second special symbol starting opening 232 are guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island. In this embodiment, due to the positioning of the normal starting hole 228 (due to a game pin not shown), it is difficult for a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228 when hitting from the left. Therefore, as a general rule, it is not possible to win the normal variable game during left-handed hitting, and therefore the blade member 232a does not open or close as well. On the other hand, when hitting from the right, it is possible for a game ball to enter the normal starting hole 228, which may result in a win in the normal variable game and the blade member 232a opening and closing. In other words, it can be said that there is almost no chance of winning the second special starting hole 232 during left-handed hitting, but there is a possibility of winning the second special starting hole 232 during right-handed hitting.

The variable prize opening 234 is called the jackpot opening or attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is located on the lower right side of the game board 200. This variable prize opening 234 is equipped with a door element 234a that can be opened and closed freely. Balls cannot enter the opening while the door element 234a is closed. When a player wins the special symbol variable game and the special symbol display device displays a stopped jackpot symbol, the door element 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (e.g., opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2, 3, or 10 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable prize opening 234, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 15) are dispensed into the upper tray 126 as prize balls.

In this embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 and the general winning opening 226b are integrally formed with the ball entry unit U1 and can be detachably attached to the main body 201 of the game board 200. The ball entry unit U1 is further provided with a V-shutter VS and a V-passing switch VC. The V-passing switch VC opens upward, allowing game balls to pass from top to bottom. This V-passing switch VC detects game balls passing through. The V-shutter VS is located above the V-passing switch VC and is moved back and forth by a solenoid. This solenoid is included in the various solenoids 332 described above and is driven by the drive circuit 334. When the V-shutter VS is advanced (corresponding to a closed state), game balls cannot pass through the V-passing switch VC. When the V-shutter VS is retracted (corresponding to an open state), game balls can pass through the V-passing switch VC. A gaming ball that enters the variable winning opening 234 and passes through a ball detection sensor (not shown) is guided to the front, then rolls to the V shutter VS and may pass through the V passing switch VC, or may be unable to pass through and be guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100. The V passing switch VS is included in the various sensors 320 (see Figure 4), and is configured so that a detection signal is input to the sensor circuit 322. In this embodiment, when the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 detects that a gaming ball has passed through the V passing switch VC, it determines that a V winning has occurred.

In this embodiment, the V shutter VS remains closed (advance) from the start of the jackpot game until a specific round (for example, the final round), during which the V shutter VS opens (retracts), making it possible to win a V prize. If a V prize is won, the control state transitions to a special prize high probability state after the jackpot game ends; if a V prize is not won, the control state remains in a special prize low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the transition to the special prize high probability state is determined by the game ball passing through the V passage switch VS.

Furthermore, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill and multiple play nails, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204 is an outlet 240 that guides balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharges them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the ball stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and uses the launch rod and launch hammer to launch the ball through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 into the play area 124. The ball then flows downward, changing direction using the ball direction conversion member 236 or game pins, and either enters a winning slot (general winning slots 226a, 226b, variable winning slot 234) or a starting slot (first special symbol starting slot 230, second special symbol starting slot 232), or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slot or starting slot, or by simply passing through the normal symbol starting slot 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower edge of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. The out ball detection sensor SWout may also be provided on the game board 200 side. All game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the outlet 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and are configured to be discharged outside the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage.

In addition, an upper performance device 2 is located at the top of the play area 124, a lower performance device 3 is located at the bottom, and side performance devices 4 are located on the left and right sides. In this embodiment, these performance devices 2 to 4 are supported by the main body 104.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 4. Note that this figure is a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing anomalies, and a random number generator (counter circuit) 318 (which is assumed to have two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308; the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as the system clock. Additionally, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Note that although the random number generation circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302; a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214; and a drive circuit 325 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the normal pattern display device 210. It is connected to a drive circuit 326 for display control, a drive circuit 330 for display control of various status indicators 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, high probability lamp, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including predetermined movable parts such as a drive means for driving the blade member 232a of the second special symbol start port 232 as a normal electric device, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234 as a special electric device, and a drive means for driving the V-shutter VS. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may also be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol start hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 230 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special symbol start hole 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special symbol start hole 232.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating a drop in voltage when the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example).

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing, which will be described later).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, while information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured not to allow the first sub-control unit 400 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured not to allow the dispensing control unit 600 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the control program and various effect data may be stored in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440, which controls the game board lamp 442, and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450, which controls the game frame lamp 452, and controls lighting via serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the various (upper, lower, and side) performance devices 2-4, a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs to the basic circuit 402 detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the performance devices 2-4, etc., and a button sensor 426 that detects the depression of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, ROM 506 is connected to basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, as well as data for image display. In this embodiment, memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use RAM, which volatilizes stored information when power is cut off.

Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via the CR interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and other information to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1044 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 106S that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. These sensors detect when the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit located within the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Note that in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 5(a) to (d), we will explain the types of special symbols and regular symbols that are displayed when stopped by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play begins when the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, and special chart 2 variable play begins when the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play begins, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) by repeatedly lighting up all seven segments and the single central segment. Furthermore, when special chart 2 variable play begins, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) by repeatedly lighting up all seven segments and the single central segment. Then, when the change time determined before the start of special chart 1 change has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1, and when the change time determined before the start of special chart 2 change has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special chart change display. This special chart change display may be performed multiple times in succession.

Figure 5(a) shows an example of the stop pattern configuration of Special Design 1. Three types of special designs, "Special Design a" to "Special Design c," are shown in Figure 5(a). In Figure 5(a), the white areas indicate the locations of segments that will be unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of segments that will be lit.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot patterns ("Special Pattern A" and "Special Pattern B") are prepared as the stopping pattern forms of Special Pattern 1. "Special Pattern A" is a 3-round (R) special jackpot pattern that is expected to result in a special jackpot win, while "Special Pattern B" is a 3R normal jackpot pattern that does not have a chance of winning a special jackpot win. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, winning a special jackpot (transition to a special pattern high probability state) is determined by the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VS. When Special Pattern A is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display device 212, and the game enters the 3rd round, which is the final round of the jackpot game, the V-shutter VS opens (retracts), allowing the game ball to pass through the V-pass switch VS. If the game ball passes through the V Pass Switch VS (if a V Prize is awarded), the control state transitions to the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and this state is maintained for 120 times after the jackpot game ends and the special symbol pattern change display is performed. In this embodiment, once the V Shutter VS opens, there is sufficient time for the open state to be maintained, and the probability of the game ball passing through the V Pass Switch VS is high, so "Special Symbol A" can be said to be a jackpot that is expected to result in a probability change (the same applies to "Special Symbol A" and "Special Symbol B" described below). On the other hand, if the first special symbol display device 212 displays a stopped special symbol b, the V Shutter VS does not open even when the jackpot game enters the third round, which is the final round, and the game ball does not pass through the V Pass Switch VS (no V Prize is awarded), and the control state remains in the special symbol low probability state after the jackpot game ends. In this way, while a V win was required to transition to the special symbol high probability state, the transition to the normal symbol high probability state is initiated upon the completion of a jackpot game. In other words, if a jackpot is hit, the game transitions to the normal symbol high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the normal symbol high probability state is maintained for as long as the special symbol pattern change display is performed 120 times in the case of special symbol A, or 50 times in the case of special symbol B, after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of losing symbol ("Special Symbol C") is provided as the stopping symbol pattern for Special Symbol 1.

Figure 5(b) shows an example of the stopped symbol pattern for special symbol 2. Figure 5(b) shows four types of special symbols, "Special Symbol A" to "Special Symbol D," two of which are jackpot symbols ("Special Symbol A" and "Special Symbol B"). "Special Symbol A" is a 10R special jackpot symbol designed to result in a special jackpot, while "Special Symbol B" is a 2R special jackpot symbol designed to result in a special jackpot. In other words, if special symbol A achieves a V win in the 10th round, after the jackpot game ends, the control state will transition from the special symbol high probability state to the normal symbol high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 times after the jackpot game ends and the special symbol symbol change display will be performed. If special chart B achieves a V win in the second round, after the jackpot play ends, the control state will transition from special chart high probability state to normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for the duration of the special chart pattern change display, which will be repeated 120 times after the jackpot play ends.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of losing symbols ("Special Symbol C" and "Special Symbol D") are prepared as the stopping symbol patterns for Special Symbol 2. "Special Symbol C" is a general losing symbol like "Special Symbol C," but "Special Symbol D" is a special symbol known as a time-saving symbol, which will be described in more detail below.

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred in special symbol variable play is made by a hardware random number lottery, and the jackpot symbol that will stop is determined by a software random number lottery. Furthermore, in special symbol 2 variable play during a specific period, whether or not a "sudden time-saving" option has been selected is determined by a hardware random number lottery, and if a "sudden time-saving" option has been selected, a "time-saving symbol" is displayed stationary on the second special symbol display device 214. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, after the end of a jackpot play, the machine transitions to a normal symbol high probability state. The normal symbol high probability state is referred to as a time-saving play state (electric support state). Here, the time-saving play state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than in a non-time-saving play state, for example by shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special symbol variable play and the start of the next jackpot. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to normal symbols, while the "time-saving game state" is a state related to special symbols or a state related to both normal symbols and special symbols. A time-saving flag is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the game is in a time-saving game state and a high normal symbol probability state. In a high normal symbol probability state, it is easier to win a normal symbol variable game (normal symbol probability change) compared to a low normal symbol probability state (non-time-saving game state). For example, the winning probability of a normal symbol variable game is 1/100 in a low normal symbol probability state (non-time-saving game state), but increases to 99/100 in a high normal symbol probability state (time-saving game state). Furthermore, the variable time of a normal symbol variable game is shorter in a time-saving game state than in a non-time-saving game state (normal symbol variable shortening). For example, the variable time of a normal symbol variable game, which is 10 seconds in a non-time-saving game state, is shortened to 2 seconds in a time-saving game state. Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, the blade member 232a of the special 2 starting hole 232 tends to open for a longer period of time (extended electric chute opening period) compared to the non-time-saving mode. For example, the 0.2-second electric chute opening period in the non-time-saving mode is extended to 2 seconds in the time-saving mode. Furthermore, the blade member 232a tends to open more frequently in the time-saving mode compared to the non-time-saving mode (increased electric chute opening frequency). For example, the blade member 232a only opens once per winning entry into the normal starting hole 228 in the non-time-saving mode, but opens twice in the time-saving mode (open for 2 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened again for 2 seconds). The extended electric chute opening period and increased electric chute opening frequency increase the probability of the ball entering the special 2 starting hole 232. The time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play. Therefore, the non-time-saving mode is maintained during jackpot play. This is because, particularly during jackpot games, if game balls are picked up by an electric chute with a small number of winning balls, and fewer game balls enter the variable prize slot (attacker) 234, this can be detrimental to the player. Note that in this embodiment, the term "non-time-saving game state" simply excludes jackpot games.

In this embodiment, in the time-saving game state, all of the following actions are performed: normal chance, normal chance short, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase. However, if at least one of these actions is performed, the player's advantage is increased and the time-saving game state may be established. In this case, the actions performed among normal chance, normal chance short, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase may be different for each of the time-saving game states a, b, and c described below. For example, in time-saving mode a, normal chance, normal chance short, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase are all performed, while in time-saving mode b and c, one or two of normal chance, normal chance short, electric chute opening period extension, and electric chute opening count increase may be performed. Alternatively, the time-saving game state may be established if either the electric chute opening period extension or electric chute opening count increase, which increases the probability of the ball landing in the special game mode 2 starting hole 232, is performed. In the non-time-saving game state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special symbol 2 starting port 232 than in the time-saving game state. As described above, the special symbol 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter and an easy-to-win state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter. The entrance of this special symbol 2 starting port 232 remains in an easy-to-win state for a longer period in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. As described above, in this embodiment, when the "special symbol a," "special symbol A," and "special symbol B" are displayed statically after the end of the subsequent jackpot game, the time-saving game state (normal symbol high probability state) is maintained until 120 special symbol variable displays are performed, and then the state transitions to the non-time-saving game state (normal symbol low probability state) on the 121st display. Furthermore, when "Special symbol B" is displayed, the time-saving game state (normal symbol high probability state) is maintained after the end of the subsequent jackpot game until 50 special symbol variable displays are performed, and then the game transitions to the non-time-saving game state (normal symbol low probability state) after the 51st display. In this embodiment, all special symbol jackpot symbols transition to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. However, jackpot symbols that do not transition to the time-saving game state (non-time-saving jackpot symbols) may be provided, and if a jackpot is achieved with a non-time-saving jackpot symbol, the game may remain in the non-time-saving game state without transitioning to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. In addition to the jackpot symbol, a small jackpot symbol may also be provided. During the small jackpot game, the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice), and the door member 234a remains open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per operation. Furthermore, when the door element 234a opens during a small win, if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter during the first opening, or if a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) is acquired, it will not open again. During a small win, the game transitions to a special game with low probability and a normal game with low probability. A small win is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small win game, and after the small win game ends, the control state returns to the state before the small win game began.

Figure 5(c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, there are 13 types of decorative patterns, "Decoration 1" through "Decoration 13." When a ball enters the special pattern 1 starting hole 230 or the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, i.e., when the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole 230, or when the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern change display" is performed in the left pattern display area 208a, the center pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... In other words, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays decorative patterns separately from the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214. Then, the stop pattern pattern, which is a combination of decorative patterns, is displayed in a static state.

When announcing a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot on "Special Chart B"), decorative symbols of the same number are positioned in the left and right pattern display areas 208a and 208c, and a combination of decorative symbols with decoration 13 positioned therein (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2") is displayed in a static fashion in the center pattern display area 208b. On the other hand, when an odd jackpot (a 3R odd jackpot on "Special Chart A", a 10R odd jackpot on "Special Chart A", or a 2R odd jackpot on "Special Chart B") is indicated, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c. Additionally, when reporting a losing symbol such as "Special Symbol C" or "Special Symbol C," a combination of decorative symbols other than those described above (for example, scattered symbols) is displayed statically in symbol display areas 208a-208c. Furthermore, when reporting a sudden win in the time-saving mode, three "Decoration 11" symbols are displayed in a row, rather than a combination of "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1, a zone effect may be executed as one of the effects. The zone effect is a pre-reading preview effect in which the background displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a background corresponding to the zone. There are multiple types of timing for starting the execution of the zone effect, and it may start when the decorative symbols start to change. If the empty zone effect starts when the decorative symbols start to change, three "Decoration 12" are displayed in a row when the previous decorative symbol change display ends. Hereinafter, "Decoration 12" may be referred to as a zone entry symbol. Note that the zone effect may also include an effect in which three zone entry symbols are displayed in a row. In other words, in this case, the execution of the zone effect starts when three zone entry symbols are displayed in a row.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" in the decorative pattern display device 208 to the display of the stopped decorative pattern pattern may be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display. The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 5(d) shows an example of a normal symbol stop pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start hole 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" (normal symbol change game) by repeatedly lighting all seven segments and lighting the single central segment. Then, after the change time has elapsed, it stops and displays either "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, or "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. In Figure 5(d), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are unlit, and the black areas indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map changing display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern will be referred to as the regular map changing display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 4 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 4 stores special symbol random number values, special symbol round determination random number values, special symbol electric support determination random number values, and special symbol pattern determination random number values. RAM 308 also has a random number counter that generates these various random number values. RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random number values, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the special symbol reserved number storage area. RAM 308 also has a start information storage area for special symbols, which is divided into areas for the maximum number of symbols (four in this example) that can be reserved for the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), as well as a random number value storage area for regular symbols. As described below, the start information storage area for special symbols stores multiple types of start information as a set, with one set of this start information stored in each area in order of winning (reserved order).

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with the control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value for the WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (the CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103. If the low voltage signal is OFF (the CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes setting a value in the timer circuit 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below, outputting a clear signal from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to perform initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (Step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 being operated by a game parlor employee or the like (Step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (Step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115). If it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115; Yes), it executes the setting change process (Step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the bonus ratio/setting display 196 flashes to indicate "1," indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed. Pressing the setting change button 194 while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6" returns the display to "1." In this embodiment, a user can select one of settings 1 through 6, each with a different jackpot probability. After changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed by pressing the setting change key 192 to the OFF position. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. While the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the bonus ratio/setting display 196 in this embodiment, it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or announced via audio output, for example. Additionally, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to setting 6, but other settings are also possible, or the setting may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was turned off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Furthermore, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the setting change process of step S117 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S119.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to return the basic circuit 302 to its initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area in RAM 308 is read. If this power status information does not indicate a suspend state, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The checksum is then determined to be a specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is anything other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., if the checksum result is abnormal), initialization processing is performed to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. This initialization processing includes disabling interrupts, setting the stack pointer to a stack initial value (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, even after initialization, the settings set in the setting change processing (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S119) has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after the interrupt prohibition setting is performed, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. This basic random number initial value update process updates two initial value generation random number counters that generate the initial values for the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter. For example, if the possible range of values for the normal winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number counter provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly performs the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

Meanwhile, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state it was in when power was lost. In other words, processing resumes from the command following the command (specified in step S121) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 2 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in that transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in Figure 4 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 (shown in FIG. 4), including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored. The presence or absence of detection signals is then stored in a signal status memory area partitioned for each sensor 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times previously (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information regarding the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previously detected signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal is detected, a win is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor over the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating no detection signal two times previously, a detection signal present the previous time, and a detection signal present this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot 226, the variable winning slot 234, the first special starting slot 230, or the second special starting slot 232, or passed through the general starting slot 228. In other words, it is determined that a win has occurred in these winning slots 234, 226 or these starting slots 230, 232, and 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the first start port sensor that detects a ball entering the first special symbol start port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, it is determined that a prize has been won in the first special symbol start port 230, that is, that a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 230 is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent winning in the first special symbol start port 230 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two times before last, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there was no detection signal this time) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the win determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the win determination clear pattern information, it will then be determined whether or not it matches the win determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value, performed in step S121 above, is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300, are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the respective random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value, which varies between 0 and 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (e.g., 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value and set in the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value, and the currently set initial value is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle, RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining when the random number counter for generating a special random number value has completed its next cycle.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including a normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a prize slot counter update process is performed. In this prize slot counter update process, when a prize is won at prize slots 234, 226 or starting slots 230, 232, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each prize slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. During the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of pending).

In step S219, which follows step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in Figure 4 consists of one byte, with bit 7 indicating strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bit 6 indicating power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), bits 4 and 5 indicating the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicating the payout request count after encryption processing.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variations in the normal map (normal map variation play).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the winning symbol is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the losing symbol is displayed. Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings not only for the normal symbol status update process but also for various other processes. Here, the above-mentioned lighting and turning-off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 confirms and displays either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 5(d)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 5(d)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, the normal symbol win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the normal symbol in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special symbol start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (e.g., 2 seconds), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (332) that drives the opening and closing of the blade member 232a to keep the blade member 232a in a closed state for a specified closed period (e.g., 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when the regular map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not being controlled to open or close (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable play games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable play is a win or a loss by random number lottery based on the regular map winning random number value stored in the random number value memory area. If the result is a win, the win flag in RAM 308 is set to ON. If the result is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variation times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value. This variation display time is stored as the regular map variation display time in the regular map variation time memory area in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special symbol pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of special symbols 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop symbol and change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special symbol pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. First, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, during the special symbol 2 status update process when the special symbol 2 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the second special symbol display device 214. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 displays the variable special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

In addition, RAM 308 of main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special symbol probability change flag, and a regular symbol probability change flag. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special symbol 2-related lottery process described below. In the special symbol 2 state update process, which begins when the special symbol 2 change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 7-segment LEDs constituting second special symbol display device 214 are controlled to turn on and off so that, for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol A shown in FIG. 5(b) is displayed; when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol B is displayed; when the miss flag is on, the special symbol C is displayed; and when the regular symbol probability change flag is on, the special symbol D is displayed. A setting indicating that special symbol 2 is currently being displayed is made in a setting area of RAM 308. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 will display one of the following symbols: a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 2R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a losing symbol (special symbol C), or a time-saving symbol (special symbol D).

Furthermore, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 2 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the result of the subtraction changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the special symbol 2 in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and sets information indicating the winning presentation period in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door element 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the variable winning opening 234), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 234a of the variable prize opening 234 to keep the door element 234a in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, in the special symbol 2 state update process in the final round of a jackpot with probability variation (10 rounds for special symbol A, 2 rounds for special symbol B), a signal to keep the V-shutter VS in an open state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the V-shutter VS for a predetermined opening period (e.g., 10 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the V-shutter opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special symbol 2 state update process that begins when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the V-shutter opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V-shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the V-shutter VS. Furthermore, when the gaming ball passes through the V-passing switch VC, the special symbol probability variation flag is turned on. Additionally, in order to wait for the period (V winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds)) during which an image is displayed informing the player that the gaming ball has passed through the V passing switch VC and a probability change has been acquired, information indicating the V winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the gaming ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC, the special chart probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door element 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (9 rounds or 1 round excluding the first time), and the special symbol 2 state update process begins when this is completed. In order to set the process to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image is displayed notifying the player that the jackpot has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208, information indicating the effect wait period is set in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308.

Also, if the 10R jackpot flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (120) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. If the 2R jackpot flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (120) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 at the end of this jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. If the normal probability fluctuation flag is set on, the number of time-saving times (950) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on.

The term "time-saving" here refers to the pachinko machine entering a state advantageous to the player by shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special variable play and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to on, the machine is in a high-probability normal play state (normal probability change). In a high-probability normal play state, the probability of winning is higher in normal variable play than in a low-probability normal play state. Furthermore, in a high-probability normal play state, the variable time of normal variable play is shorter than in a low-probability normal play state (short-probability normal play). Furthermore, in a high-probability normal play state, the opening time of the pair of blade members 232a of the special 2 starting hole 232 is more likely to be longer per opening (extended electric tulip opening) than in a low-probability normal play state. Additionally, in a high-probability normal play state, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open more than in a low-probability normal play state. The state in which any of these is set is called an electric support state (electric tulip support for winning at the starting hole).

Also, as mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play (special play state). Therefore, the low normal probability state is maintained during jackpot play. This is to solve the problem that if the high normal probability state is in effect during jackpot play, many game balls will enter the special game 2 start port 232 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize entry port 234 during jackpot play, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the tendency to gamble.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end effect period ends (when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 status update process is in the case where the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 1.

For example, during the special symbol 1 status update process when the special symbol 1 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 212. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 displays the variable special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

Flags such as a 3R jackpot flag A, a 3R jackpot flag B, and a miss flag are stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop pattern in the special chart 1-related lottery process described below. In the special chart 1 state update process, which begins when the special chart 1 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 1 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 3R jackpot flag A is on, the display shows special chart a as shown in Figure 5(a), when the 3R jackpot flag B is on, the display shows special chart b, and when the miss flag is on, the display shows special chart c, and a setting area in RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special chart 1 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the first special symbol display device 212 displays a confirmed symbol of one of the following: a 3R special jackpot symbol (special symbol a), a 3R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol b), or a losing symbol (special symbol c).

Furthermore, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stopped display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 1 is displayed stopped for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 1 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the result of the subtraction changes from 1 to 0, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 1 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 1 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, and then the process terminates.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 1 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on. If the jackpot flag is on, the special symbol 1 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the special symbol 1 in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and sets information indicating the winning presentation period in the memory area of the special symbol 1 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special drawing 1 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special drawing 1 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 234a of the variable winning opening 234 to keep the door element 234a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) have entered the variable winning opening 234), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the opening and closing of the door element 234a of the variable prize opening 234 to keep the door element 234a in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set to ON, the special chart 1 state update process in the final round (round 3) outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the V shutter VS to open and close for a predetermined open period (e.g., 10 seconds) to keep the V shutter VS in an open state, and sets information indicating the open period in the memory area of the V shutter open time management timer provided in RAM 308. Then, in the special chart 1 state update process, which begins when the predetermined open period ends (when the value of the V shutter open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal to keep the V shutter VS in a closed state is output to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332) that drives the V shutter VS to open and close. Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the V passage switch VC, the special chart probability fluctuation flag is turned ON. Additionally, in order to wait for the period (V winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds)) during which an image is displayed informing the player that the gaming ball has passed through the V passing switch VC and a probability change has been acquired, information indicating the V winning presentation period is set in the memory area of the special chart 1 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308. Also, predetermined transmission information indicating that the V winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area. On the other hand, if the gaming ball does not pass through the V passing switch VC, the special chart probability fluctuation flag is not turned on.

Furthermore, the door element opening/closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (two rounds excluding the first), and the special symbol 1 state update process, which begins when the control ends, sets information indicating the effect wait period in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., three seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, if the 3R jackpot flag A is set on, the number of time-saving times (120 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Even if the 3R jackpot flag B is set on, the number of time-saving times (50 times) is set in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag is never set on during the special symbol 1 state update process.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 1 status update process, which begins when the specified end performance period ends (when the value of the performance standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 1 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 1 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 1 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 1 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets special chart 1 not operating in the setting area of RAM 308. When special chart 1 is not operating, the special chart 1 status update process proceeds to the next step S229 without doing anything.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here again, the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 2 (special chart 2-related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery processing for special chart 1 (special chart 1-related lottery processing) is performed (step S231). The special chart 2-related lottery processing is executed using the earliest special chart 2 winning random number value and special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value memory area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, the states of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are both inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable play games is 1 or more. The special chart 1 related lottery process is executed using the first special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that variable play for special chart 1 and special chart 2 is not being performed, both special chart 1 and special chart 2 are inactive, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable play times is 1 or more.

With regard to these special symbol-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special symbol 2-related lottery process before the special symbol 1-related lottery process. Therefore, even if the start conditions for the special symbol 2 variable game and the start conditions for the special symbol 1 variable game are met simultaneously, the special symbol 2 variable game will be in the variable state first, and the special symbol 1 variable game will not start to fluctuate. Furthermore, if the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process and variable game for the reserved special symbol 1 variable game will not be performed. Furthermore, the results of the special symbol variable game win/fail judgment by the decorative symbol display device 208 are notified by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 2 start port 232 takes priority over the notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 1 start port 230. In this example, a special symbol variable game with a higher degree of advantage (in this example, special symbol 2 variable game) is prioritized over a special symbol variable game with a lower degree of advantage (in this example, special symbol 1 variable game). This can make it easier to create differences in the degree of advantage between game states.

In the case of the special chart 2-related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number memory area, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss (win/lose determination) based on the special chart 2 winning random number etc. in the acquired special chart 2 start information using the win/lose determination table stored in ROM 306. Also, even in the case of the win/lose determination for special chart 1, a determination is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 changes display using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose determination result etc. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the variable display time (timer number) for the special symbol 2 using various tables stored in ROM 306, based on, for example, the result of the hit/miss judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of special symbols 2 reserved at the time of the hit/miss judgment, and the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol variable time.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the above-described special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

The above explanation uses the example of special chart 2 priority variation, in which the more advantageous special chart 2 variable game is started before the less advantageous special chart 1 variable game, and special chart 2 reserves are consumed before special chart 1 reserves. However, it may also be special chart 1 priority variation, in which the less advantageous special chart 1 variable game is started before the more advantageous special chart 2 variable game, and special chart 1 reserves are consumed before special chart 2 reserves. It may also be start gate winning order variation, in which special chart variable games for reserves of special chart 1 and special chart 2 are started in the order of start gate winning, without prioritizing either the more advantageous special chart 2 variable game or the less advantageous special chart 1 variable game. In start gate winning order variation, the maximum number of reserves is eight regardless of special chart 1 or special chart 2. Therefore, compared to priority variation, in which the maximum number of reserves is four for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2, the maximum number of reserves may be increased.

In addition, in the above explanation, it was assumed that lottery processing or variable play regarding the reservation of one special symbol is not performed depending on the state of the other special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special symbol state update processing and special symbol-related lottery processing may be performed independently for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, respectively, so that multiple special symbols can be changed simultaneously. Furthermore, when multiple special symbols are changed simultaneously in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas that display the lottery results for each special symbol, or multiple decorative symbol display devices may be provided that display the lottery results for each special symbol, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display the lottery results for multiple special symbols. Furthermore, when changes regarding multiple special symbols are being made simultaneously, the lottery results for the special symbol that stopped changing first may affect the lottery results for the special symbol that stops changing later.

In step S233, which follows step S231, a command setting and transmission process is performed. In this command setting and transmission process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example, information that can identify the type of command, such as basic command, pattern change start command, pattern change stop command, win effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, advance read result information command, and setting command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a symbol change start (spin start) command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, loss flags, and the timer number selected in the special symbol-related lottery process. If the command type is a symbol change stop (spin stop) command, the command data includes information such as various jackpot flags and loss flag values. If the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 1 start port 230, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special symbol 2 start port 232, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the variable prize port 234, and so on. If the command type is a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, the look-ahead number stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. If the command type is a setting command, the command data includes setting information and so on.

In addition, in the above-mentioned spin start setting transmission process, information stored in RAM 308 indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and the special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned spin stop setting transmission process, information stored in RAM 308 indicating the values of various jackpot flags, loss flags, etc. is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned ending effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the process of transmitting the jackpot closure settings described above, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc.

In addition, step S233 also performs a general command special drawing reserve increase process. In this general command special drawing reserve increase process, the command data is set with special drawing identification information (information indicating special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which follows step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal status of various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 is read to monitor the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special symbol 2 start port 232 and the variable winning port 234, and display data output to the normal symbol display device 210, first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which follows step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 6. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers used to restore the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the process then enters a HALT state.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 8(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 8(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S303, which follows step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S307, which follows step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which follows step S307, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which follows step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190, depending on the detection result.

In step S313, the step following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450.

In step S317, which follows step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains commands for the various performance devices 2-4, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 8 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Figure 8 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 9(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 9(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first executed in step S401. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in the RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which follows step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S407, which follows step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which follows step S407, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, processing such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data from the decorative pattern display device 208) from ROM (not shown) is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S411, the step following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, processing returns to step S403.

Figure 9 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM.

Figure 9 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which follows step S441, other processes such as updating random number values for presentation purposes are performed.

Figure 9(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is issued to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, described below). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 in VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (destination address in VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which follows step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on image data information (such as VRAM 518 coordinate axes, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the step following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the reel ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be explained with reference to Figure 10. Here, Figure 10(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the reel ratio/setting display 196, and Figure 10(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198.

As described above, the reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a reel ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The reel ratio monitor displays the continuous reel ratio (RY) and reel ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the consecutive feature ratio refers to the proportion of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature when the feature is activated consecutively (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the variable winning opening 234 opening and winning during a jackpot game). Note that it may also be the proportion of the number of game balls acquired as a result of winning in the variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. The feature ratio also refers to the proportion of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the second special chart start opening 232 and variable winning opening 234 opening and winning).

In this embodiment, if the calculation of the consecutive feature ratio determines that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio flashes, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the gaming machine's type application test to be carried out smoothly.

Furthermore, if the calculated ratio of the reel is determined to be greater than 70%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the ratio of the reel is caused to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reel exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to flash, but for example, the light color may also be changed.

As shown in Figure 10 (B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read, allowing the probability of an effect occurring to be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the probability of previews appearing, the probability of entering an effect mode, etc.

Next, we will explain the gameplay of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1, although some of this will overlap with what has been explained so far.

Figure 11(a) is a table summarizing the types of jackpots and the game status after a jackpot.

First, in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1, if setting 1 is selected in the setting change process (step S117) shown in Figure 6, the jackpot probability with a special chart low probability will be 1/320, and the jackpot probability with a special chart high probability will be 1/91. If setting 2 is selected, the jackpot probability with a special chart low probability will be 1/315, and the jackpot probability with a special chart high probability will be 1/90. If setting 3 is selected, the jackpot probability with a special chart low probability will be 1/310, and the jackpot probability with a special chart high probability will be 1/88. If setting 4 is selected, the jackpot probability with a special chart low probability will be 1/305, and the jackpot probability with a special chart high probability will be 1/87. If setting 5 is selected, the jackpot probability with a special chart low probability will be 1/300, and the jackpot probability with a special chart high probability will be 1/85. When setting 6 is selected, the probability of winning with a special low probability is 1/295, and the probability of winning with a special high probability is 1/84. The higher the setting number, the easier it is to win a jackpot.

Also, the probability of winning a regular ticket with a low probability of winning is 1/100, while the probability of winning a regular ticket with a high probability of winning is 99/100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11(a), in Special Drawing 1, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is equal (50% each), while in Special Drawing 2, the breakdown between Special Drawing A and Special Drawing B is 7:3.

Furthermore, in Special Chart A of Special Chart 1, the V-shutter VS opens only in the third and final round, allowing the game ball to pass through the V-pass switch VC. If the game ball passes through this V-pass switch VC (when the probability variable activation area is ON), a probability variable is activated, and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times the special chart pattern change display. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC (when the probability variable activation area is OFF), the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for 120 times the special chart pattern change display.

In Special Chart B of Special Chart 1, the V-shutter VS does not open even in the third and final round, and therefore the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VC. Therefore, the game state after the jackpot game ends is limited to a special chart low probability/normal chart high probability state, and this state is maintained for as long as the special chart pattern change display is performed 50 times.

On Special Chart A of Special Chart 2, the V-shutter VS opens only in the 10th round, which is the final round, allowing the game ball to pass through the V-Pass Switch VC. On Special Chart B, the V-shutter VS opens only in the 2nd round, which is the final round, allowing the game ball to pass through the V-Pass Switch VC. Whether it's Special Chart A or Special Chart B, if the game ball passes through the V-Pass Switch VC (when the special chart activation area is ON), the game state after the jackpot game ends will be a special chart high probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 symbol changes on the special chart. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V-Pass Switch VC (when the special chart activation area is OFF), the game state after the jackpot game ends will be a special chart low probability normal chart high probability state, and this state will be maintained for 120 symbol changes on the special chart.

After the special chart high probability, normal chart high probability state, or the special chart low probability, normal chart high probability state has been maintained a predetermined number of times, the game will transition to the normal state (special chart low probability, normal chart low probability state). The time reduction that begins after a jackpot game is called time reduction A.

Figure 11(b) shows the game flow of the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1.

In the normal state (low probability special chart, low probability normal chart state), it is recommended to fire the game ball toward the left side of the game area, aiming for the special chart 1 starting hole 230. In other words, in the low probability special chart, low probability normal chart state, even if the ball lands in the normal chart starting hole 228, it is unlikely that you will win the normal chart variable game, so you should not hit to the right, and the player should fire the game ball toward the left side (hit to the left). Note that the normal state refers to the non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in a time-saving game state such as a special low probability/normal high probability state or a special high probability/normal high probability state, it is easier to win normal variable game mode. Therefore, it is recommended to aim for the normal variable game mode by firing the game ball toward the right area of the game area where the normal variable game mode start hole 228 is located. That is, as shown in the breakdown in Figure 11(a), the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability variable (special game mode a) is 50% on special game mode 1, while the probability of winning a jackpot with a probability variable on special game mode 2 is 100% on special game mode 2. Furthermore, the number of times the time-saving game mode is maintained after a jackpot game can sometimes be 50 times on special game mode 1, but is always 120 times on special game mode 2. Therefore, because it is easier for players to win a more advantageous jackpot on special game mode 2 than on special game mode 1, players should aim for a jackpot on special game mode 2 by having the ball land in the second special game mode start hole 232. Therefore, the player should aim the ball toward the right area (hit to the right).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot game, the game ball is fired (hit to the right) toward the right area of the game area where the variable winning opening 234 is located, aiming for the variable winning opening 234. Figure 11(b) shows that after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state may be maintained for 120 times or for 50 times.

Also, Figure 11(b) shows that if the special symbol is not hit even once during the 950 times the special symbol pattern change display is performed in the special symbol low probability state (time-saving play state, non-time-saving play state), i.e., if the special symbol is missed 950 times in a row, the time-saving play state will be maintained during the 1100 times the special symbol pattern change display is performed. The period during which the time-saving play state is maintained as a result of a predetermined number of consecutive missed special symbols is called play time, and this time reduction is called b time reduction. The b time-saving play state can only be entered once before the first hit after the power is turned on, and after a jackpot has been hit once, it can only be entered once before the next jackpot is hit. Therefore, if there are 950 consecutive misses on the special symbol in the b time-saving game state, there will be no transition to the b time-saving game state, and the current b time-saving game state will continue. If there are 1,100 consecutive misses on the special symbol, there will be a transition to the non-time-saving game state (normal state). Note that the count of consecutive misses, which is the condition for transitioning to the b time-saving game state, also includes the number of consecutive misses in the a time-saving game state and the c time-saving game state described below.

In addition, as shown in Figures 5(a) and (b), the time-saving symbol may only be displayed as a static symbol in the special symbol 2 symbol variation display. The time-saving game state into which the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol is referred to as time-saving c. This time-saving symbol may win time-saving c in the special symbol 2 symbol variation display, which occurs as a result of the special symbol 2 reserve (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "remaining reserve of special symbol 2") remaining at the time the time-saving game state (special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state) ends being consumed in the non-time-saving game state. When time-saving c is won, the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 (see Figure 3), and three "decorative symbols 11" (decorative symbols for time-saving) shown in Figure 5(c) are displayed as a static symbol in a row on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the time-saving game state (special symbol low probability, normal symbol high probability state) will be maintained while the special symbol pattern change display is performed 950 times. In other words, the game will transition to time-saving game state c without going through jackpot game. The probability of winning sudden time-saving is 1/90. In addition to the special symbol 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after the jackpot game ends, and the special symbol 2 remaining reserve at the end of time-saving game state b that started after 950 consecutive special symbol misses, it is also possible to win sudden time-saving again in the special symbol 2 remaining reserve at the end of the time-saving game state that started after suddenly winning time-saving.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving symbol may be won even in the special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state, and time-saving b game state. In this case, the time-saving symbol is still displayed on the second special symbol display device 214 (see Figure 3). However, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display three "Decoration 11" (time-saving decorative symbol) shown in Figure 5(c) in a row, but displays a scattered symbol indicating a loss. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol high probability normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability normal symbol high probability state, and time-saving b game state take priority over time-saving c game state, so even if a time-saving symbol is still displayed on the second special symbol display device 214, the time-saving symbol is disabled and the game does not transition to time-saving c game state.

Furthermore, if a right-hand shot is made in a non-time-saving mode, and there is a 1/100 chance that the normal variable game mode will be selected and the ball will land in the second special game mode starting hole 232 (electric chute), there is a chance that the c time-saving mode will be selected, and the game will transition to the c time-saving mode without being invalidated. In other words, not only the remaining special game mode 2 reserve, but also a new special game mode 2 reserve may be selected and transition to the c time-saving mode. Note that it may be extremely difficult (impossible) to select the second special game mode starting hole 232 (electric chute) in a non-time-saving mode. For example, it may be possible to prevent the ball from selecting the normal variable game mode even if it enters the normal game mode starting hole 228, or the opening pattern of the blade member 232a may be such that it is extremely difficult (impossible) to select the second special game mode starting hole 232 (electric chute) even if the ball is selected in the normal variable game mode.

In addition, the condition for transitioning to time-saving play state b may be satisfied by all misses in time-saving play state c (950 consecutive misses on the special pattern), resulting in a transition from time-saving play state c to time-saving play state b.

In this embodiment, the time-saving symbol is displayed as a static symbol on the second special symbol display device 214 even in the special symbol high probability, normal symbol high probability state, special symbol low probability, normal symbol high probability state, and b time-saving game state, but it may not be displayed as a static symbol. In other words, it may not be displayed as a static symbol except when the symbol variation display of special symbol 2 is displayed in a non-time-saving game state.

Next, we will explain a specific example of game progression in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1.

The pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 1 has multiple types of stages available. Figure 12 is a diagram showing an example of the transition from the normal stage to the rear stage in stages. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving game state (low probability special game, low probability normal game state), and left-handed play is recommended.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (1) displays a background (a plain white background) that indicates a non-time-saving game state.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (1) also has a fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) and for notifying the number of pending balls, with a special pattern 1 pending number display area in the upper left and a special pattern 2 pending number display area in the lower left. A special pattern 1 pending change notification area (fourth pattern) is also provided in the upper right, and a special pattern 2 pending change notification area (fourth pattern) is provided in the lower right. A regular pattern pending change notification area and a regular pattern pending number display area may also be provided. The numerical value shown in the special pattern 1 pending number display area is aligned with the pending number indicated by the special pattern 1 pending lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the special pattern 2 pending number display area is aligned with the pending number indicated by the special pattern 2 pending lamp 220. Additionally, in the special symbol 1 symbol change notification area, while the special symbol 1 symbol is stopped, the display will change depending on the result, for example, if it is a jackpot, a "○" will be displayed, and if it is a miss, an "X" will be displayed. Also, while the special symbol 1 symbol is changing, a "-" will flash, allowing the player to recognize that the special symbol 1 symbol is changing. The display in the special symbol 2 symbol change display area is similar to the display in the special symbol 1 symbol change display area, and the display mode changes in response to the special symbol 2 symbol change and stop display. Predictions regarding the ongoing symbol change display may be made by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numbers displayed in the reserved number display area. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 described above is the same as the example shown in FIG. 29. Additionally, the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 and mini symbols may be displayed by a display means (e.g., a sub-LCD display device, lamp, etc.) separate from the decorative symbol display device 208.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (1) displays the decorative pattern in a changing manner. That is, the change occurs at high speed in the downward direction. Furthermore, a mini pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mini pattern starts to change in response to the start of the special pattern change display, and stops in response to the stop of the special pattern change display. In other words, the mini pattern change display is performed in response to (synchronized with) the special pattern change display, and the execution status of the special pattern change display is notified (suggested) to the player depending on the change status of the mini pattern.

The decorative pattern display device 208 also has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the effect display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change. The variable icon shown in Figure 12 (1) is a round, patternless, green display. In the drawing, the green color of the icon is indicated by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (the same applies below). The variable icon indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the currently occurring pattern change display depending on its display mode. In other words, the variable icon functions as a normal preview depending on its display mode. A green display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%.

In addition, in the non-time-saving play state, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 to the right of the variable icon display area 280.

Pending icons representing pending special chart 1 are displayed in the pending icon display area 281 for special chart 1. The number of pending special chart 1 is represented not only by the number of times the pending special chart 1 lamp 218 is lit and the numerical value shown in the pending number display area for special chart 1, but also by the number of pending icons for special chart 1. In other words, the pending icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the pending icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first pending icon, the pending icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second pending icon, and so on. In the pending icon display area 281 for special chart 1, pending icons are displayed side by side, and the closer the pending icon to the variable icon display area 280 (the pending icon on the left) the older the winning hold icon.

In Figure 12 (1), three Special Chart 1 hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the Special Chart 1 hold icon display area 281. The first hold icon h11 is displayed in a round, patternless, and white color. In the drawing, the fact that the icon is white is indicated by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right (same below). The second hold icon h12 is displayed in a round, patternless, and red color. In the drawing, the fact that the icon is red is indicated by diagonal cross-hatching (same below). The third hold icon h12 is displayed in a round, patternless, and green color, the same as the display of the variable icon. The hold icon indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the advance preview preview based on its display mode. In other words, it indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern variable display that occurs when the hold represented by the hold icon is consumed. The default display mode indicates a jackpot expectation of 5%. It may also be configured to indicate a jackpot expectation of 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expected probability of a jackpot in the first place. In the following explanation, this may be omitted if the default display mode is used. Furthermore, a red display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%. Furthermore, a green display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%, as explained in the display mode of the variable icon.

In Figure 12 (2), a pseudo consecutive display has begun in the decorative symbol variation display. A pseudo consecutive display is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the start of decorative symbol variation and the provisional stop display are executed multiple times in a single special symbol variation display. This decorative symbol variation display creates the illusion of multiple success/failure determination (lottery) results, despite the display of only one success/failure determination (lottery) result. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (2), a pseudo consecutive symbol (decorative symbol labeled "NEXT") indicating a pseudo consecutive display is provisionally displayed in the center symbol display area 208b, while "Decoration 6" and "Decoration 7" are provisionally displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. While the rapid change in the decorative symbol variation display makes it impossible to see what the decorative symbol is, the provisional stop display allows one to see what the decorative symbol is. During the temporary stop display, the decorative symbols fluctuate and move at an extremely slow speed. Meanwhile, the mini symbol in the upper left corner continues to fluctuate, and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner continues to flash a "-" to indicate that the symbol for special symbol 1 is fluctuating.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (3), the display screen is blacked out and the decorative patterns are no longer visible. However, the mini pattern in the upper left corner and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible. In Figure 12 (3), the mini pattern continues to change, and the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 continues to flash a "-" to indicate that the pattern of special pattern 1 is currently changing.

Eventually, the blackout ends, and the decorative symbols begin to change again. Figure 12 (4) shows the situation just before the blackout ends and the second change (re-change) in the pseudo-consecutive effect begins. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (4) displays the characters "x2," indicating that the blackout has ended and the second change has begun. Furthermore, when the blackout ends, "Decoration 6" is displayed temporarily in the middle symbol display area 208b, where the pseudo-consecutive symbols were temporarily displayed in Figure 12 (2). In other words, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily displayed is different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the re-change. In this case, the type of decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b itself is different. This difference makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the temporary stop display and the start of the re-change display. Furthermore, if the combination of decorative symbols temporarily displayed is the same as the combination of decorative symbols at the start of re-variation, the player may mistakenly believe that the pseudo consecutive symbols have been temporarily displayed again when the blackout ends. However, as shown in Figures 12 (2) to (4), by making the combination of decorative symbols temporarily displayed different from the combination of decorative symbols at the start of re-variation, this type of mistake by the player can be prevented. In Figure 12 (5), which follows Figure 12 (4), the second variation (re-variation) of the decorative symbols has begun.

In Figure 12 (6), a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 5." In Figure 12 (7), a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the right pattern display area 208c, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 1." In the following Figure 12 (8), a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the center pattern display area 208b, and it can be confirmed that the decorative pattern is "Decoration 4." In Figure 12 (8), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed (a fluctuating display). Eventually, as shown in Figure 12 (9), a final display is made, and the losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed completely still. In other words, the decorative pattern does not move during the final display. Naturally, even in this final display, it is possible to confirm what the decorative pattern is.

In addition, the variable icon h0 that was displayed during the temporary stop display disappears when the final display begins.

While the decorative symbols are being displayed, a wipe effect is executed to change the stage. In Figure 12 (10), the wipe effect begins. During the wipe effect, wipe displays WP extend from the lower left and upper right corners of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A wipe-in occurs, where the wipe displays WP cover the display screen, followed by a wipe-out, where the wipe displays WP disappear from the display screen. The decorative symbols and reserved icons are hidden by the wipe displays WP, but the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner remain visible during the wipe effect. The wipe-in that began in Figure 12 (10) is completed in Figure 12 (11), and the decorative symbols and reserved icons are no longer visible on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (11). In the following Figure 12 (12), a wipe-out occurs, whereby some of the decorative symbols and reserved icons become visible. When a wipe-in is completed or a wipe-out is initiated, a stage change occurs. In this example, a stage change occurs from the normal stage to the rear stage. The decorative symbols that become visible as the wipe-out begins are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the changed stage. This display mode will be described later. When the wipe-out is completed, the wipe effect ends. Furthermore, when the wipe effect ends, the display of the next special symbol's symbol change begins. Figure 12 (13) shows the state immediately after the display of the next special symbol's symbol change begins. In this Figure 12 (13), the display of the symbol change begins on the first special symbol display device 212, and the display of the decorative symbol change also begins on the decorative symbol display device 208. The mini symbol change and the flashing display of the fourth symbol also begin. When the decorative symbol change begins, a change display start operation is performed. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 12 (13) is performing this change display start operation, moving slightly in the opposite direction (upward) of the change direction. When the change starts, the decorative pattern is displayed in a visible state. When the decorative pattern changes, the change is displayed by moving downwards following the change start action.

In addition, since a stage change has occurred from the normal stage to the lord stage, the lord's character YM1 is displayed to the left of the variable icon display area 280 on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (13). This lord's character YM1 is displayed as an animation. Furthermore, a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of the decorative pattern that is displayed stationary. The decorative pattern combination at the time the variable display of the decorative pattern begins is "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1," with a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern additionally displayed, and the variable start operation is performed with this decorative pattern combination intact. As a result, the decorative pattern combination provisionally displayed in the previous decorative pattern variable display ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(8)) and the decorative pattern combination confirmed ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(9)) will be different from the decorative pattern combination when the next decorative pattern variable display begins (at the start or immediately after the start) ("Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" shown in FIG. 12(13) in which a different character display YM2 is added for each type of decorative pattern). Here, the decorative patterns are the same, but the presence or absence of a different character display YM2 for each type of decorative pattern differs; the types of decorative patterns are the same, but the display format is different. These different decorative patterns make it easier for players to distinguish between the previous stopped display and the start of this variable display. It also makes it easier to confirm that a stage change has occurred.

In Figure 12 (13), the mini and fourth symbols are already fluctuating at high speed, but when the fluctuations begin, they start from the same displayed symbols as the confirmed mini and fourth symbols (displays in Figure 12 (9)). In other words, the display of the mini and fourth symbols in response to the confirmed display of the special symbol (displays in Figure 12 (9)) is the same as the display when the mini and fourth symbols start fluctuating and the fourth symbol starts flashing in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuating display (displays immediately before Figure 12 (13)).

Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (13), the shifting of the hold icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in Figure 12 (14) is the icon in the default display mode. In addition, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h12 has become the first hold icon h11, and the icon that was previously the third hold icon h12 has become the second hold icon h12.

Note that the part that becomes visible due to the wipeout may be made difficult to see due to an effect display such as light emission (see Figure 14 (7)), and once the wipeout is complete, the effect display may also cease, making the displayed content visible. Alternatively, the stage change may occur when the wipeout is complete.

In Figure 12 (14), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 12 (15) displays a combination of missing decorative patterns, such as "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4," in a temporary stop. Here, too, a character display YM2, which differs for each type of decorative pattern, is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of each decorative pattern.

Figure 13 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 12.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 13 (16), which continues from Figure 12 (15), displays a winning decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4." Here, too, a different character display YM2 is additionally displayed in the lower left corner of each decorative pattern for each type of decorative pattern. Additionally, the animated lord character YM1 is depressed.

In Figure 13 (17), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying changing symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also begun displaying changing symbols. The decorative symbols shown in Figure 13 (17) are operating at the start of the changing display. The mini symbol changes and the fourth symbol has also begun flashing. The pending icon has also been shifted, and the icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 has become the changing icon h0. The changing icon h0 shown in Figure 13 (17) is an icon with a red display mode.

Note that the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" to the end of the final display (Figures 12 (8) to 12 (12)) is longer than the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4" to the end of the final display (Figures 12 (15) to 13 (16)).

In Figure 13 (18), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

In the following Figure 13 (19), a reach state has been achieved, and "Decoration 2" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. Furthermore, a princess character display YM2 is additionally displayed in the bottom left corner of the temporarily displayed "Decoration 2."

In Figure 13 (20), the game progresses to a Super (SP) Reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai across the entire display screen. Additionally, the animation display of the lord's character YM1, the variable icon display area 280, and the reserved icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 disappear, and the decorative symbol that was previously displayed large in the center of the display screen is now displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the mini symbol in the upper left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner are visible even during the Super Reach.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 13 (21) displays an animation of the lord defeating an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols for a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot of "Special Chart B"), such as "Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2," is temporarily displayed. Note that while the character display YM2, which differs for each type of decorative symbol, is not additionally displayed in decoration 13, it may be added.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 13 (22) displays a confirmed combination of decorative symbols for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2," after which three rounds of jackpot play begin (Figure 13 (23)). When the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a special symbol low probability, normal symbol high probability state (time-saving play state).

In Figure 13 (24), the jackpot game has ended, and the game has transitioned to a state where the special symbol has a low probability and the normal symbol has a high probability (time-saving game state). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 13 (24) displays a castle town background, which indicates the time-saving game state.

In addition, in Figure 13 (24), three consecutive balls land in the second special symbol starting hole 232, and the symbol change display on the second special symbol display device 214 begins, and the decorative symbol change display on the decorative symbol display device 208 also begins. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 13 (17) is undergoing a change display start operation. The decorative symbol combination at the time the decorative symbol change display begins is "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2," and the change start operation is performed with this decorative symbol combination. As a result, the decorative symbol combination displayed as a temporary stop ("Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2" shown in Figure 13 (21)) and the decorative symbol combination displayed as a fixed display ("Decoration 2-Decoration 13-Decoration 2" shown in Figure 13 (22)) are different from the decorative symbol combination when the next decorative symbol change display begins (at the start or immediately after the start) ("Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" shown in Figure 13 (24)). Here, the type of decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is different. In particular, by not displaying Decoration 13 in the decorative symbol combination when the next decorative symbol variable display begins, the player is prevented from mistaking that they have won the jackpot again.

In addition, to the right of the variable icon display area 280 where the variable icon h0 is displayed, the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2 is displayed, and two reserve icons h21 and h22 are displayed.

In addition, the words "49 remaining" are displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a remaining number of times in the time-saving play state, indicating that the time-saving play state will continue for another 49 times. Furthermore, to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the first right-hit display RH1, which encourages a right hit, is displayed. This first right-hit display RH1 remains displayed during the time-saving play state even after the display of the special symbol's changing pattern has ended, and remains displayed even when the screen switches to the demo screen.

Note that Figure 13 (24) shows a scene where the fluctuation has already begun, but after the end of the jackpot game and before the next fluctuation begins, the decorative symbol ("Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2"), mini symbol ("2-2-2"), and fourth symbol are displayed in a visible state for a moment. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and fourth symbol in response to the confirmed display of the special symbol (the display in Figure 13 (22)) is the same as the display when the mini symbol fluctuation display and the fourth symbol flashing display begin in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (the display immediately before Figure 13 (24)).

In Figure 13 (25), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern.

In addition, the action at the start of the changing display may be a slight movement in the opposite direction to the changing direction, or it may be an action in which the decorative pattern sways or expands or contracts. In any case, it is an action that allows the decorative pattern to be confirmed.

Next, we will explain an example of a zone presentation. Figure 14 shows an example of the stages from the sea zone to the sky zone until a jackpot is reached.

In this example, the game is in a time-saving mode (high probability special symbol/high probability normal symbol state), and right-hitting is recommended. In the time-saving mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a castle town background to indicate the time-saving mode, but in this example, a background corresponding to the zone is displayed. Also, to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, a right-hit first display RH1 is displayed to encourage right-hitting. Furthermore, the remaining number of times in the time-saving mode is also displayed in the bottom right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (1) displays an ocean background corresponding to the ocean zone. Also in Figure 14 (1), the second special pattern display device 214 has started displaying changing patterns, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also started displaying changing decorative patterns. The decorative pattern shown in Figure 14 (1) is operating at the start of the changing display. In addition, the mini pattern has started changing and the fourth pattern has started flashing. Furthermore, the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area 280, and two holding icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the holding icon display area 282 of special pattern 2. The second holding icon h22 is an icon with a red display mode.

In Figure 14 (2), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (3), a temporary stop display is performed when three zone entry patterns for decoration 12 are aligned. Note that one ball has entered the special pattern 2 start hole 232, increasing the number of reserved symbols for special pattern 2 to three, and an additional three-eyed reserved symbol h23 is displayed.

In the following Figure 14 (4), the second special symbol display device 214 begins to display the finalization of special symbol 2, and the decorative symbol display device 208 begins to display the finalization of a decorative symbol combination such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12." Additionally, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a frozen "X" indicating a miss, and the mini symbol is displayed as a frozen "256."

When the display of the final decorative pattern begins, sliding door images fs appear on the left and right sides of the display screen (Figure 14 (5)), and the entire display screen becomes sliding door image fs with an animation of the sliding door closing (Figure 14 (6)). The background image, decorative pattern combinations such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12," and hold icons h21-h23 are overlapped by sliding door image fs and become invisible, but the mini pattern and the display in the fourth pattern/hold number display area 284 remain visible.

As shown in Figure 14 (6), when the entire display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes the sliding door image fs, a zone transition occurs and the device transitions to the sky zone. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (7), the sliding door begins to open, the back of the sliding door becomes visible, and a sky background corresponding to the sky zone is displayed. The sky zone is a pre-reading announcement with a higher probability of a jackpot than the sea zone. Note that the decorative pattern and background image may be made invisible by displaying effects until the sliding door is fully open. Note that the timing of the zone transition may be when the sliding door is fully open, or may be when the pattern changing display on the second special pattern display device 214 begins.

Furthermore, the sliding doors begin to open, and behind them, it becomes apparent that a frozen display of a decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" is being displayed, rather than a "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" combination.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure 14 (8), the sliding door is fully open and the sliding door image fs has disappeared. In this Figure 14 (8), the second special pattern display device 214 has begun displaying a changing pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 has also begun displaying a changing decorative pattern. The decorative pattern shown in Figure 14 (8) is undergoing a change display start operation. The decorative pattern combination at the time the decorative pattern change display begins is also "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6," and the change start operation is performed with this decorative pattern combination intact. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols temporarily displayed ("Decorative 12-Decorative 12-Decorative 12" shown in FIG. 14(3)) and the combination of decorative symbols at the start of the final display ("Decorative 12-Decorative 12-Decorative 12" shown in FIG. 14(4)) are different from the combination of decorative symbols when the next decorative symbol variable display begins (at the start or immediately after the start) ("Decorative 2-Decorative 5-Decorative 6" shown in FIG. 14(8)). Here, all of the decorative symbols are different in type. Since the decorative symbol combination at the start of the next decorative symbol variable display is not decorated with 12, the player is prevented from mistaking the zone entry symbol for another stop. Furthermore, since the decorative symbol combination at the start of the next decorative symbol variable display is a random decorative symbol combination indicating a miss, the player is prevented from mistaking the player for a jackpot. The decorative symbol combination at the start of the next decorative symbol variable display matches the mini symbol combination stopped in FIG. 14(4). However, they do not have to match, as long as the decorative pattern displayed when the next decorative pattern begins to change is clearly a miss at a glance (for example, a scattered pattern).

In Figure 14 (8), the mini and fourth symbols are already fluctuating at high speed, but when the fluctuations begin, they start from the same displayed symbols as the confirmed mini and fourth symbols (displays in Figure 14 (4)). In other words, the display of the mini and fourth symbols in response to the confirmed display of the special symbol (displays in Figure 14 (4)) is the same as the display when the mini and fourth symbols start fluctuating and the fourth symbol starts flashing in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuating display (displays immediately before Figure 14 (8)).

When the sliding door begins to open and the area behind it becomes visible (stage (7) in Figure 14), the decorative pattern combination remains displayed as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12," but may change to "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" when the next decorative pattern begins to change display.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (8) has also begun changing the mini pattern and flashing the fourth pattern. Furthermore, the shifting of the hold icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first hold icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 is displayed in green. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second hold icon h22 has become the first hold icon h21. The first hold icon h21 is displayed in red.

In Figure 14 (9), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern. Also, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (9) displays a line preview display sf1. The line preview is a normal preview that uses lines to suggest the likelihood of a jackpot in the currently occurring pattern change display. In this case, if the line preview includes the line "sun," the likelihood of a jackpot increases.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 14 (10), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is temporarily displayed. Furthermore, two balls have entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, so the number of reserved symbols for special pattern 2 has increased to four, and a three-eye reserved icon h23 and a fourth-eye reserved icon h24 are additionally displayed. In the following Figure 14 (11), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 2-Decoration 9" is displayed as a confirmed symbol.

In Figure 14 (12), the second special symbol display device 214 has begun displaying changing symbols, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also begun displaying changing symbols. The decorative symbols shown in Figure 14 (12) are operating at the start of the changing display. The mini symbol changes and the fourth symbol has also begun flashing. The pending icon has also been shifted, and the icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 has become the changing icon h0. The changing icon h0 shown in Figure 14 (13) is an icon that is displayed in red. The empty zone zone presentation continues, and the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an empty background.

Note that the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12" to the end of the final display (Figures 14 (3) to (7)) is longer than the period from the start of the provisional stop display of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 9" to the end of the final display (Figures 14 (10) to (11)).

In Figure 14 (13), the decorative pattern change display is rapidly changing downwards. Also, here, the normal dialogue preview is being displayed. The dialogue preview display sf2 in Figure 14 (13) includes the line "Sun," which indicates a higher chance of a jackpot than the dialogue preview display sf1 in Figure 14 (9).

In the following Figure 14 (14), a reach state has been achieved, and "Decoration 7" is displayed temporarily in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c.

In Figure 14 (15), the game progresses to a Super Reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai across the entire display screen. Additionally, the background display, variable icon display area 280, and special symbol 1 reserved icon display area 281 disappear, and the decorative symbol that was previously displayed large in the center of the display screen is now displayed in a reduced size in the bottom right corner of the display screen. Note that the mini symbol in the top left corner and the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the top right corner are visible even during the Super Reach.

Figure 15 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 14.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 15 (16), which continues from Figure 14 (15), displays an animation of the lord defeating an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols for a guaranteed jackpot, such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7", is temporarily displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 15 (17), the decorative symbol combination for the jackpot, "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7," is displayed as a confirmed jackpot, indicating that a 2R special jackpot (Special Symbol B) has been won. In addition, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of Special Symbol 2 is displayed as a stopped "○," and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped combination of "777."

In Figure 15 (18), the opening effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text "Congratulations on the jackpot." Also, because the variable winning slot 234 is located in the right-hand region, the first right-hit display RH1 is displayed. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening effect), a second right-hit display RH2 encouraging a right-hit is also displayed in addition to the first right-hit display RH1. This second right-hit display RH2 is a display mode in which the text "Hit" is displayed on the right side between two right-facing arrows spaced apart vertically, and is a larger display than the first right-hit display RH1.

In Figure 15 (19), the first round has begun, and the right-hit second display RH2 has disappeared and is no longer displayed, but the right-hit first display RH1 is still displayed. In the following Figure 15 (20), the second round has begun. In a 2R special jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. When the second round begins, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the words "Aim for the V," encouraging the game ball to pass through the V passing switch VS.

In Figure 15 (21), the game ball passes through the V-passing switch VS, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a V-winning notification, indicating that a V-winning has been achieved. In other words, it indicates that a transition to a special state will occur after the jackpot game ends.

In Figure 15 (22), the end effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Jackpot End." In addition, the right-hit first display RH1 continues to be displayed throughout the jackpot game, and is also displayed during this end effect.

When the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a special symbol high probability/normal symbol high probability state. In Figure 15 (23), the symbol change display has begun on the second special symbol display device 214, and the decorative symbol change display has also begun on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbols shown in Figure 15 (23) are undergoing the change display start operation. The decorative symbol combination at the time the decorative symbol change display begins is the same as the decorative symbol combination of the previous jackpot, "Decorative Symbol 7-Decorative Symbol 7-Decorative Symbol 7" (see Figure 15 (17)), and the change start operation is performed with this decorative symbol combination. In addition, the mini symbol change and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also begun. Furthermore, the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area 280, and two hold icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of special symbol 2.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 15 (23) displays a castle town background, which indicates the time-saving game state. Also, in the lower right corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, the words "119 remaining" are displayed as an indication of the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state.

Note that Figure 15 (23) shows a scene where the fluctuation has already begun, but after the end of the jackpot game and before the next fluctuation begins, the decorative symbol (here, "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7"), mini symbol (here, "7-7-7"), and fourth symbol are displayed in a visible state for a moment. In other words, the display of the mini symbol and fourth symbol in response to the confirmed display of the special symbol (the display in Figure 15 (17)) is the same as the display when the mini symbol fluctuation display and the fourth symbol flashing display begin in response to the start of the special symbol fluctuation display (the display immediately before Figure 15 (23)). In Figure 15 (24), the decorative symbol fluctuation display is rapidly fluctuating downwards.

In addition, the decorative pattern combination displayed when the jackpot game ends and the next decorative pattern variation display begins may be a combination indicating a miss, such as "Decorative 3-Decorative 7-Decorative 5" as shown in Figure 15 (23'). In Figure 15 (23'), the variation start operation is performed with a decorative pattern combination such as "Decorative 3-Decorative 7-Decorative 5." By doing so, the decorative pattern combination displayed as a temporary stop before the jackpot game begins ("Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7" as shown in Figure 15 (16)) and the decorative pattern combination displayed as a fixed display ("Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7" as shown in Figure 15 (17)) will be different from the decorative pattern combination displayed when the next decorative pattern variation display begins (at the start or immediately after the start) ("Decorative 3-Decorative 7-Decorative 5" as shown in Figure 15 (23')). In the example shown in Figure 15 (23'), the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are different, preventing the player from mistaking that they have won the jackpot again.

Even if the combination of decorative symbols temporarily displayed before the start of a jackpot game ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in Figure 15 (16)) or the combination of decorative symbols finally displayed ("Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" shown in Figure 15 (17)) is different from the combination of decorative symbols when the next decorative symbol variable display begins (at the start or immediately after the start) ("Decoration 3-Decoration 7-Decoration 5" shown in Figure 15 (23')), the mini symbols and fourth symbols will be displayed in the same way when the final display before the start of a jackpot game is different from when the next decorative symbol variable display begins (at the start or immediately after the start).

Next, we will explain a variation of the example game progression shown in Figures 14 and 15.

Figure 15 (3') shows the same state as Figure 14 (3), with the decorative symbol display device 208 displaying a temporary stop when three zone entry symbols of decoration 12 are aligned.

In the following Figure 15 (5'), while the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 214 continues, i.e., while the decorative symbol is still temporarily displayed, sliding door images fs appear on the left and right sides of the display screen. Then, while the decorative symbol is still temporarily displayed, an animation of the sliding door closing is displayed.

As shown in Figure 15 (6'), when the sliding door is completely closed, the second special symbol display device 214 begins to display the confirmed special symbol 2, and in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed frozen as an "X" indicating a miss, and the mini symbol is displayed frozen as "256." The decorative symbol display is overlapped by the sliding door image fs and cannot be seen.

Figure 15 (7') shows the same state as Figure 14 (7), where the sliding doors begin to open on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the statically displayed "Decoration 2 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 6" begins to appear. It is also possible for "Decoration 12 - Decoration 12 - Decoration 12" to begin to appear.

As explained above, the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" may end when the decorative pattern display is no longer visible (difficult to see). In other words, the final display on the special symbol display device or the final display of the decorative pattern may start when the decorative pattern is no longer visible (difficult to see). Then, when the decorative pattern display becomes visible, it may be displayed differently from the temporary stop display. Note that this is not limited to the temporary stop display of "Decoration 12," but other decorative patterns (for example, "Decoration 11" or "Decoration 13") may also end in a similarly invisible (difficult to see) state.

Note that examples of effects that cause decorative patterns to disappear include blackouts (Figure 12 (3)), wipe effects (Figures 12 (10) to (12)), animation of sliding door image fs (Figures 14 (5) to (7)), and effect displays, but effects that cause decorative patterns to disappear are not limited to these.

Figure 16 shows an example of a power outage occurring during the final display of a decorative pattern, but immediately being restored.

Figure 16 (9-1) is in the same state as Figure 12 (9), with a confirmed display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1." A power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being made, but power is restored immediately. Figure 16 (9-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. In the pachinko machine 100, the power restoration process (step S111) shown in Figure 6 is executed, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 16 (9-3) displays the text "Preparing for restoration." Eventually, the first special pattern display device 212 begins displaying a changing pattern, and as shown in Figure 16 (13'), the decorative pattern display device 208 also begins displaying a changing decorative pattern. The decorative pattern shown in Figure 16 (13') is undergoing the start of the changing display operation. The decorative pattern combination at the time of power restoration in Figure 16 (13') is different from the decorative pattern combination that was confirmed and displayed at the time of power outage ("Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1"), and also different from the decorative pattern combination that would have been displayed when the next decorative pattern change began if there had been no power outage (the decorative pattern combination shown in Figure 12 (13)). A decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" corresponds to the initial pattern combination and is always displayed when power is restored. This initial pattern combination is displayed, and the decorative pattern change begins. The mini pattern change and the fourth pattern flashing also begin.

The shifting of the reserved icons has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first reserved icon h11 has now become the variable icon h0, but the display mode of the variable icon h0 as well as the display modes of the reserved icons h11 and h12 are now the default display mode. Furthermore, no stage change has been made, and the lord's character YM1 and the character display YM2, which differs for each type of decorative pattern, are not displayed.

Note that Figure 16 (13') shows a scene where the display has already begun, but after the "Preparing to restore" message has finished displaying, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini pattern (here, "1-2-3"), and fourth pattern are displayed briefly in a visible state before the next change begins. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when power is restored differs from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern that were confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage (the display in Figure 16 (9-1)), and also differs from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when the display of the next decorative pattern change begins if there had been no power outage (the display immediately before Figure 12 (13)).

Figure 16 (4-1) shows the same state as Figure 14 (4), with a confirmed display of a decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12." Here, too, a power outage occurs while this confirmation display is being made, but power is immediately restored. Figure 16 (4-2) shows that a power outage has occurred. The pachinko machine 100 executes the power restoration process (step S111) shown in Figure 6, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 16 (4-3) displays the text "Preparing for restoration." Eventually, the first special pattern display device 212 begins displaying a changing pattern, and as shown in Figure 16 (8'), the decorative pattern display device 208 also begins displaying a changing decorative pattern. The decorative pattern shown in Figure 16 (8') is undergoing the initial display operation. The decorative pattern combination at the time of power restoration in Figure 16 (8') is the initial pattern combination described above, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3." As a result, when power is restored and the next decorative pattern begins to change, the decorative pattern combination ("Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3") differs from the decorative pattern combination that was confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage ("Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12"), and also differs from the decorative pattern combination shown in Figure 14 (8) ("Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6") that would have occurred if there had been no power outage and the next decorative pattern begins to change. Additionally, mini-pattern changes and the fourth pattern flashing have also begun.

Also, in Figure 16 (8'), the variable icon h0 in the default display mode and the hold icons h21 and h22 in the default display mode are displayed. Furthermore, the zone effect itself is not being performed, and a castle town background is displayed, indicating the time-saving game mode.

Note that Figure 16 (8') shows a scene where the display has already begun, but after the "Preparing to restore" message has finished displaying, the decorative pattern (here, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3"), mini pattern (here, "1-2-3"), and fourth pattern are displayed briefly in a visible state before the next change begins. In other words, the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when power is restored differs from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern that were confirmed and displayed at the time of the power outage (the display in Figure 16 (4-1)), and also differs from the display of the mini pattern and fourth pattern when the display of the next decorative pattern change begins if there had been no power outage (the display immediately before Figure 14 (8)).

In this embodiment, the initial symbol combination is "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3," but the initial symbol combination is not limited to this and may be other combinations. However, combinations that suggest a jackpot are not desirable, and it is preferable to use combinations that cannot be displayed in the variable display.

According to the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208] capable of displaying a decorative pattern variation display that varies the decorative pattern,
The display means executes a decorative pattern confirmation display that displays the decorative pattern in a state where the decorative pattern can be confirmed [for example, a display when the display of the decorative pattern disguise display starts, a display at the start of the variable display operation, a temporary stop display of the decorative pattern disguise display, a stop display (confirmed display) that is displayed when the decorative pattern disguise display ends, and a display that combines the temporary stop display and the confirmed display],
The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may differ from the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display starts (for example, Figure 12 (2) and Figure 12 (4), Figure 12 (9) and Figure 12 (13), Figure 13 (22) and Figure 13 (24), Figure 14 (4) and Figure 14 (8), Figure 15 (17) and Figure 15 (23')).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has begun is a picture decorative pattern, when the next decorative pattern change display begins, the player will not be given the mistaken impression that they have won a jackpot due to the picture decorative pattern. Also, if the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has begun is a decorative pattern that represents a jackpot, when the next decorative pattern change display begins, the player will not be given the mistaken impression that they have won another jackpot.

Note that the display of decorative patterns may be a display of a combination of decorative patterns. Furthermore, the decorative patterns may be numbers, symbols, or pictures.

The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has begun may be a display suggesting the results of the lottery.

The decorative pattern confirmation display that appears after the decorative pattern change display has begun may be included in its entirety or in part in the decorative pattern change display, or it may not be included in the decorative pattern change display but may be included in the decorative pattern stop display that begins following the decorative pattern change display.

"The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started and the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display starts being different does not mean that the type of decorative pattern [e.g., Decoration 1 to Decoration 13] is the same but the display mode [e.g., whether or not character YM2 is displayed] is different, but that the type of decorative pattern is different." The type of decorative pattern referred to here may be a type that represents numbers, a type of symbol, or a type of picture.

Displays that allow the decorative pattern to be confirmed by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern are included in the decorative pattern confirmation display. However, if the display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (swaying display) disappears or becomes invisible, it is not included in the decorative pattern confirmation display.

Also,
"The decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started and the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern change display starts may be the same [for example, Figure 13 (16) and Figure 17, Figure 14 (11) and Figure 12, Figure 15 (17) and Figure 23].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

"When a power outage is restored while the decorative pattern confirmation display is being displayed after the decorative pattern change display has begun, the display means may display a predetermined display (initial display) as the decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" as shown in Figure 16 (13') or Figure 16 (8')]. That is, the first display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern variation display has started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (9) or "Decoration 12-Decoration 12-Decoration 12" in FIG. 14 (4)], and the second display of the decorative pattern, which is the decorative pattern confirmation display when the next decorative pattern variation display is started [for example, "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in FIG. 12 (13) or "Decoration 2-Decoration 5-Decoration 6" in FIG. 14 (8)], may be different, and if power is interrupted and restored while the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern variation display has started is being displayed, the display means may display a third display, which is different from both the first and second displays [for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" in FIG. 16 (13') or "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" in FIG. 16 (8')] as the decorative pattern confirmation display.
"When the first decorative pattern confirmation display after starting the decorative pattern changing display and the second decorative pattern confirmation display when starting the next decorative pattern changing display are different, the display time of the first decorative pattern confirmation display [for example, the period from FIG. 12(8) to FIG. 12(12) is longer than the period from FIG. 12(15) to FIG. 13(16), the period from FIG. 14(3) to FIG. 14(7) is longer than the period from FIG. 14(10) to FIG. 14(11)] may be longer than when the first decorative pattern confirmation display and the second decorative pattern confirmation display are the same."
Furthermore, the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern variation display has begun may be a display of a temporary stop of the decorative pattern (a swinging display), a display of a final stop of the decorative pattern (a confirmation display), or a display from the start of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern until the final stop display ends. The display time of the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern may vary. For example, it may be 0 seconds, or it may be a display time of 1 to 10 seconds. On the other hand, the display time of the final stop of the decorative pattern may be constant. However, the display of the final stop of the decorative pattern may be short in the case of a specific first display (for example, a display notifying a small win) or long in the case of a specific second display (for example, a display notifying a big win or a display in which effects such as stage transition or zone change are performed).

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying a different pattern variation that changes and displays a different pattern from the decorative pattern [for example, a fourth pattern (a pattern variation notification area in the fourth pattern/hold number display area 284), a mini pattern],
The display means executes a separate symbol confirmation display that displays a separate symbol in a state where the separate symbol can be confirmed [for example, the display immediately before Figures 12(9) to 12(12) or 12(13)],
The other pattern confirmation display after the start of the other pattern change display [for example, the fourth pattern or mini pattern in Figure 12 (9) to Figure 12 (12)] is the same as the other pattern confirmation display when the next other pattern change display starts [for example, the fourth pattern or mini pattern just before Figure 12 (13)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

"The first display of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern confirmation display after the decorative pattern change display has started may be a display that will not be displayed in the separate pattern confirmation display after the separate pattern change display has started [for example, decoration 11 to decoration 13 or a pseudo consecutive pattern (a decorative pattern marked 'NEXT')]."
The display of a different symbol (different symbol variation display, different symbol confirmation display) may be a display of a combination of different symbols, or a display of a single different symbol. The different symbol may be a number or a symbol.

In addition, the display of the different symbols (different symbol variation display, different symbol confirmation display) may be displayed on a device other than the display means. For example, it may be a second display device (liquid crystal display device or lamp) dedicated to the different symbols, or it may be a secondary display device when the display means is the primary display device.

Next, we will explain the event prediction announcement that is executed after the failure reach performance ends.

Figure 17 shows an example of a step-by-step event prediction forecast. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving mode (low probability of special and normal symbols) and left-handed play is recommended.

In Figure 17 (1), the first special pattern display device 212 is displaying a changing pattern, and the decorative pattern display device 208 is also displaying a changing decorative pattern. In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 17 (1), the changing icon display area 280 displays the changing icon h0 in the default display mode, and the special pattern 1 hold icon display area 281 displays three hold icons h11 to h13. These three hold icons h11 to h13 are also in the default display mode.

Note that the decorative pattern change display shown in Figure 17 (1) may include the pending icon change notice described below or the zone effect described using Figures 14 and 15.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 17 (2), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed, and in the following Figure 17 (3), a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is displayed as a confirmed combination.

In addition, the decorative pattern change display shown in Figures 17 (1) to (2) is a normal change, and there may be a shortened change in which the decorative pattern change display time is shorter than this normal change (for example, 5 seconds), and the period of the temporary stop display of a losing decorative pattern combination is shorter in the shortened change than in the normal change. Furthermore, the shortened change also includes an ultra-shortened change in which the period of the temporary stop display is 0 seconds. In addition, in the shortened change, no action is performed at the start of the decorative pattern change display.

In Figure 17 (4), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying a changing symbol, and the decorative symbol has also begun displaying a changing symbol. The pending icon shift has also been completed, with the icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 now being the changing icon h0. The icon that was previously the second pending icon h12 has now become the first pending icon h11. The display mode of this newly-formed first pending icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to a green display mode during the shift, and a pending icon change notice has begun. This pending icon change notice is a type of pre-reading notice that suggests there is a possibility of a jackpot when the pending represented by the pending icon whose display mode has changed is consumed and the pattern change display that begins. The likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the display mode, with the green display mode offering a higher likelihood of a jackpot than the default display mode. The pending icon change notice will start when the pending amount increases or when a shift movement occurs, but it will not start during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or when the decorative pattern is confirmed. If the pending amount increases during these periods, the pending icon change notice will be performed when a shift movement occurs.

In Figure 17 (5), a ball lands in the special chart 1 starting hole 230, increasing the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 to three, and a three-eyed reserved icon h13 is additionally displayed. When the reserved balls increase here, a reserved icon change notification is also initiated, and the additional third reserved icon h13 is displayed in green. A button notification, a type of normal notification, is also initiated. In the button notification, an image related to the effect button 136 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. An image urging the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid operation period is displayed. More specifically, a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136, a meter display 136b showing the remaining time of the valid operation period, and a "Press" character display 136c urging the player to press the button are displayed. In this example, the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period. When the effect button 136 is pressed, the upper effect device 2, which is in its initial position above the decorative pattern display device 208, descends in front of the decorative pattern display device 208. In the button preview, the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on how far the upper performance device 2 descends; the further the upper performance device 2 descends, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. In Figure 17 (6), the upper performance device 2 descends slightly while the decorative symbols are fluctuating rapidly in the left symbol display area 208a, center symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. In Figure 17 (7), the upper performance device 2 rises to its initial position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily displays the missing decorative symbol combination, "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8." Then, in Figure 17 (8), "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a confirmed combination.

In Figure 17 (9), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying a changing symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also begun displaying a changing decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 17 (9) is operating at the start of the changing display. The mini symbol has also begun changing, and the fourth symbol has begun flashing. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the first pending icon h11, which was displayed in green, has become the changing icon h0, which is also displayed in green, and now the normal preview is being performed.

In Figure 17 (10), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In Figure 17 (11), the reach effect has begun, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach effect has begun.

In Figure 17 (12), a normal reach does not develop into a super reach, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In Figure 17 (13), which follows Figure 17 (12), a pre-event prediction is made while a missing decorative symbol combination, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1," remains temporarily displayed. The period of the temporary display of the missing decorative symbol combination when a reach is achieved (Figures 17 (12) to (13)) is longer than the period of the temporary display of the missing decorative symbol combination when a reach is not achieved (Figure 17 (2)). Furthermore, the pre-event prediction in Figure 17 (13) is an animated display in which a character on a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge." In this example, the event prediction notice predicts an event that will occur in one of the one or more symbol change displays currently pending. It may predict the confirmation of a jackpot symbol, i.e., a jackpot, or it may predict the upcoming implementation of a reach pattern with a higher probability of a jackpot than the currently implemented reach pattern. In this example, since the normal reach was reached, it predicts that the symbol change display that will begin when one of the two pending holds is consumed will develop into a super reach or special super reach. Note that the event prediction notice may also notify the probability of a jackpot in addition to the event prediction. For example, the probability of a jackpot may be announced based on the type of animation display js. Alternatively, it may not notify the probability of a jackpot, but only the probability of a jackpot. Even if the event prediction notice is executed, it may not develop into a super reach or special super reach (a so-called false notice).

In addition, the second hold icon h12 continues to notify you of changes to the hold icon.

In Figure 17 (14), a winning combination of decorative symbols, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1," is displayed.

In Figure 17 (15), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying a changing symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also begun displaying a changing decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 17 (15) is operating as it does when the changing display begins. The mini symbol has also begun to change, and the fourth symbol has begun to flash. Furthermore, the shift movement of the pending icon has also been completed, and the first pending icon h11, which was in the default display mode, has become the changing icon h0, which also has the default display mode.

Figure 18 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 17.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 18 (16), which continues from Figure 17 (15), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In Figure 18 (17), two balls land in the Special Chart 1 starting slot 230, increasing the number of reserved symbols for Special Chart 1 to three, and a second reserved symbol h12 and a third reserved symbol h13 are additionally displayed. Furthermore, a reach effect begins, and "Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has begun. In the following Figure 18 (18), as predicted by the event prediction, the event develops into a Super (SP) reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai across the entire display screen. In Figure 18 (19), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai without developing into a Special Super reach, and a losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In Figure 18 (20), which follows Figure 18 (19), a pre-event prediction is made while the temporary stop display of a losing decorative symbol combination, such as "decorative 4-decorative 6-decorative 4," continues. The period of the temporary stop display of a losing decorative symbol combination when the game progresses to a super reach (Figures 18 (19) to (20)) is longer than the period of the temporary stop display of a losing decorative symbol combination when the reach is not established (Figure 17 (2)), and is longer than the period of the temporary stop display of a losing decorative symbol combination when the reach is established but does not progress to a super reach (Figures 17 (12) to (13)). The pre-event prediction in Figure 18 (20) is the same animation display js as the pre-event prediction in Figure 17 (13). The Super Reach Stop Event Prediction in Figure 18 (20) is a symbol change display that begins when one of the three reserved positions is consumed, and predicts that it will develop into a Special Super Reach, which has a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach.

In Figure 18 (21), a confirmation display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4" is shown.

In addition, even when the decorative pattern changes shown in Figures 17 (15) to 18 (20) are displayed, the pending icon change notice and the zone effects described using Figures 14 to 15 may be executed.

In Figure 18 (22), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying a changing symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has also begun displaying a changing decorative symbol. The decorative symbol shown in Figure 18 (22) is undergoing the initial display change operation. The mini symbol change and the flashing display of the fourth symbol have also begun. Furthermore, the shifting of the reserved icon has also been completed, with the first reserved icon h11, which was displayed in green, now being the changing icon h0, also in green. Furthermore, the icon that was previously the second reserved icon h12 has become the first reserved icon h11. The display mode of this new first reserved icon h11 has changed from the default display mode to a red display mode during the shifting, and a reserve icon change notification, which is a pre-reading notification, has begun. A pre-reading notification using a reserve icon in red display mode has a higher chance of a jackpot than a pre-reading notification using a reserve icon in green display mode.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 18 (23), the decorative pattern change display changes rapidly downward.

In Figure 18 (24), the reach effect begins, and "Decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has begun. Furthermore, in Figure 18 (24), where the reach state has been established, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the dialogue preview display sf3, which is a type of normal preview. In the following Figure 18 (25), this develops into a super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai across the entire display screen. Furthermore, in Figure 18 (26), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a red flashing display fl1, which indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, and as predicted by the event prediction preview in Figure 18 (20), the situation has developed into a special super (SPSP) reach. However, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 18 (27), a losing decorative symbol combination of "Decorative 3-Decorative 6-Decorative 3" appears in the red flash display fl1, and in the following Figure (28), the losing decorative symbol combination of "Decorative 3-Decorative 6-Decorative 3" continues to be displayed as a temporary stop. After that, in Figure 18 (29), a wipe effect is initiated as a revival effect, and in Figure 18 (30), where the wipe-in is complete, the decorative symbol display is obscured by the wipe display wp.

Figure 19 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 18.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 19 (31), which follows on from Figure 18 (30), a wipeout has begun, and part of the decorative symbol is becoming visible. In the following Figure 19 (32), the wipe effect has ended, and the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 6-Decoration 3" is still displayed as a temporary stop, resulting in a failed revival effect. Also in Figure 19 (32), an animation display js is displayed, indicating that an event pre-reading notice is being executed. Here, it is assumed that this is being executed for the next reserved symbol to be consumed, and the variable display where the event pre-reading notice was executed predicts that a jackpot will occur, as a special super reach has been executed.

It may also start in Figure 18 (28) before the wipe effect begins.

In Figure 19 (33), a winning decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed.

The period of time for which a missing decorative symbol combination is temporarily displayed when a reach develops into a Special Super Reach (Figures 18 (28) to 19 (32)) is longer than the period of time for which a missing decorative symbol combination is temporarily displayed when a reach does not develop into a Special Super Reach (Figures 17 (2)), and is longer than the period of time for which a missing decorative symbol combination is temporarily displayed when a reach develops into a Super Reach but does not develop into a Special Super Reach (Figures 18 (28) to 19 (32)). Furthermore, the period of time for which a missing decorative symbol combination is temporarily displayed when a reach develops into a Special Super Reach but does not develop into a Special Super Reach (Figures 18 (19) to 18 (20)).

In Figure 19 (34), the first special symbol display device 212 has begun displaying changing symbols, and the decorative symbol display has also begun to change. The pending icon shift has also been completed, and the first pending icon h11, which was displayed in red, has become the changing icon h0, also displayed in red, and the normal preview has begun.

In Figure 19 (35), a button preview, a type of normal preview, has also begun, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a button image 136a, a meter display 136b, and the word "Press" 136c. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid operation period, the upper effect device 2 descends from its initial position to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In Figure 19 (36), the decorative symbols are fluctuating rapidly in the left symbol display area 208a, the center symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The upper effect device 2 descends more rapidly than in Figure 17 (6), indicating a high probability of a jackpot. Eventually, in Figure 19 (37), a reach effect begins, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has begun. In the following Figure 19 (38), the game progresses to a Super Reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai across the entire display screen. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 19 (39) displays a rainbow-colored flashing display fl2, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, and the game progresses to a Special Super (SPSP) Reach. Rainbow colors are more likely to result in a jackpot than red, and represent a confirmed jackpot. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 19 (40), a losing decorative symbol combination, such as "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7," temporarily displayed within the rainbow-colored flashing display fl2, appears. In the following Figure 19 (41), a wipe effect is initiated as a revival effect. In Figure 19 (42), where the wipe-in is complete, the decorative symbol display is temporarily hidden by the wipe display wp. Once the wipe-in is complete, the wipe-out begins, and part of the decorative symbol becomes visible. In Figure 19 (43), the wipe effect ends, and the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 13-Decoration 7" for a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot on "Special Chart B") is temporarily displayed, indicating that the revival effect was successful. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 19 (44) confirms and displays the decorative symbol combination for that normal jackpot.

The revival effect may be an effect that always occurs when a special super reach ends, or an effect that may or may not occur. Furthermore, the part that becomes visible due to a wipeout may have its display content made difficult to see by an effect display ef (see Figure 14 (7)), such as light emission, and when the wipeout is complete, the effect display also ends, making the display content visible. Alternatively, high-speed re-fluctuations may occur during the wipe effect, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern from the part that became visible due to the wipeout, and when the wipe effect ends, the re-fluctuation may also end, and the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a wipe effect may not be performed, and high-speed re-fluctuations may be performed as a revival effect.

In the game progression examples shown in Figures 17 to 19 above, the same event pre-reading preview animation display js was executed for each miss reach with a different reach pattern (reach type), and the next change was the target change for the pre-reading preview. However, the event pre-reading preview animation display js is not only executed each time with a continuous display of decorative pattern changes, but can also be executed one-off. In this case, the change two steps ahead may be the target change for the pre-reading preview, the change three steps ahead may be the target change for the pre-reading preview, or the change four steps ahead may be the target change for the pre-reading preview. Note that if there are two or more pending events, the player will not know which change is the target change for the pre-reading preview.

Furthermore, Figure 19(a) summarizes the relationship between the execution reach pattern of the event pre-reading forecast and the events (suggested content) that are the subject of the event pre-reading forecast.

If a normal reach is missed and an event prediction is executed, the event prediction will be a prediction that a super (SP) reach or special super (SPSP) reach will occur.

If a Super (SP) Reach misses and an Event Prediction Notice is executed, the Event Prediction Notice will be a notice that a Special Super (SPSP) Reach will occur.

If the Special Super (SPSP) Reach progresses but fails and an Event Prediction Notice is executed, the Event Prediction Notice will be displayed as a notice of a confirmed jackpot.

In addition, if a normal reach is missed, the event prediction notice may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the reach presentation pattern in the special chart low probability state (non-probability variable play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach presentation pattern in the special chart high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed; conversely, if the reach presentation pattern in the special chart high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach presentation pattern in the special chart low probability state (non-probability variable play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

In addition, if the reach effect pattern in a normal low probability state (non-time-saving play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach effect pattern in a normal high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed; conversely, if the reach effect pattern in a normal high probability state is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach effect pattern in a normal low probability state (non-time-saving play state) is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

In addition, if the reach performance pattern in an advantageous state (special chart high probability state, normal chart high probability state, special chart high/low probability state, normal chart low probability state, special chart low/low probability state, normal chart high probability state), is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach performance pattern in a normal state (special chart low probability state, normal chart low probability state), is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed. Conversely, if the reach performance pattern in a normal state (special chart low probability state, normal chart low probability state), is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed, and if the reach performance pattern in an advantageous state (special chart high probability state, normal chart high probability state, special chart high/low probability state, normal chart low probability state, special chart low probability state, normal chart high probability state), is a miss, the event pre-reading notice may be executed.

Furthermore, the event prediction effect may not be a hint of a reach, but may be an indication of the likelihood of a jackpot (see Figure 20). Furthermore, instead of the event prediction effect, an effect may be executed that suggests the setting value that will be changed in the setting change process of step S117 in Figure 6.

Furthermore, even if a reach miss occurs, the event pre-reading notice is not necessarily executed, and may not be executed in some cases. For example, even if a normal reach miss occurs and the next change develops into a super reach, the event pre-reading notice may not be executed. Alternatively, in the display of decorative pattern changes in a predetermined state (for example, the display of decorative pattern changes in the b time-saving game state (during Yu-time), or the display of the final decorative pattern change while the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state is maintained), the event pre-reading notice may not be executed even if a reach miss occurs.

Also, if a normal reach miss occurs and an event pre-reading notice is executed, the event pre-reading notice may be executed repeatedly until the variation that is the subject of the event pre-reading notice is reached. In other words, the same event pre-reading notice may be executed for each variation (each temporary stop display period).

Also, the event prediction notice was a specific display of an animated character appearing on a motorcycle and chanting "revenge," but it could also be a specific sound or light.

Next, we will explain a variation of the example game progression shown in Figures 17 to 19.

Figure 20 shows a step-by-step diagram of a modified event look-ahead prediction.

Figure 20 (19') shows the same state as Figure 18 (19), but without progressing to a Special Super Reach, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by an enemy samurai, and a losing decorative symbol combination such as "Decoration 4-Decoration 6-Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In the following Figure 20 (20'), an event-mixed prediction has begun instead of an event-prediction prediction. In this event-mixed prediction, a single character image ec is displayed across the entire display screen, captivating the player's attention. If the character speaks a line, it is highly likely that a revival effect will occur or that there is a jackpot in the reserve. In other words, a prediction that a revival effect will occur corresponds to a normal event prediction, and a prediction that there is a jackpot in the reserve corresponds to an event-prediction prediction. In the single image ec displayed in Figure 20 (20'), the line "Not yet" is spoken, and in Figure 20 (21'), a wipe effect begins as a revival effect. In Figure 20 (22'), when the wipe-in is complete, the single image ec is hidden by the wipe display WP. Next, a wipe-out occurs, and in Figure 20 (23'), the wipe effect ends. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 20 (23') temporarily displays the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 13-Decoration 4" for a normal jackpot (a 3R normal jackpot on "Special Chart B"), indicating that the revival effect was successful. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 20 (24'), the decorative symbol combination for that normal jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 20 (19") is in the same state as Figure 18 (19), and without progressing to a Special Super Reach, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation showing the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In the following Figure 20 (20"), an event pre-reading notification has begun. This event pre-reading notification is not a pre-reading notification for any of the pending events, but a pre-reading notification that determines the variation that will be predicted. In other words, if the character makes a thumbs-up pose, it is a pre-reading notification that there is a possibility of a jackpot in the next variation, and if the character speaks, it is a pre-reading notification that a jackpot is confirmed in the next variation. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 20 (20") displays a display CP of the character making a thumbs-up pose.

In Figure 20 (21''), a confirmation display of a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 4" is shown.

In Figure 20 (22"), the next variation predicted by the event prediction begins. First, the first special symbol display device 212 begins displaying the varying symbols, followed by Figure 20 (23"), in which the varying decorative symbols begin to be displayed. During this next variation, a reach state is established in Figure 20 (24"), which develops into a super reach in Figure 20 (25"), and Figure 20 (26") displays the confirmed decorative symbol combination for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 4 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 4."

According to the above description,
"A pre-reading performance means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208) that executes a plurality of types of pre-reading performances;
A notice performance means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) for executing a notice performance (for example, a button notice, a dialogue notice) in the currently performed pattern change display;
A gaming machine equipped with
One type of pre-reading effect among the plurality of types of pre-reading effects is a first pre-reading effect [for example, a hold icon change notice, a zone effect],
One of the plurality of types of pre-reading effects is a second pre-reading effect [for example, an event pre-reading notice],
The look-ahead performance means may execute the first look-ahead performance in parallel with the preview performance [for example, in FIG. 14 (9), the first hold icon h11 displays the look-ahead preview and the dialogue preview sf1, and in FIG. 14 (13), the empty zone displays the look-ahead preview and the dialogue preview sf2].
The look-ahead performance means does not execute the second look-ahead performance in parallel with the preview performance (for example, in Figures 17(13), 18(20), and 18(28) to 18(32), the preview performance is not executed and only the event look-ahead performance is executed),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes the second pre-reading announcement stand out.

Note that the preview effect is a so-called normal preview, but instead of this preview effect, a preview effect other than the first preview effect and the second preview effect may be used.

Furthermore, the preview performance, the first pre-reading performance, and the second pre-reading performance were displayed, but they are not limited to displays and may also be sounds, lights, or the movement of moving objects, etc.

Also,
"The pre-reading performance means does not start the execution of the first pre-reading performance [for example, a notice of a change in the reserved icon] during a first period [for example, the period from when the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern starts until the fixed display of the decorative pattern starts] [for example, if there is an increase in reserved numbers during the first period, it will not start but will start when the shift movement occurs],
The look-ahead effect means may start executing the second look-ahead effect during the first period [e.g., Figure 17 (13), Figure 18 (20), Figure 19 (32)].
He also explained.

The first period may have different lengths.

Also,
"A display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208) capable of executing a decorative pattern variable display that changes the display of the decorative pattern is provided,
The decorative pattern change display may include a suggestion period that indicates the result of the winning/losing judgment [for example, a period during which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (Fig. 18 (28) and Fig. 19 (32)].
The first period is a period including the suggestion period (for example, the period from FIG. 18 (28) to FIG. 19 (32), including the period during which the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is not visible (FIG. 18 (29) to FIG. 19 (31))).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Here, the display means is capable of displaying a static decorative pattern following the display of a changing decorative pattern, and the first period may be a period that does not include the period during which the static decorative pattern is displayed (for example, the period during which the final decorative pattern is displayed in Figure 19 (33)). The static decorative pattern display can also be said to suggest the result of the win/loss determination, but it can also be said that the static decorative pattern display notifies the result of the win/loss determination.

The first period may also be a period that includes a period during which a temporary stop display (wave display) of the decorative pattern is displayed. More specifically, the first period may be a period from when the temporary stop display (wave display) of the decorative pattern begins to be displayed, until the temporary stop display becomes invisible, and then the temporary stop display becomes visible again and a permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed. Alternatively, the first period may be a period from when the temporary stop display (wave display) of the decorative pattern begins to be displayed, until the temporary stop display becomes invisible, and then the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed without the temporary stop display becoming visible again. In other words, the first period may be a period from when the temporary stop display (wave display) of the decorative pattern begins to be displayed, until the permanent stop display (confirmed display) is displayed.

Also,
"The decorative pattern change display has multiple types of change display patterns [for example, change patterns including reach patterns],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests what will happen in the decorative pattern variation display that will start after this [for example, what kind of reach pattern will be executed or whether a jackpot will be won],
The second pre-reading effect is an effect in which the content suggested varies depending on the pattern [for example, FIG. 19(a)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

"One type of pattern among the multiple types of patterns is a first pattern [for example, a variation pattern in which a reach is not established], and one type of pattern among the multiple types of patterns is a second pattern [for example, a variation pattern of a normal reach], and the second pattern has a longer suggestion period than the first pattern [for example, Figures 17(12) to 17(13) are longer than Figure 17(2)], and the look-ahead performance means does not execute the second look-ahead performance in the first pattern [for example, Figure 17(2)], and the look-ahead performance means may execute the second look-ahead performance in the second pattern [for example, Figure 18(20)], and the look-ahead performance means, In both the first pattern and the second pattern, the first predictive effect [for example, a pending icon change notice] may be executed [for example, a pending icon change notice may be executed in FIG. 17 (1), and a pending icon change notice using the second pending icon h12 is executed in FIGS. 17 (12) to (13)]." Furthermore, the second pattern may be a reach effect (a variable display effect in which two identical decorative patterns can be seen but the third decorative pattern cannot be seen), and the first pattern may be a non-reach effect (a variable display effect in which two different decorative patterns can be seen but the third decorative pattern cannot be seen).

"One of the multiple types of patterns may be a first reach effect pattern, and one of the multiple types of variable display patterns may be a second reach effect pattern, and the look-ahead effect means may not execute the second look-ahead effect in the first reach effect pattern, and the look-ahead effect means may execute the second look-ahead effect in the second reach effect pattern." Furthermore, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first reach effect pattern. For example, the second reach effect pattern may be a super reach or special super reach pattern, and the first reach effect pattern may be a normal reach pattern. Furthermore, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special chart high probability state (probability change game state), and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special chart low probability state (non-probability change game state). Alternatively, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special low probability state, and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a special high probability state. Also, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal high probability state (time-shortened game state), and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal low probability state (non-time-shortened game state). Alternatively, the second reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal low probability state, and the first reach effect pattern may be a reach effect pattern in a normal high probability state. Furthermore, the second reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in an advantageous state (special chart high probability state, normal chart high probability state, special chart high/low probability state, normal chart low probability state, special chart low probability state, normal chart high probability state), and the first reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in a normal state (special chart low probability state, normal chart low probability state). Alternatively, conversely, the second reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in the normal state, and the first reach presentation pattern may be a reach presentation pattern in the advantageous state.

"The look-ahead performance means may be capable of executing the second look-ahead performance in which the suggested content [for example, the event that is the subject of the look-ahead notice] differs depending on the type of pattern, but the performance format remains the same [for example, an animation display js in which a character on a motorcycle appears and chants "revenge"]." In other words, the suggested content of the second look-ahead performance may differ depending on the type of pattern, but the performance format remains the same.

"The look-ahead performance means may, when a reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, perform, as the second look-ahead performance, a look-ahead performance suggesting that a reach performance of a higher rank than the reach performance (for example, a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance, or a reach performance with a longer performance time than the reach performance) will be executed, and when the highest rank reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, perform, as the second look-ahead performance, a look-ahead performance suggesting that a decorative pattern variation display that will result in a jackpot within the reserve will be executed."
"The look-ahead performance means may execute the second look-ahead performance when a reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, but in the case of a pattern change display in a predetermined state (for example, a pattern change display during Yu-time, or the final pattern change display while a time-limited game state or a probability variable game state is maintained), even if a reach performance is performed and it is suggested that the result of the hit/miss judgment during the suggestion period is a miss, the second look-ahead performance may not be executed."
Next, we will explain the reel vibration effect. The reel vibration effect is a normal notice that has two types of effects: reel vibration effect A and reel vibration effect B. In both vibration effects, the common reel (upper effect device 2) vibrates.

Figure 21(a) is a diagram showing a table related to reel vibration effect A. Reel vibration effect A may occur during a Super (SP) Reach or a Special Super (SPSP) Reach. As shown in this table, when reel vibration effect A occurs during a Super (SP) Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 40%, and when it occurs during a Special Super (SPSP) Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55%. In this way, reel vibration effect A is a normal preview effect in which the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on the timing of its execution. Furthermore, before the effect (vibration) begins, reel vibration effect A displays an image related to the vibrating reel (upper effect device 2) on the decorative pattern display device 208.

Figure 21 (b) is a diagram showing a table related to reel vibration effect B. Reel vibration effect B may be performed during the variable display of decorative symbols that result in a Super (SP) reach, or during the variable display of decorative symbols that result in a Special Super (SPSP) reach. While the reel vibration effect A described above has only one execution timing for each variable display of decorative symbols, reel vibration effect B has multiple execution timings for each variable display of decorative symbols. The expected probability of a jackpot differs for each of these execution timings. That is, in the decorative pattern variation display where a Super (SP) reach is performed, if the role vibration effect B is performed at the start of the decorative pattern variation, the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%, if it is performed during the reach state when the reach state is first established (before the Super reach development), the expected probability of a jackpot is 35%, if it is performed during the Super reach (after the Super reach development and before the decorative pattern temporary stop display), the expected probability of a jackpot is 45%, and if it is performed during the temporary stop display of a decorative pattern combination representing a loss (during the execution of the revival effect), the expected probability of a jackpot is 100%. Note that since the expected probability of a jackpot is 100%, the temporary stop display of a decorative pattern combination representing a loss is during the execution of the revival effect that will ultimately result in a jackpot. Furthermore, in the display of decorative symbols that cause a Special Super (SPSP) reach, "during a Super Reach" refers to the period after the development into a Super Reach but before the development into a Special Super Reach, and an execution timing called "during a Special Super Reach" has been added. This "during a Special Super Reach" refers to the period after the development into a Special Super Reach but before the temporary stop display of decorative symbols, and if reel vibration effect B is performed during a Special Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55%. Also, in reel vibration effect B, the vibration period of the vibrating reel (upper effect device 2) is the same regardless of the execution timing.

Note that "in reach" in the table shown in Figure 21 may refer to when a reach is established or when a reach is changing. Also, "in SP reach" may refer to when a super reach is developing or when a super reach is changing. Furthermore, "in SPSP reach" may refer to when a special super reach is developing or when a special super reach is changing.

In addition, reel vibration effect B may be executed at times when reel vibration effect A is not executed. In other words, when the decorative symbols start to change, during the reach state when the reach state is first established, and while a combination of decorative symbols indicating a miss is temporarily displayed (while the revival effect is being executed), these are the times when reel vibration effect B is executed, and not when reel vibration effect A is executed.

Furthermore, while the vibration method (vibration mode) of reel vibration effect A and reel vibration effect B is the same, they may also be different. For example, reel vibration effect A may repeat short vibrations, while reel vibration effect B may end with one long vibration.

In addition, reel vibration performance A and reel vibration performance B may be effects in which the lower performance device 3 vibrates instead of the upper performance device 2. Alternatively, reel vibration performance A may be an effect in which the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and reel vibration performance B may be an effect in which the lower performance device 3 vibrates. In addition, the performance devices that vibrate in reel vibration performance A and reel vibration performance B may be provided on the front frame door 106.

Furthermore, the expected probability of a jackpot shown in Figure 21 may change depending on the gaming state (for example, a guaranteed variable gaming state, a time-limited gaming state, a non-guaranteed variable gaming state, a non-time-limited gaming state, or a combination of these), or it may remain the same regardless of the gaming state.

Figure 22 is a diagram showing the stages when the device vibration effect A is performed and when it is not performed. The example shown in Figure 22 shows a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special symbols and low probability of normal symbols) in which hitting left is recommended.

In Figure 22, the upper performance device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208. This upper performance device 2 is a device that descends from its initial position in response to a button preview (see Figure 17 (7) and Figure 19 (36)), but it also performs a vibration performance in its initial position.

Figure 22 (1) shows the scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed frozen, indicating a loss.

In Figure 22 (2), the display of the decorative pattern has begun to change. The shifting of the pending icon has also been completed, and the icon that was previously the first pending icon h11 has become the variable icon h0. The variable icon h0 shown in Figure 22 (2) is an icon that is displayed in red.

In Figure 22 (3), a reach effect begins, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach effect has begun. In Figure 22 (4), the effect develops into a super (SP) reach effect, and an animation of a confrontation between the lord and the enemy samurai is displayed across the entire display screen on the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 22 (5) displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and a vibration effect-related image 2hg related to the upper effect device 2 is displayed at the top of the display screen. This vibration effect-related image 2hg is a tutorial-like image that draws attention to the upper effect device 2 and includes an arrow display 2hg1 and text such as "If it vibrates, it's a big chance." The vibration effect-related image 2hg also serves to draw the player's attention to the upper effect device 2 and attract the player's interest in the upper effect device 2.

In addition, before the vibration effect-related image 2hg is displayed, a suggestion effect may be executed that suggests the possibility of the vibration effect-related image 2hg being displayed. This suggestion effect may be a display effect, a sound effect, or a light-emitting effect. For example, in the case of a display effect, a semi-transparent upward-pointing arrow display may appear, gradually materialize, and eventually become arrow display 2hg1. Note that it may also disappear without materializing. In this case, the vibration effect-related image 2hg is not displayed, and the role vibration effect A is not executed. Furthermore, even if the arrow display 2hg1 is displayed (the above suggestion effect is executed), it may draw attention to the upper effect device 2, and no text such as "Vibration means big chance" is displayed, and ultimately the vibration effect-related image 2hg may not be displayed.

In Figure 22(6), a continuation of Figure 22(5), after the vibration effect-related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2, located in its initial position, begins vibrating. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai engage in a sword fight, along with a "Big Chance" effect display, which suggests a jackpot. The upper effect device 2 continues vibrating until the Super Reach effect ends (until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped). The reel vibration effect A performed by the upper effect device 2 here is a standard preview with a 40% chance of a jackpot. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 22(7) displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the decorative symbol combination for a jackpot, "Decorative 7-Decorative 7-Decorative 7," is temporarily stopped in the center of the display screen, indicating a 2R guaranteed jackpot (Special Symbol B). The upper effect device 2 shown in Figure 22(7) continued vibrating until just before this, but has stopped vibrating and is stationary at the timing shown in Figure 22(7). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 22 (8) displays the decorative symbol combination for the 2R special jackpot.

The vibration of the upper effect device 2 may end before the "Big Chance" effect, which indicates a potential big win, is displayed.

In addition, even if the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed, there may be cases where the reel vibration effect A is not executed. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher if the reel vibration effect A is executed after the vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed than if the reel vibration effect A is not executed.

The vibration effect related image 2hg is displayed when the decorative pattern changes and display begins (Figure 22 (2)), and the timing of the execution of the reel vibration effect A during a Super Reach may be when the Super Reach develops (timing of Figure 22 (4)) or after the Super Reach develops (timing of Figure 22 (6)). In other words, the reel vibration effect A may start to be executed at different times during a Super Reach or a Special Super Reach.

On the other hand, in Figure 22 (6'), which continues from Figure 22 (5), after the vibration effect-related image 2hg disappears, the upper effect device 2 in its initial position does not begin vibrating, and reel vibration effect A is not executed. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 22 (6') displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 22 (7') displays the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, and a missing decorative pattern combination such as "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 22 (8') displays the missing decorative pattern combination as a confirmed display.

Figure 23 shows another example, continuing from Figure 22 (3), in stages.

Continuing from Figure 22 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 23 (4) has progressed to a Super (SP) Reach. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the following Figure 23 (5'') displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, but does not display the vibration effect related image 2hg shown in Figure 22 (5).

23(6'') 中，上演演208在初始位置中的上演演208显示。 English: In Figure 23(6''), the upper performance device 2 is vibrating in its initial position. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords. In this example, the vibration period of the upper performance device 2 is short, and the upper performance device 2 stops before the Super Reach performance ends. The reel vibration performance performed by the upper performance device 2 here corresponds to reel vibration performance B, and although it is during the same Super Reach, the expectation of a jackpot is slightly higher than that of reel vibration performance A performed in Figure 22. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 23(6'') does not display the performance display for "Big Chance" shown in Figure 22(6). Before performance of reel vibration performance B, no vibration performance-related image 2hg is displayed, the vibration period is shorter than that of reel vibration performance A, and no performance display for "Big Chance" is displayed. Therefore, it can be said to be a normal notice that players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100 and who have previously known reel vibration performance B will understand. On the other hand, the device vibration effect A can be said to be a normal notice that can be understood even by players who are not familiar with this pachinko machine 100.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 23 (7'') displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the decorative symbol combination for a jackpot, "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7," is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen, indicating a 2R special jackpot (Special Symbol B). The decorative symbol combination for the 2R special jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 23 (8).

Figure 24 is a diagram showing, in stages, another example of the device vibration effect B being performed. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving mode (low probability of special symbols and low probability of normal symbols), and left-handed play is recommended.

Figure 24 (1), like Figure 22 (1), shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed frozen, indicating a miss. In Figure 24 (2), like Figure 22 (2), the decorative pattern display begins to change. The decorative pattern display here is a change that develops into a Super Reach, as shown in Figures 22 (1) to (4). When the decorative pattern display begins to change, the upper performance device 2 vibrates, and special feature vibration performance B is executed. Special feature vibration performance B here is a normal preview with a 70% chance of a jackpot. With special feature vibration performance B, the chance of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at the start of the decorative pattern display change than during a Reach or Super Reach. When the decorative symbol variation display is revealed, it is not even clear whether a reach will be achieved, but players familiar with this pachinko machine 100 will pay close attention to the decorative symbol variation display with eager anticipation from the start of the variation when the upper performance device 2 vibrates upon the variation display. In Figure 24 (3), this develops into a super reach performance, and in Figure 24 (4), the decorative symbol combination for a guaranteed jackpot, such as "Decoration 7 - Decoration 7 - Decoration 7," is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 24 (3-1) is a continuation of Figure 22 (2), in which the reach effect has begun, and "Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has begun. During this reach, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and special feature vibration effect B is executed. Special feature vibration effect B here is a normal notice with an expected probability of a jackpot of 35%. In Figure 24 (3-2), the effect has progressed to a super reach effect, but in the same figure (4'), a losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 6-Decoration 7" is displayed as a confirmed winning combination.

Figure 24 (6-1) is a continuation of Figure 23 (5''). The Super Reach effect has ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 24 (6-1) displays the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai. A missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 7" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In addition, the upper effect device 2 vibrates, and special device vibration effect B is being executed. The special device vibration effect B here is a normal preview with a 100% chance of a jackpot. In the following Figure 24 (6-2), a wipe effect, which is a revival effect, begins. After the wipe-in shown in Figure 24 (6-3) is completed, a wipe-out is performed, and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, ends. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 24 (4'') confirms and displays a normal jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 7."

As explained above, both the reel vibration effect A and the reel vibration effect B are effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, but the upper performance device 2 may be capable of executing a vibration action different from the vibration effect that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. The vibration strength of this vibration action unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot may be weaker than that of the reel vibration effect A, or may be weaker than that of the reel vibration effect B. Alternatively, the vibration action unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot may have a shorter vibration time than that of the reel vibration effect A, or may be shorter than that of the reel vibration effect B. Furthermore, the vibration action unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot may be an alert action that is executed when a predetermined number of reserved balls have accumulated. For example, the upper performance device 2 may execute a vibration action when the number of reserved balls reaches three, just before the reserved balls are full. This vibration action suggests stopping the shot.

Next, we will explain the button vibration effect in which the effect button 136 vibrates. Like the device vibration effect, the button vibration effect is a normal preview effect. Also, like device vibration effect B, the button vibration effect does not display an image related to the effect button 136. In this respect, it differs from the button preview in which the button image 136a shown in Figure 17 (6) and Figure 19 (35) is displayed.

Figure 25 shows a table related to button vibration effects. Button vibration effects may be performed when a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner that combines reach effects and pseudo-consecutive effects. Even in the case of a normal reach, the button vibration effect is performed at the first temporary stop due to the pseudo-consecutive effect (see Figure 12 (2)), and the expected probability of a jackpot at this timing is 13%.

Also, like the reel vibration effect B, the button vibration effect can occur during the display of decorative symbols that change when a Super (SP) Reach is reached, or during the display of decorative symbols that change when a Special Super (SPSP) Reach is reached. The button vibration effect is also a standard notice with a different probability of winning depending on when it is executed. That is, during the display of decorative symbols that change when a Super (SP) Reach is reached, if the button vibration effect is executed at the start of the decorative symbol change, the probability of winning is 50%. If the button vibration effect is executed during the first provisional stop display of the pseudo-consecutive effect, the probability of winning is 13%. If the button vibration effect is executed during the second provisional stop display of the pseudo-consecutive effect, the probability of winning is 15%. If the button vibration effect is executed during the third provisional stop display of the pseudo-consecutive effect, the probability of winning is 30%. If the button vibration effect is executed during the development of a Super Reach, the probability of winning is 36%. Furthermore, if this occurs during the temporary stop display of a decorative symbol combination that indicates a loss (during a revival effect), the probability of a jackpot is 100%. As with device vibration effect B, the probability of a jackpot is 100%, meaning that the revival effect that will ultimately result in a jackpot is in progress. Additionally, the decorative symbol variation display that results in a Special Super (SPSP) reach includes the timing of the Special Super Reach development. If the button vibration effect occurs during this Special Super Reach development, the probability of a jackpot is 48%.

Figure 26 is a diagram showing an example of a button vibration effect in stages. In this example, the game is in a non-time-saving mode (low probability of special symbols and low probability of normal symbols), and left-handed play is recommended. Also, Figure 26 shows the effect button 136 at the bottom left of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effects of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figures 26(1) through 26(9) are the same as those of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figures 12(1) through 12(9). That is, in Figure 26(1), the variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Symbol 1 begins. In Figure 26(2), the pseudo-consecutive effect begins, and a pseudo-consecutive symbol (a decorative symbol marked "NEXT") suggesting a pseudo-consecutive effect is temporarily displayed in the center symbol display area 208b. A "Decorative 6" is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and a "Decorative 7" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, marking the first temporary stop display. Figure 26(2) shows the effect button 136 vibrating during this first temporary stop display, resulting in a button vibration effect. The expected probability of a jackpot resulting from the button vibration effect at this timing is 13%. In Figure 26 (3), the display screen goes black, and the following Figure 26 (4) shows the state just before the second change (re-change) in the pseudo consecutive performance begins. In Figure 26 (5), the second change (re-change) of the decorative pattern begins.

When the effect button 136 that has been vibrated by the button vibration effect is pressed within a predetermined period of time, a response display (for example, the text "It's hot") may be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In Figure 26 (6), the decorative pattern "Decoration 5" is temporarily displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, and in Figure 26 (7), the decorative pattern "Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the right pattern display area 208c. In the following Figure 26 (8), the decorative pattern "Decoration 4" is temporarily displayed in the middle pattern display area 208b, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed (wavering and fluctuating display), and in Figure 26 (9), this losing decorative pattern combination is displayed as confirmed.

The effects on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figures 26(A) to 26(E) are the same as those on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figures 13(18) to 13(22). That is, in Figure 26(A), the variable display of the decorative pattern of Special Pattern 1 begins under the rear stage, and in Figure 26(B), a reach state is established, with "Decoration 2" temporarily displayed in both the left pattern display area 208a and the right pattern display area 208c. In Figure 26(C), this has progressed to a Super Reach. Figure 26(C) shows the effect button 136 vibrating when the Super Reach develops, and a button vibration effect is being performed. The expected probability of a jackpot for the button vibration effect at this execution timing is 36%.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 26 (E) displays an animation of the lord defeating an enemy samurai, and in the center of the display screen, a combination of decorative symbols for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 2 - Decoration 13 - Decoration 2," is temporarily displayed, and in the same figure (E), the decorative symbol combination for a normal jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination.

The button vibration effect described above does not display an image related to the effect button 136, the vibration period is shorter than that of the device vibration effect A, and no effect display corresponding to the button vibration effect is displayed, so it can be said to be a normal preview that players who are familiar with this pachinko machine 100 and who are already familiar with button vibration effects will understand.

Note that the button vibration effect may be achieved by vibrating the decision button 1903 instead of the effect button 136.

Furthermore, the effect button 136 may also perform the same vibration action as the vibration action described in the explanation of the upper effect device 2, which is unrelated to the expected probability of a jackpot.

According to the above description,
"A first vibration means (e.g., upper performance device 2) capable of executing a first vibration operation (e.g., reel vibration performance A),
a display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying a first image (e.g., a vibration effect-related image 2hg) associated with the first vibration means at a certain timing (e.g., the timing of FIG. 22(2));
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying a changing display of decorative patterns,
the display means is capable of displaying a first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect);
The display means is capable of displaying a second reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect) having a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than the first reach effect,
The display means can display a variable icon [for example, a variable icon h0],
The first vibration means is capable of starting to execute the first vibration action after the first image is displayed (e.g., FIG. 22 (6)),
The display means is capable of displaying an image relating to the winning/losing determination result (for example, a display saying "Big Chance") after displaying the first image (for example, FIG. 22 (6)).
There are three cases: a first case in which the first vibration action is executed at a first timing [for example, the timing of Super Reach development in FIG. 22(4)] after the display of the first image has started at the certain timing [for example, the timing of FIG. 22(2)]; a second case in which the first vibration action is executed at a second timing [for example, the timing after Super Reach development (the timing of FIG. 22(6)]] after the display of the first image has started at the certain timing but is later than the first timing; and a third case [for example, FIG. 22(6')] in which the first vibration action is not executed during the execution of the second Reach performance even if the display of the first image has started [for example, FIG. 22(5)].
In the first case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image, and in the second case, the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image [e.g., FIG. 22(6)];
the first vibration means ends the first vibration operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case,
The execution period of the first vibration operation in the second case is a period that overlaps with a part of the display period of the certain image (for example, the period shown in FIG. 22(6)),
The first timing is a timing during the execution of the second reach performance (for example, a timing during the development of the super reach in FIG. 22 (4)),
The second timing is a timing during the execution of the second reach effect (for example, a timing during the super reach effect of FIG. 22 (6)),
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the first case than in the third case,
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the second case than in the third case,
The first image is not an image showing the variable icon,
When the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing , there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, and when the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing .
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Also,
"The first vibration means is capable of executing a second vibration operation [for example, a reel vibration effect B],
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration motion is started (e.g., FIG. 23 (6″)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"There is a third case [for example, FIG. 22 (6')] in which the first vibration action is not executed even when the display of the first image is started,
In the third case, the display means does not display the certain image after starting to display the first image [for example, FIG. 22 (6')].
He also explained.

According to the above description,
"A first vibration means (e.g., upper performance device 2) capable of executing a first vibration operation (e.g., reel vibration performance A),
a display means (e.g., a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying a first image (e.g., a vibration effect-related image 2hg) related to the first vibration means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first vibration means is capable of starting to execute the first vibration action after the first image is displayed (e.g., FIG. 22 (6)),
The display means is capable of displaying an image relating to the winning/losing determination result (for example, a display saying "Big Chance") after displaying the first image (for example, FIG. 22 (6)).
There are three cases: a first case in which the first vibration action is executed at a first timing after the start of displaying the first image [for example, the timing at which the super reach develops in FIG. 22(4)]; a second case in which the first vibration action is executed at a second timing later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the super reach develops (the timing in FIG. 22(6)]; and a third case in which the first vibration action is not executed even when the display of the first image is started [for example, FIG. 22(6')].
the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the first case, and also displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the second case [e.g., FIG. 22(6)], and does not display the certain image after starting to display the first image in the third case [e.g., FIG. 22(6')];
the first vibration means ends the first vibration operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case;
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first vibration means (e.g., upper performance device 2) capable of executing a first vibration operation (e.g., reel vibration performance A),
a display means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208);
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means starts displaying a first image related to the first vibration means [for example, a vibration effect-related image 2hg] before the execution of the first vibration action is started.
He also explained.

This gaming machine makes it less likely that a player will miss the first vibration. Furthermore, players may play in anticipation of the first vibration, which may increase their interest in the game.

The first vibration action may be a performance action or a notification action.

Furthermore, the first image may be an image that draws attention to the first vibration means or an image that draws interest to the first vibration means.

Furthermore, the display means may start displaying the first image before the execution of the first vibration action starts and after the reach effect has started [e.g., Figure 22 (5)].

Furthermore, before the display of the first image begins, it may be possible to execute an effect (for example, a display effect, a sound effect, or a light-emitting effect) that suggests the possibility of the first image being displayed. Note that even if this effect is executed, the first image may not be displayed.

Also,
"The display means terminates the display of the first image before the execution of the first vibration motion is started [e.g., FIG. 22 (5)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The first vibration means is capable of executing a second vibration operation [for example, a reel vibration effect B],
The display means does not display the first image before the execution of the second vibration motion is started (e.g., FIG. 23 (6″)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Furthermore, the second vibration action may be an action that starts vibrating at a different timing than the first vibration action (for example, when a variation is announced, during a reach, or while a losing symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in Figure 21 (b)), or may be an action that vibrates in a different manner than the first vibration action.

Also,
The first vibration operation continues to vibrate for a longer period of time than the second vibration operation (for example, the vibration continues until the super reach effect ends (until the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"A second vibration means (for example, the effect button 136 or the decision button 1903) different from the first vibration means is provided,
the second vibration means is capable of executing a third vibration action (for example, a button vibration effect);
The display means does not display an image related to the second vibration means before the execution of the third vibration operation is started (for example, no image is displayed in either FIG. 26(1) or FIG. 26(A)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

"The first vibration means may not execute the first vibration action even when the first image is displayed on the display means." Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot may be higher when the first vibration action is executed after the first image is displayed than when the first vibration action is not executed.

"The first vibration means may start executing the first vibration action at a first timing [for example, the timing when the Super Reach develops in Figure 22 (4)] after the first image is displayed on the display means [for example, when the decorative pattern changing display in Figure 22 (2) begins], or may start executing the first vibration action at a second timing that is later than the first timing [for example, the timing after the Super Reach develops (the timing in Figure 22 (6)]." In other words, the first vibration means may start executing the first vibration action at different timings after the first image is displayed on the display means.

"The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may be disposed on a door element [e.g., front frame door 106] and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state." Alternatively, the first vibration means may be disposed on a door element and may continue the first vibration action initiated when the door element is in a closed state even when the door element is in an open state. Alternatively, the first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may be disposed on a separate element [e.g., main body 104] from the door element and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state. Alternatively, the first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] may be disposed on a separate element [e.g., main body 104] from the door element and may continue the first vibration action initiated when the door element is in a closed state even when the door element is in an open state. The second vibration means (e.g., the effect button 136 or the decision button 1903) may be arranged on a door element (e.g., the ball storage tray door 108) and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state. The second vibration means (e.g., the effect button 136 or the decision button 1903) may be arranged on a door element (e.g., the ball storage tray door 108) and may continue the first vibration action initiated when the door element is in a closed state even when the door element is in an open state. Alternatively, the second vibration means (e.g., the lower effect device 3) may be arranged on a member (e.g., the main body 104) separate from the door element (e.g., the ball storage tray door 108) and may be capable of vibrating whether the door element is in a closed or open state. Furthermore, the second vibration means [e.g., lower performance device 3] may be arranged on a separate member [e.g., main body 104] from the door member [e.g., ball storage tray door 108], and the first vibration operation that begins when the door member is closed may continue even when the door member is open.

"The display means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208] may start displaying a third image [e.g., a text display of 'It's hot'] after finishing displaying the first image [e.g., vibration effect-related image 2hg]." The third image may be a response display in response to operation of the first vibration means [e.g., effect button 136].

"The first vibration means [e.g., upper performance device 2] is capable of executing a fourth vibration action, and the first vibration action [e.g., reel vibration action A] is a performance action suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot [e.g., the likelihood of a jackpot shown in FIG. 21(a)], and the second vibration action [e.g., reel vibration action B] is also a performance action suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot [e.g., the likelihood of a jackpot shown in FIG. 21(b)], and the fourth vibration action may not be a performance action suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot." Furthermore, the fourth vibration action may have a vibration strength weaker than the first vibration action or the second vibration action. Alternatively, the fourth vibration action may have a vibration duration shorter than the first vibration action or the second vibration action. Furthermore, the fourth vibration action may be a notification action that is executed when a predetermined number of reserved balls have accumulated.

Next, we will explain the background effects, which are normal preview effects similar to the button vibration effects. Here, we will explain the execution (start) timing of the background effects and the expected probability of a jackpot.

Figure 27(a) shows a table related to background effects. Background effects may also be executed (started) during the display of decorative symbols that combine reach effects and pseudo-consecutive effects. Background effects are not executed during the display of decorative symbols that result in a normal reach, but may be executed (started) during the display of decorative symbols that result in a Super (SP) reach and during the display of decorative symbols that result in a Special Super (SPSP) reach. In other words, during the display of decorative symbols that result in a Super (SP) reach, if the background effect is executed at the start of the decorative symbol change, the expected probability of a jackpot is 20%, if it is executed during the second temporary stop display due to the pseudo-consecutive effect, the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%, and if it is executed during a Super reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 35%. Furthermore, during the display of decorative symbols that result in a Special Super (SPSP) reach, the execution timing during the Special Super reach is added. If the background effect is performed during this special super reach, the expected probability of a jackpot increases to 40%.

Next, we will explain the mini character effects. Mini character effects include an effect in which mini character A appears and an effect in which mini character B appears. There may also be effects in which different types of mini characters appear. Mini character effects are also normal preview effects, but the expected probability of a jackpot remains the same even if the mini character that appears changes. However, the expected probability of a jackpot may also change if the mini character that appears changes. Furthermore, the execution timing remains the same even if the mini character changes, but the execution timing may also change if the mini character changes. Furthermore, the mini character displayed may change depending on the presentation mode, or the mini character displayed may change as a result of an internal lottery regardless of the presentation mode.

Figure 27(b) shows a table related to mini character effects. This table is common to both mini character A and mini character B.

Like the role vibration effects, mini character effects can be performed during a Super (SP) Reach or a Special Super (SPSP) Reach. As shown in the table in Figure 27(b), mini character effects have multiple execution timings for each decorative symbol change. However, the expected probability of a jackpot is the same regardless of the execution timing. That is, in decorative symbol changes that result in a Super (SP) Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55% whether the mini character effect is performed before the initial Reach state is established, during a Super Reach (after the Super Reach has developed and before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped), or while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. Furthermore, in decorative symbol changes that result in a Special Super (SPSP) Reach, "during a Super Reach" refers to the period after the Super Reach has developed and before the Special Super Reach has developed, adding the additional execution timing of "during a Special Super Reach." This "Special Super Reach" refers to the period after the Special Super Reach has developed and before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed. Even if the mini character effect is performed during this Special Super Reach, the expected probability of a jackpot is 55%.

Figure 28 is a diagram showing an example of mini-character effects in stages. The example shown in Figure 28 shows a non-time-saving game state (low probability of special symbols, low probability of normal symbols) in which hitting left is recommended.

Figure 28 (1) shows a scene where "Decoration 3 - Decoration 6 - Decoration 3" is displayed in a static state, indicating a loss. In the following Figure 28 (2), the display of varying decorative symbols begins. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (2), a mini character-related image (MCG) related to the mini character effect is displayed at the top of the display screen. This mini character-related image (MCG) includes a preview that a mini character effect may begin, as well as a tutorial-like text display such as "It'll be exciting when they appear."

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (3), the mini-character related image mcg has disappeared, and the decorative patterns are rapidly changing in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c, with part of the mini-character Amcr beginning to appear above the left edge of the display screen. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (4), the entire mini-character Amcr is displayed. This mini-character Amcr is a rocket character and is flying toward the right.

In Figure 28 (5), the reach effect has begun, and "Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in both the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In other words, a normal reach has begun. The mini-character Amcr continues to fly, but is lowering in altitude.

In Figure 28 (6), the normal reach has progressed to a super reach. Even on the screen that has progressed to a super reach, the mini character Amcr is still displayed, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly. Next, in Figure 28 (7), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, and the mini character Amcr continues to fly, but this time at an increased altitude.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (8) displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords, with the mini-character Amcr still displayed. The mini-character Amcr, which appeared before the reach was achieved in Figure 28 (3), continues to be displayed until the super reach effect ends, that is, until the temporary stop display begins to be displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (9) displays the lord's victory over the enemy samurai, and the decorative symbol combination for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1," is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen, and although the mini-character Amcr has disappeared, the mini-character Amcr was displayed until just before this. In Figure 28 (10), the decorative symbol combination for that normal jackpot is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Note that while the mini-character Amcr disappeared at the same time as the end of the Super Reach performance (when the temporary stop display began to appear), it may also disappear before the end of the Super Reach performance (before the temporary stop display is displayed). Also, after appearing, the mini-character Amcr may temporarily disappear, then reappear.

Figure 28 (3') is another example continuing from Figure 28 (2). In Figure 28 (2), a mini-character-related image mcg is displayed, but unlike the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (3), part of the mini-character Amcr is not visible on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (3'). In Figure 28 (5'), a reach effect is initiated, but the mini-character Amcr does not appear before the reach is established. In Figure 28 (7'), a super reach effect is performed, but the mini-character Amcr does not appear. Ultimately, the super reach effect ends without the mini-character appearing, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 28 (9') displays the lord being defeated by the enemy samurai, with a missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In Figure 28 (10'), the missing decorative pattern combination is displayed as a confirmed combination.

Figure 29 is a diagram showing an example of the stages in which the reel vibration effect B and miniature character effect are performed. In Figure 29, the upper effect device 2 is shown above the decorative pattern display device 208.

In Figure 29 (7-1), after the Super Reach effect develops, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, along with a mini-character-related image (MCG). The mini-character-related image (MCG) may also be displayed when the decorative symbol variable display begins, as shown in Figure 28 (2). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (7-2) also displays the lord and the enemy samurai facing each other, but the mini-character-related image (MCG) has disappeared, and part of the mini-character (Amcr) begins to appear above the left edge of the display screen. Furthermore, the upper effect device 2 shown in Figure 29 (7-2) is vibrating, and the reel vibration effect B is being performed. Thus, during the Super Reach, the mini-character effect and the reel vibration effect B may be executed in parallel. This allows for the overlapping of two types of normal announcements, creating a thrilling effect. However, the execution of the mini-character effect and the reel vibration effect B will never start simultaneously. In other words, the start timing of the mini-character effect and the start timing of the role vibration effect B are not synchronized. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (8") displays the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords, with the rocket mini-character Amcr flying toward the right. Note that the upper performance device 2 shown in Figure 29 (8") has stopped vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (9"), the mini-character Amcr has disappeared, and a missing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. Although not shown, the missing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a confirmed combination, just like in Figure 28 (10').

Figure 29 (7-1') shows the same state as Figure 29 (7-1), and after the development into the Super Reach performance, the mini-character-related image mcg is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure 29 (7-2'), the mini-character-related image mcg has disappeared, and part of the mini-character Bmcu is beginning to appear above the left edge of the display screen. Meanwhile, the upper performance device 2 shown in Figure 29 (7-2') is not vibrating and remains stationary in its initial position. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (8'"), the scene after the lord and the enemy samurai have fought with swords is displayed, with the mini-character Bmcu flying toward the right. The mini-character Bmcu is a UFO character. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (9-1), the mini-character Bmcu has disappeared, and a losing decorative pattern combination such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is temporarily displayed in the center of the display screen. In this example, the mini character Bmcu appears, but the same applies when the mini character Amcr appears. Also, the upper performance device 2 shown in Figure 29 (9-1) is vibrating, and the reel vibration performance B is being performed.

In the following Figure 29 (9-2), the temporary stop display has ended and the wipe effect, which is a revival effect, has begun. Note that the upper effect device 2 shown in Figure 29 (9-2) has stopped vibrating and is in a stationary state. In the following Figure 29 (9-3), the wipe-in has been completed. Once the wipe-in is complete, the wipe-out begins and part of the decorative pattern becomes visible, and in Figure 29 (9-4), the wipe effect has ended and the decorative pattern combination for a normal jackpot, such as "Decoration 1-Decoration 13-Decoration 1," is displayed as a temporary stop, indicating that the revival effect was successful. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 29 (10'') displays the decorative pattern combination for a normal jackpot as confirmed.

As explained above, unlike during a Super Reach, when a losing symbol is temporarily stopped, the mini character effect and the device vibration effect B are not executed in parallel. This is because if the device vibration effect is executed during a losing symbol is temporarily stopped, a jackpot is confirmed, so the game can be exciting enough without the need for two types of regular announcements.

Furthermore, while the execution period length (vibration period length) of the reel vibration effect B is the same even if the start timing is different, the execution period length (display period length) of the mini character effect also differs depending on the start timing. In other words, if the mini character effect starts before a reach is achieved, the execution period will be from Figure 28 (3) to just before (9), and if it starts during a super reach, the execution period will be from Figure 29 (7-2) to just before (9''), and the lengths of both execution periods are different.

According to the above description,
"A display means capable of displaying a changing decorative pattern [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208];
A performance means capable of executing a plurality of types of performances (for example, an upper performance device 2, a decorative pattern display device 208),
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, a role vibration effect B] that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect (for example, a mini character effect or other effect executed by the decorative pattern display device 208) that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot,
The effect means is capable of executing the first effect at one start timing among a plurality of start timings in one decorative pattern variable display [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 21(b)],
The effect means is capable of executing the second effect at one start timing among a plurality of start timings in one decorative pattern variable display [for example, a plurality of execution timings shown in FIG. 27(b)],
The first effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation rate differs depending on the start timing at which it is executed [for example, the jackpot expectation rate shown in FIG. 21(b)],
The second effect is an effect in which the suggested jackpot expectation rate does not change regardless of the start timing [for example, the jackpot expectation rate shown in FIG. 27(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine can potentially increase the excitement of playing by using two different types of effects.

Also,
"When the performance means executes the first performance [for example, the role vibration performance B] at a first start timing [for example, a certain timing during a super reach], the second performance [for example, the mini character A performance] can be executed in parallel with the first performance [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)],
When the effect means executes the first effect at a second start timing [for example, at a certain timing during a temporary stop of a losing symbol], the second effect cannot be executed in parallel with the first effect [for example, the mini character effect disappears when a losing symbol is temporarily stopped] [for example, Figure 29 (9-1) when a mini character Amcr appears instead of a mini character Bmcu].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The presentation means is capable of executing the first presentation [for example, the role vibration presentation B] both in the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a jackpot [for example, FIG. 24 (2)] and in the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a loss [for example, FIG. 29 (7-2)],
The presentation means is operable to perform the second presentation [for example, the mini character A presentation], the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a big win [for example, immediately before (3) to (9) in FIG. 28], and the decorative pattern variation display resulting in a loss [for example, immediately before (7-2) to (9'') in FIG. 29].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

"The first effect is an effect whose execution period length does not change even if the start timing is different, and the second effect may be an effect whose execution period length also changes depending on the start timing [for example, if it is started before the establishment of a reach, it will be from Figure 28 (3) to just before Figure 28 (9)], and if it is started during an SP reach, it will be from Figure 29 (7-2) to just before Figure 29 (9'')]."
"One of the multiple types of effects is a third effect [for example, a mini-character B effect] that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot, and the effect means executes the third effect at one start timing selected from multiple start timings in a single decorative pattern change display [for example, multiple execution timings shown in Figure 27(b)], and the third effect is an effect that suggests the same likelihood of a jackpot even if the start timing of execution is different [for example, the likelihood of a jackpot shown in Figure 27(b)], and the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the third effect may be the same as the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the second effect." Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect with multiple presentation forms [for example, a presentation form in which mini-character Amcr appears and a presentation form in which mini-character Bmcu appears].

"The presentation means can execute the first presentation both in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a jackpot [e.g., FIG. 24(2)] and in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a loss [e.g., FIG. 29(7-2)], but may not be able to execute it at a specific timing in a decorative pattern variation display that results in a loss [e.g., the timing during the execution of a revival presentation that ultimately results in a loss] [e.g., the multiple execution timings shown in FIG. 27(b)]."
"The presentation means may not start the execution of the first presentation and the execution of the second presentation at the same time." In other words, the start timing of the execution of the first presentation and the start timing of the execution of the second presentation may be different.

"The presentation means may include a first presentation means [e.g., upper presentation device 2] and a second presentation means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208]." In this case, the first presentation means may be capable of executing the first presentation, and the second presentation means may be capable of executing the second presentation. Alternatively, the presentation means may include multiple types of presentation means, and the first presentation and the second presentation may be executed by different presentation means, or some of the multiple types of presentation means [e.g., game board lamp 442 or game table frame lamp 452] may be capable of executing at least a portion of the first presentation and the second presentation in common [e.g., illuminating when the first presentation starts and also illuminating when the second presentation starts].

"The first effect [e.g., device vibration effect B] may suggest a higher likelihood of a jackpot when executed in a second gaming state [e.g., a probability variable gaming state, a time-limited gaming state, or a probability variable and time-limited gaming state] than when executed in the first gaming state [e.g., a non-probability variable gaming state, a non-time-limited gaming state, or a normal gaming state (non-probability variable and non-time-limited gaming state)]." "The second effect [e.g., a mini-character effect] may also suggest a higher likelihood of a jackpot when executed in the second gaming state than when executed in the first gaming state." Alternatively, the first effect may suggest the same likelihood of a jackpot whether executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state. The second effect may also suggest the same likelihood of a jackpot whether executed in the second gaming state or the first gaming state. The second gaming state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Note that although the term "gaming state" is used here, if there is a presentation mode based on the gaming state, the term "gaming state" can be read as "presentation mode."

The presentation means may execute the first presentation at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach develops, after a super reach develops, when a special super reach develops, and after a special super reach develops], and the presentation means may also execute the second presentation at one start timing selected from a plurality of start timings in the reach variation display [for example, when a reach is established, when a super reach develops, after a super reach develops, when a special super reach develops, and after a special super reach develops].

Figure 30 shows a step-by-step example of when the time-saving play state ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving play state shortly before the time-saving play state ends.

The diagrams shown in Figure 30 show a decorative symbol display device 208, a time-saving lamp TL, a right-hit indicator lamp RL, and a high-probability lamp HL. Each lamp is indicated in black when lit and white when unlit (the same applies to the examples shown in Figure 40). Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(a) has a fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is an area for notifying whether a symbol is changing (or a symbol is stopped) and for notifying the number of reserved symbols. A reserved number display area for special symbol 1 is provided in the upper left, and a reserved number display area for special symbol 2 is provided in the lower left. Furthermore, a symbol-changing notification area for special symbol 1 is provided in the upper right, and a symbol-changing notification area for special symbol 2 is provided in the lower right. A symbol-changing notification area for regular symbols and a reserved number display area for regular symbols may also be provided. The value displayed in the reserved number display area for special symbol 1 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved symbol 1 lamp 218, and the value displayed in the reserved number display area for special symbol 2 is aligned with the reserved number indicated by the reserved symbol 2 lamp 220. In addition, in the symbol change notification area for special symbol 1, while the symbol for special symbol 1 is stopped, depending on the result, for example, a "○" is displayed as a stop sign if it is a jackpot, or an "X" is displayed as a stop sign if it is a miss. Also, while the symbol for special symbol 1 is being displayed as a change, a "-" may flash, allowing the player to recognize that the symbol for special symbol 1 is being displayed as a change. The display in the symbol change display area for special symbol 2 is similar to that in the symbol change display area for special symbol 1, and the display mode here changes in response to the symbol change display and stop display for special symbol 2. Note that by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the number displayed in the reserved symbol display area, advance warnings or warnings regarding the symbol change display currently being executed may be provided. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 described above is the same as the example shown in Figure 40.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30(a) displays a static decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." A miniature pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the display changes and remains static in accordance with the decorative pattern displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative pattern display device 208 also has a variable icon display area 280 located at the bottom center of the performance display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change. In Figure 30(a), the display of the special pattern change has ended, so the variable icon has disappeared and is no longer displayed.

The control state (game state) shown in Figure 30(a) is a time-saving game state. More specifically, it is a state with a low probability of winning a special symbol and a high probability of winning a normal symbol. The time-saving lamp TL shown in Figure 30(a) is lit, and the high probability lamp HL is off. As explained using Figure 11(b), right-hitting is recommended in the time-saving game state, and the right-hit indicator lamp RL shown in Figure 30(a) is also lit. In addition, to the left of the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(a), a right-hit first indicator RH1 is displayed to encourage right-hitting. This right-hit first indicator RH1 remains displayed during the time-saving game state even after the special symbol symbol change display has ended, and remains displayed even when the screen switches to the demo screen. The right-hit indicator lamp RL also remains lit even after the screen switches to the demo screen.

The time-saving game state in Figure 30(a) is a time-saving game state (a time-saving game state) that begins when a jackpot game ends without the game ball passing through the V-pass switch VC, or a time-saving game state (b time-saving game state) that begins when 950 consecutive special symbol misses occur. The background of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(a) is the background of a castle town, which represents the time-saving game state. Also, the state in Figure 30(a) is a state in which the time-saving game state will transition to a non-time-saving game state if the special symbol symbol change display is performed four more times. In the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(a), the characters "4 remaining" are displayed as the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, indicating that the time-saving game state will continue for only four more times. The background on the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ, and the display format of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state may also differ, depending on whether the time-shortened game state begins after the end of a jackpot game (time-shortened game state a), the time-shortened game state begins after 950 consecutive special symbol misses (time-shortened game state b), or the time-shortened game state begins after a sudden time-shortened game win (time-shortened game state c). Furthermore, the background on the decorative symbol display device 208 may differ, and the display format of the remaining number of times in the time-shortened game state may also differ, between a special symbol high probability/normal symbol high probability state and a special symbol low probability/normal symbol high probability state.

In addition, in the time-saving game mode, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a reserved icon display area 282 for special pattern 2 to the left of the variable icon display area 280.

The reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2 displays reserve icons representing reserves for special chart 2. The number of reserves for special chart 2 is represented not only by the number of times the special chart 2 reserve lamp 220 is lit and the numerical value shown in the reserve number display area for special chart 2, but also by the number of reserve icons for special chart 2. In other words, the reserve icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserve icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserve icon, the reserve icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserve icon, and so on. In the reserve icon display area 282 for special chart 2, reserve icons are displayed side by side, and the closer the reserve icon to the variable icon display area 280 (the reserve icon on the right), the older the winning reserve icon.

In Figure 30(a), three Special 2 reserve icons h21, h22, and h23 are displayed in the Special 2 reserve icon display area 282, and all three of these Special 2 reserve icons h11, h12, and h23 are displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode). The default display mode is a round, patternless, white display mode. In the drawing, white is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the left. The reserve icon indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the advance preview depending on its display mode. In other words, it indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern change display that occurs when the reserve represented by the reserve icon is consumed. The default display mode indicates a 5% expected jackpot probability. However, it may also be set to indicate a 0% expected jackpot probability. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate an expected jackpot probability at all. In the following explanation, if the default display mode is used, this may be omitted.

In Figure 30(a), to make it easier to see that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of Special Chart 2, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

In Figure 30(b), the display of the symbol change for special symbol 2 has begun. That is, the symbol change has begun in the second special symbol display device 214 (see Figure 3), not shown in this figure, and the display of the change for the fourth symbol and mini symbol has also begun. The movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change for the decorative symbol has also begun. The number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 becomes 2, and the fourth symbol for special symbol 2 has begun to flash a "-" display. In addition, the reserved symbol has shifted one position to the right, and reserved symbol h21, which was previously the first reserved symbol, is now displayed as variable symbol h0 in the variable symbol display area 280. The display mode of this variable icon is also the default display mode (circular, patternless, and white). In addition, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has decreased by one and is now displayed as "3 remaining."

Furthermore, when the display of the special symbol pattern changes begins, a song selection display MC begins to be displayed above the hold icon display area 282 of special symbol 2, allowing the selection of the song to be output from the speaker 120. The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(b) displays the song title "Song 1," and in this case, Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 (not shown). This song output will be explained in more detail from Figure 35 onwards.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30(c), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed frozen. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 2 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as a "358" combination. The song selection display MC disappears each time a decorative pattern is displayed frozen, and reappears each time the decorative pattern display begins to change.

In Figure 30 (d), the display of the symbol variation for special symbol 2 has started again, and the decorative symbol is displaying a variation. The number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display begins flashing for the fourth symbol for special symbol 2. Also, the reserved symbol has shifted one position to the right, and only one reserved symbol h21 is displayed in the reserved symbol display area 282 for special symbol 2. In addition, the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 has decreased by one and is now displayed as "2 remaining."

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(e), the losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed as a stopped symbol. In addition, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as an "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped symbol with the combination "814".

In Figure 30(f), the symbol change display for the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving game state begins, and the decorative symbol changes. The value shown in the reserved symbol display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol display area 284 becomes 0, and a "-" begins flashing for the fourth symbol of special symbol 2. The reserved symbol has also shifted one position to the right, and no reserved symbols are displayed in the reserved symbol display area 282 for special symbol 2, resulting in the reserved symbol number being 0. Furthermore, the reserved symbol h21, which was previously the first reserved symbol and is displayed in its default display mode, is now displayed as the variable symbol h0 in the variable symbol display area 280. The variable symbol h0 shown in Figure 30(f) is displayed in a red display mode that differs from the default display mode. Red is represented by diagonal cross-hatching in the drawing. The variable symbol h0 in its red display mode indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot in the currently occurring symbol change display is 50%, and a so-called normal preview is being executed. Additionally, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the right-hit first display RH1, with the word "LAST" displayed next to it, indicating that this is the last special symbol symbol change display that can maintain the time-saving game state. The remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, which was displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, has disappeared and is no longer displayed, but may still be displayed as "1 remaining." Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30(f) has begun displaying the right-hit second display RH2, which encourages right-hit play in a different display mode from the right-hit first display RH1. The right-hit second display RH2 displays a right-pointing arrow within which it is indicated that the player should aim for the second special symbol start hole 232 (electric chute) and accumulate the reserved special symbol 2. This is a notification encouraging the player to acquire the remaining reserved special symbol 2, which could lead to a sudden time-saving win. At the stage shown in FIG. 30(f), the number of reserved special symbols 2 is zero. However, even if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is full (four symbols), the right-hit second display RH2 is still displayed. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts a right-hit notification (a voice output of "Hit right to accumulate reserved symbols") to encourage right-hit and accumulate reserved special symbols 2. Furthermore, music 1 is also continuously output from the speaker 120. While the right-hit notification audio is being output, the output volume of music 1 may be reduced or music 1 may be completely muted. Whether the right-hit notification is via the right-hit second display RH2 or a right-hit notification from the speaker 120, execution begins when the display of the symbol variation of the last special symbol that can maintain the time-saving game state begins. The timing at which the right-hit second display RH2 begins to display may be the same as the timing at which the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol variation of the last special symbol begins, or it may be after the display of the decorative symbol variation has begun. Furthermore, the timing at which the right-hit notification from the speaker 120 begins may be the same as the timing at which the decorative pattern change display corresponding to the pattern change display of the last special pattern begins, or it may be a timing after the decorative pattern change display has begun, or a timing after the pattern change has begun on the second special pattern display device 214 (not shown) (see Figure 3) and before the decorative pattern change display begins.

In Figure 30 (g), there are two wins in the second special symbol start port 232, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 increases by two, so the number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserved symbols h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserved symbol icon display area 282 for special symbol 2.

In Figure 30 (h), the decorative symbol change display has entered a reach state. In addition, there is another win in the second special symbol start port 232, and the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 2 increases by one, so the number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 becomes 3, and a third reserved symbol h23 is also displayed in the reserved symbol icon display area 282 for special symbol 2.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (h), the reach state is reached but does not develop into a super reach. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30 (i) displays a frozen decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4," which is a losing combination. Furthermore, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed frozen as an "X," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen as a "434" combination. Furthermore, the word "END" is displayed in the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30 (i), indicating that the symbol variation display of the last special symbol that allows the time-saving game state to be maintained has ended. When the symbol variation display of the last special symbol ends, the right-hit first display RH1 and right-hit second display RH2, which had been displayed up until that point, disappear and are no longer displayed. Furthermore, the right-hit notification output from the speaker 120 has also ended. These end timings may occur simultaneously with the end of the decorative symbol variation display or after the decorative symbol variation display has ended. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the display of the pattern changes for the last special symbol has finished but before the display of the decorative symbol changes has finished, or it may be the timing before the display of the pattern changes for the last special symbol has finished. The reserve for special symbol 2 eventually accumulates to four, reaching a full state. The number shown in the reserve number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserve number display area 284 shown in Figure 30(i) is 4, and a fourth reserve icon h24 is also displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2.

In addition, the second right-hit display RH2 may be hidden (deleted) when four reserved special symbols 2 have been accumulated, and a display indicating that four reserved special symbols 2 have been accumulated (for example, a text display of "reservations full" or "ready") may be displayed. In this case, if four reserved special symbols 2 have not been accumulated by the time the decorative symbol changing display ends, the second right-hit display RH2 may be hidden (deleted) when the decorative symbol changing display ends.

In Figure 30(j), the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special symbol low probability, normal symbol low probability state). The time-saving lamp TL shown in Figure 30(j) is off, and the high-probability lamp HL is also off. When the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, if there are any reserved special symbol 2 symbols, the remaining reserved special symbol 2 symbols are consumed first because this is a special symbol 2 priority variable machine. As mentioned above, there is a possibility that the time-saving symbol shown in Figure 5(c) will be displayed as a static display only when the symbol variation display for special symbol 2 is performed as a result of the remaining reserved special symbol 2 symbols being consumed in the non-time-saving game state. During the period when the symbol variation display for special symbol 2 is performed as a result of the remaining reserved special symbol 2 symbols being consumed in the non-time-saving game state (hereinafter referred to as the "pullback period"), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes a dedicated background. In this example, an animation of the main character, the lord, running is displayed, and the text "One-shot reversal" is displayed.

In addition, during the pullback period, the remaining reserved numbers for Special Chart 2 are consumed, so to more clearly indicate how many reserved numbers for Special Chart 2 remain, the reserved icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2 continues to be displayed from the time-saving play state. Note that the reserved icon display area 281 for Special Chart 1 may also be displayed together, or neither the reserved icon display area 281 for Special Chart 1 nor the reserved icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2 may be displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30 (j), the display of changing decorative patterns has begun, and three reserve icons h21 to h23 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for special pattern 2. The number shown in the reserve number display area for special pattern 2 in the fourth pattern/reserve number display area 284 also becomes 3, and the "-" display has begun flashing in the fourth pattern of special pattern 2.

Furthermore, as explained using Figure 11(b), left-hitting is recommended in non-time-saving game mode, and the right-hit indicator lamp RL shown in Figure 30(j) is also turned off, and the first right-hit indicator RH1 is not displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30(j). However, during the pull-back period, even in the non-time-saving game mode, the left-hit notification encouraging left-hitting is restricted.

As shown in Figure 30(j), even if the game state transitions from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, the left-hand hit notification is not executed during the retraction period. In Figure 30(k), the previous right-hand hit continues, and the game ball is launched toward the right region of the game area 124. The same applies if the game state is changed from right-hand to left-hand hit, but the momentum ends up causing a right-hand hit. In the non-time-saving game state, if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228 located in the right region, a left-hand hit notification (left-hand hit second display LH2) is executed (see Figure 31(m), etc.). In Figure 30(l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228, but the left-hand hit notification is not executed. This is because, as explained using Figure 5(a), there are no time-saving symbols available for special symbol 1, and even if a left-hand hit is performed, it will not suddenly be possible to acquire the time-saving effect. Therefore, left-hand hits are not recommended. However, even if you hit from the right, it is extremely rare for a normal win to land in the special 2 starting slot 232, so hitting from the right is not recommended. Ultimately, it is best not to fire any game balls during this pullback period.

Note that if a power outage occurs during the pullback period and is restored, a left-hit notification will not be issued even during the recovery display. Furthermore, even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal start slot 228 during this recovery, a left-hit notification will not be issued. On the other hand, if a power outage occurs during a non-time-saving game state that is not a pullback period and recovery is initiated, a left-hit notification will be issued during the recovery display if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal start slot 228. Note that the left-hit notification during this recovery display may be a notification using a left-hit display and a left-hit notification sound, similar to the left-hit notification described later in Figure 31, or it may be a notification that simply displays the left-hit display, or it may be a notification that simply issues a left-hit notification sound. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30 (m), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" is displayed as a stop sign, and the player did not win the sudden time-saving feature. Additionally, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stopped "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped combination of "541".

In Figure 30(n), the pattern change display for Special Chart 2 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The "-" display has started flashing for the fourth pattern of Special Chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284. In this Figure 30(n), the number of remaining reserves for Special Chart 2 has decreased by one, the number shown in the reserve number display area for Special Chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserve icons h21 and h22 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 30(o), the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 2-Decoration 4-Decoration 5" is displayed as a stopped symbol, and here too, the sudden time reduction was not won. Also, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as an "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped combination of "245".

Figure 31 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 30.

In Figure 31(a), which follows on from Figure 30(o), the pattern change display for Special Chart 2 has begun, and the decorative pattern is changing. The "-" display has begun flashing for the fourth pattern of Special Chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284. In Figure 31(a), the number of remaining reserves for Special Chart 2 has decreased by one again, the number shown in the reserve number display area for Special Chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and only one reserve icon h21 is displayed in the reserve icon display area 282 for Special Chart 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31(b), the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 1-Decoration 9-Decoration 5" is displayed as a stopped symbol, and here too, the sudden time reduction was not won. Also, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a stopped symbol "X," and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped combination of "195."

In Figure 31 (c), the display of the remaining reserved symbol for the last special symbol 2 begins to change, and the decorative symbol changes. The fourth symbol for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 begins to flash a "-" sign, the number shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 2 becomes 0, and no reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special symbol 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31(d), the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 2-Decoration 6-Decoration 1" is displayed as a frozen symbol, and ultimately, in this example, the player did not win the sudden time-saving bonus. Additionally, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 is displayed as a frozen "X," and the mini symbols are also displayed as a frozen combination of "261." The withdrawal period ends with Figure 31(d). In this example, the withdrawal period spans the period from Figure 30(j) to Figure 31(d). The length of the withdrawal period varies depending on the number of remaining reserved special symbol 2 symbols and the duration of the symbol fluctuation display for each special symbol.

In Figure 31 (e), the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 has changed as the pullback period has ended. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 31 (e) displays a background (a plain white background) that represents a non-time-saving game state. Also, as the pullback period has ended, the hold icon display area 281 for special chart 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280, replacing the hold icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

Furthermore, once the pullback period ends, the first left-hit display LH1, encouraging a left-hit, is displayed for the left-hit notification period. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31(e) displays the first left-hit display LH1 above the decorative symbol variation display. The display form of this first left-hit display LH1 is a deformed left-pointing arrow with the words "left-hit" written inside. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also starts a left-hit notification encouraging a left-hit (audio output of "Please hit left"). In Figure 31(e), the remaining reserved symbol display for Special Symbol 1 starts, and the decorative symbol is displayed as a variation. The fourth symbol for Special Symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 starts flashing, and the value shown in the reserved number display area for Special Symbol 1 is set to 0. Furthermore, no reserved icons are displayed in the newly displayed reserved icon display area 281 for Special Symbol 1.

The player sees the first left-hand hit display LH1, begins a left-hand hit, and aims for the special symbol 1 starting hole 230. In Figure 31 (f), the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 1 increases by two, the number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 becomes 2, and two reserved symbols h11 and h12 are displayed in the reserved symbol display area 281 for special symbol 1.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 31 (g), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 3" is displayed frozen. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as the combination "923". Furthermore, one more reserved symbol is added to the special pattern 1, so the number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 3, and a third reserved icon h13 is also displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1.

In Figure 31 (h), the pattern change display for the new special symbol 1 begins, and the decorative symbol changes. The number shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 2, and a "-" begins flashing for the fourth symbol of special symbol 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one position to the left, and two reserved icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for special symbol 1. Even when the pattern change display for the new special symbol 1 begins, the left-hit first display LH1 is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31 (i), the left-hit first display LH1 has disappeared and is no longer displayed. The left-hit notification period, which begins when the pullback period ends, is a predetermined period of time, and depending on the length of the pattern change display for the special symbol, it may end within a single pattern change display or may be displayed across multiple pattern change displays. The left-hit notification period may end after a predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, one time), or when a predetermined number of reserved special symbols 1 (for example, one or four) have been accumulated. In such cases, the left-hit notification period will be an indefinite period.

If a power outage occurs during the left-hit notification period and is then restored, the first left-hit display LH1 will continue to be displayed. Furthermore, the left-hit notification during the left-hit notification period may be displayed only by the first left-hit display LH1, or may be displayed only by the left-hit notification from the speaker 120.

In Figure 31 (i), two more reserves for Special Chart 1 have been added, the number shown in the reserve number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserve number display area 284 is now 4, and four reserve icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the reserve icon display area 281 for Special Chart 1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31 (j), the losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 9" is displayed as a stopped symbol. In addition, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed as an "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a stopped symbol with the combination "729".

In Figure 31 (k), the pattern change display for Special Chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has become 3, and the "-" display has started flashing in the fourth pattern for Special Chart 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one place to the left, and three reserved icons h11 to h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for Special Chart 1.

In Figure 31 (l), it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228. In other words, a right-handed hit is detected. Then, as shown in Figure 31 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the second left-handed hit display LH2, which encourages left-handed hits. This second left-handed hit display LH2 is a display in a different display format from the first left-handed hit display LH1, and displays text such as "Please return to left-handed hits." The second left-handed hit display LH2 is displayed for a certain period of time each time a right-handed hit is detected. In addition, when this second left-handed hit display LH2 is displayed, a left-handed hit notification (for example, "Please return to left-handed hits") may be made from the speaker 120.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 31 (n), the second left-hit display LH2 disappears, the reserved number of special symbol 1 increases again, the number shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 4, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area 281 for special symbol 1. In addition, the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 9 - Decoration 2 - Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen symbol, and in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed as an "X", and the mini symbols are also displayed as a frozen combination of "924".

Figure 32 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the length of the pullback period differs from the example shown in Figure 31. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 31, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 31, there are four remaining reserved balls for Special 2, whereas in the example shown in Figure 32, there is only one remaining reserved ball for Special 2. In other words, in Figure 32(f), the number of reserved balls for Special 2 began at zero, and the last symbol change display for Special 2, which allowed the time-saving game state to be maintained, only resulted in a single winning entry in the Special 2 start slot 232. As a result, after the symbol change display for the last special symbol has ended, the value shown in the reserved number display area for Special 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 32(i) is 1, and only one reserved icon h21 is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for Special 2. In this state, as shown in Figure 32(j), the time-saving game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state (low probability special symbol, low probability normal symbol state). In Figure 32(j), the symbol change display for the only remaining reserved ball for Special 2 begins immediately, and the decorative symbol changes. In other words, the pullback period begins. Even during this pullback period, a right-hand hit is detected (FIG. 32(k)), but the left-hand hit second display LH2 is not executed (FIG. 32(l)). Eventually, the symbol variation display for the special symbol 2 remaining reserved symbol ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32(m) displays the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 5-Decoration 4-Decoration 1" in a static display. Even in this example, the sudden time reduction was not won. The pullback period ends with FIG. 32(m). The pullback period in this example is the period from FIG. 32(j) to FIG. 32(m), which is shorter than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 31. However, if the period of the symbol variation display for the only special symbol 2 remaining reserved symbol is very long, the pullback period may be longer than the pullback period in the example shown in FIG. 31. Also, even if the number of remaining reservations in Special Chart 2 is two or three, the withdrawal period may be longer than the withdrawal period in the example shown in Figure 31, or may be shorter than the withdrawal period in the example shown in Figure 32.

In the example shown in Figure 32, as the pullback period ends, the background of the decorative pattern display device 208 changes to a background representing a non-time-saving game state (a plain white background), as shown in Figure 32 (n). Also, as the pullback period ends, the hold icon display area 281 for special chart 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280, replacing the hold icon display area 282 for special chart 2.

Furthermore, with the end of the pullback period, the first left-hit display LH1 begins to be displayed. Furthermore, the speaker 120 also begins to issue a left-hit notification (voice output of "Please hit left") to encourage left-hit. In Figure 32 (n), the display of the remaining reserved symbol for special symbol 1 begins, and the display of the decorative symbol changes also begins. In the same figure (o), the display of the decorative symbol changes continues.

Figure 33 shows a step-by-step continuation of the example shown in Figure 32.

In Figure 33(a), which follows Figure 32(o), the pullback period ends and the initial Special Chart 1 symbol change display ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a frozen decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3," a losing combination. In this example, from the start of the Special Chart 1 symbol change display (the start of the display of the left-hit first display LH1) until the end of the symbol change display, there was no winning entry into the Special Chart 1 start slot 230, and the Special Chart 1 reserve could not be accumulated. Therefore, the Special Chart 1 symbol change display does not begin immediately following Figure 33(a), and the decorative symbol remains frozen as shown in Figure 33(b). Even if the Special Chart 1 symbol change display does not begin, the left-hit first display LH1 remains displayed until the end of the left-hit notification period, which is a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds). The left-hit first display LH1 continues to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 33(b). During this time, the player continues to hit with his left hand, aiming to win at the special symbol 1 starting slot 230, but there is still no winning at the special symbol 1 starting slot 230, and eventually the left hand hit notification period ends, and the first left hand hit display LH1 disappears and is no longer displayed (Figure 33 (c)). Even after the first left hand hit display LH1 disappears, there is still no winning at the special symbol 1 starting slot 230, and in Figure 33 (d), there is finally a winning at the special symbol 1 starting slot 230, and the display of the special symbol 1 pattern begins to change, and the decorative pattern also begins to change.

In the example shown in Figure 33, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228 (Figure 33 (g)), the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the second left-hand hit display LH2, which encourages left-hand hits, as shown in Figure 33 (h).

Figure 34 is a diagram showing a step-by-step example when there is no pullback period. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 31, and overlapping explanations may be omitted.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the number of remaining reserved balls for special chart 2 is four, and in the example shown in Figure 32, the number of remaining reserved balls for special chart 2 is one, whereas in the example shown in Figure 34, the number of remaining reserved balls for special chart 2 is zero. In other words, in Figure 34(f), the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 started with zero, and in the last pattern change display for special chart 2 that can maintain the time-saving game state, there was not a single win in the special chart 2 start port 232. As a result, when the pattern change display for the last special chart has ended, the value shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 2 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 34(i) is zero, and not a single reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 282 for special chart 2. In this state, when the time-saving play state transitions to the non-time-saving play state (special symbol low probability normal symbol low probability state), there is no pullback period, and as shown in FIG. 34(j), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes from the castle town background, which indicates the time-saving play state, to a plain white background, which indicates the non-time-saving play state. Also, in place of the reserve icon display area 282 for special symbol 2, the reserve icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 is displayed to the right of the variable icon display area 280. Furthermore, the display of the first left-hit display LH1 has begun. Furthermore, the speaker 120 has also begun to issue a left-hit notification (audio output of "Please hit left") encouraging left-hit play.

In Figure 34(j), the display of the remaining reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 begins, and the display of the decorative symbol also begins. In the following Figure (k), the display of the reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 ends, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 9-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" as frozen. In the example shown in Figure 34, as in the previous example shown in Figure 33, from the start of the display of the reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 (the start of the display of the first left-hand hit display LH1) until the display of the decorative symbol ends, there was no winning entry into the Special Symbol 1 starting slot 230, and the reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 could not be accumulated. Therefore, the display of the reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 does not begin immediately following Figure 34(k). Furthermore, in this example, even during the predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) from the end of the display of the reserved symbol for Special Symbol 1 until the demo display begins, there was no winning entry into the Special Symbol 1 starting slot 230, and the demo display begins on the decorative symbol display device 208. A pattern demo is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 34 (l). In the demo display, a settings menu is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 by operating the effect button 136 shown in Figure 1. From the settings menu, it is possible to adjust, for example, the volume of the speaker 120 and the brightness of the frame lamp 122. As shown in Figure 34 (l), even after switching to the demo display, the left-hit first display LH1 continues to be displayed until the left-hit notification period has elapsed.

As shown in Figure 34 (m), once the left-hit notification period has elapsed, the first left-hit display LH1 disappears and is no longer displayed. In this example, there is still no winning entry into the special chart 1 starting hole 230, and the demo display continues to be displayed. With the demo display displayed, the game ball continues to be fired, and when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the regular chart starting hole 228 (Figure 34 (n)), as shown in the same figure (o), the second left-hit display LH2 encouraging the player to hit left is displayed on the demo display screen. Note that the left-hit notification in the demo display may be accompanied by a sound, or may be configured to output only a sound instead of a display. Also, in the example shown in Figure 34, a pattern demo is displayed as the demo display, but the same applies when an animation demo is displayed.

In addition, right-hit notifications can be made by displaying the decorative pattern display device 208, outputting audio from the speaker 120, or by flashing the right-side lamp of the frame lamp 122. In addition, left-hit notifications can be made by displaying the decorative pattern display device 208, outputting audio from the speaker 120, or by flashing the left-side lamp of the frame lamp 122.

Furthermore, the display format of the first left-hand hit display LH1 during the left-hand hit notification period and the second left-hand hit display LH2, which is displayed when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal starting hole 228, was different, but they may be the same display format. Also, the display period lengths of the first left-hand hit display LH1 and the second left-hand hit display LH2 are different, but they may be the same period lengths.

Furthermore, when a power outage occurs and power is restored, the notification of how to play is executed depends on the actual game state. For example, if power is restored during a pullback period, a left-hit notification will not be executed even if a right-hit is detected. On the other hand, if power is restored during a change in the special symbol pattern in a non-time-saving game state, a left-hit notification will be executed if a right-hit is detected.

Next, music selection will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, music output from the speaker 120 can be selected by operating the up button 191 or down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 1. The music that can be selected varies depending on whether a predetermined condition is met. In this pachinko machine 100, a setting value that differs in jackpot probability can be changed by pressing the setting change button 194 shown in FIG. 2. Normally, the player does not know which setting value is set. The setting value is of great interest to the player, and in this pachinko machine 100, a setting suggestion that suggests the setting value is made using music. The above predetermined condition is not met until a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 pattern change display, which is performed as a result of the remaining special chart 2 reserve being consumed in the non-time-saving play mode. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 pattern change display in the time-saving play mode, the predetermined condition is not met. In other words, the predetermined condition is to win a jackpot in the pattern change display of Special Chart 2, which is displayed as a result of consuming the game in a non-time-saving mode.

In addition, the predetermined condition may be, instead of hitting a jackpot with a remaining reserve on Special Chart 2, or in addition to hitting a jackpot with a remaining reserve on Special Chart 2, that there is a reserve among the reserves during a jackpot game that will result in another jackpot as a result of pre-reading (so-called consecutive reserves). Alternatively, it may be winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the greatest number of rounds or the greatest number of time-saving cycles). In this pachinko machine 100, the most advantageous jackpot for the player is Special Chart A, which is a 10R special jackpot. Conversely, it may be winning the least advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the fewest number of rounds (Special Chart B, which is a 2R special jackpot) or a jackpot with the fewest time-saving cycles (Special Chart B, which is a 3R regular jackpot). It may also be winning the 10th consecutive jackpot.

In addition to or instead of a setting suggestion that indicates a setting value, music may be used that suggests that, as a result of foresight, there are holds during a jackpot game that will result in another jackpot (a so-called streak of holds), or that suggests the type of win (for example, whether or not there is a special chance, or that a round promotion will occur), or that it is the 10th jackpot in a row. Furthermore, if the music suggests game information that a player would not normally be aware of, the suggested content will be useful.

Figure 35(a) shows a list of songs that can be selected when the specified conditions are not met.

Music selection is possible during jackpot play, time-limited play, and non-time-limited play. Music cannot be selected while the special symbol is stopped, and therefore music cannot be selected while the demo is displayed. However, music selection may be possible from the settings menu mentioned above.

Note that music may be selectable even while the special image is stopped.

Furthermore, if the specified conditions are not met, the music suggesting the setting value cannot be selected, so the music that can be selected remains the same regardless of the setting value (settings 1 to 6) to which the pachinko machine 100 is set.

If the specified conditions are not met, five songs can be selected: Song 1 to Song 5. Song 1 is the default song, and is set when the RAM is cleared. Song 1 is also set each time the game transitions to non-time-saving play mode. For example, in the example shown in Figure 30, Song 1 remains set from the beginning, but if a song other than Song 1 is selected, Song 1 will be set at the timing shown in Figure 30 (j).

Figure 35(b) shows a list of songs selected when a predetermined condition is met. The predetermined condition is met when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 symbol variation display, which occurs as a result of the remaining Special Chart 2 reserve being consumed in non-time-saving play mode. During the winning jackpot play, one song is selected and set as a result of an internal lottery. In other words, the song is not selected by the player, but is automatically selected by the pachinko machine 100. The selection rate shown in Figure 35(b) corresponds to the allocation rate determined by lottery. Among the songs selected here, there are songs that suggest a setting value. Like songs 1 to 5, song 6 does not suggest a setting value. However, song 7 is a song that suggests a setting of 3 or higher and will not be selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to a setting of 3 or higher. Song 8 is a song that suggests a setting of 5 or 6 and will not be selected unless the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to a setting of 5 or 6. In fact, when the pachinko machine 100 is set to setting 1 or 2, song 6 is selected with a 100% probability.

Even after a predetermined condition is met once, it may be met again, and a song will be selected by lottery in the same way when the predetermined condition is met the second time or later. If the predetermined condition is met multiple times, the same song may be selected. It is also possible to increase the number of songs so that songs that have already been selected once will not be selected.

The number of songs described above using Figure 35 is just one example, and more songs may be used. Even in this case, the number of songs that can be output from speaker 120 will be fewer when the specified condition is met than when the specified condition is not met. Furthermore, under this relationship, songs 1 to 5 may also include songs 6 to 8. Furthermore, when the specified condition is met, only one song is selected by lottery, but under the above relationship, multiple songs may be selected by lottery and the player may ultimately choose one song.

Figure 36 shows a list of songs that are selected after a predetermined condition is met at least once. Note that Figure 35(b) is referenced for the jackpot gaming state when a predetermined condition is met, and the jackpot gaming state in Figure 36 refers to the jackpot gaming state after a predetermined condition is met at least once, but when the predetermined condition is not met.

In the non-time-saving game mode, as explained using FIG. 35(a), the player can select songs 1 through 5 by operating the up button 191 or down button 192 of the operation key unit 190. Furthermore, if song 6 is selected by lottery at least once during a jackpot game initiated by the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, song 6 will remain unlocked until the RAM is cleared and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190, just like songs 1 through 5. Even if the predetermined condition is fulfilled even once and song 7 or song 8 is selected, songs 7 and 8 will not be unlocked in the non-time-saving game mode and cannot be selected by the player. In other words, when song 6 is unlocked, repeatedly operating the up button 191 will display the song titles 1 through 6 in order on the song selection display MC. Operating the up button 191 while song 6 is displayed will return to song 1, and the song selection display MC will never display the song titles of songs 7 and 8.

In a time-saving game mode or a jackpot game mode in which a predetermined condition is not met (for example, a jackpot game mode initiated by winning a jackpot in the variable symbol display of special symbol 2 in a time-saving game mode), songs 1 through 5 can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190, just as in a non-time-saving game mode. Furthermore, if song 6 is unlocked, it can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190, just like songs 1 through 5. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 1 or 2, songs 7 and 8 will not be selected by lottery even if a predetermined condition is met, and therefore will not be unlocked. If the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 3 or 4, song 7 may be selected by lottery if a predetermined condition is met, and if selected, it will be unlocked and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. However, song 8 will not be selected by lottery and therefore will not be unlocked. When the pachinko machine 100 is actually set to setting 5 or 6, song 7 or song 8 may be selected by lottery if a predetermined condition is met. If selected, the song is released and can be selected by operating the operation key unit 190. As explained above, in the time-saving game mode or the jackpot game mode where a predetermined condition is not met, songs 6 through 8 can be selected by the player if they have been selected by lottery once. However, if they have never been selected by lottery, the player cannot select them. Similarly, if song 6 is released and songs 7 and 8 are not selectable, repeatedly operating the up button 191 causes the song selection display MC to display the song titles of songs 1 through 6 in order. Operating the up button 191 while song 6 is displayed returns the display to song 1, and the song selection display MC never displays the song titles of songs 7 and 8.

Figure 37 is a diagram continuing from Figure 30(h) and showing a step-by-step example that is different from the example shown in Figure 30.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 37(a), which continues from Figure 30(h), displays the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" in a static manner, just like the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 30(i), and displays the word "End," indicating that the display of the pattern changes for the last special pattern that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended.

The third reserved icon h23 shown in Figure 37(a) has changed from its default display mode to a gold display mode. In the drawing, the gold color is represented by vertical and horizontal cross-hatching. A reserved icon in a gold display mode corresponds to a so-called pre-reading notice, which suggests that the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern change display of the reserved icon represented by that reserved icon is 75%.

In Figure 37(b), as in Figure 30(j), the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special symbol low probability, normal symbol low probability state), the time-saving lamp TL is off, and the high probability lamp HL is also off. In addition, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a special background displaying the words "One-shot reversal," and the display of the song selection display MC begins. Song 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

Furthermore, the display mode of the first reserve icon h21 shown in Figure 37(b) has changed from the default display mode to a time-saving display mode. This time-saving display mode is a display mode of a pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving will suddenly be won, and is a display mode that changed from the default display mode when the game transitioned to a non-time-saving game state (when the remaining reserves of Special Chart 2 began to be consumed). In other words, the pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving will suddenly be won began when the pullback period began. Note that the reserve icon in the gold display mode has become the second reserve icon h22.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 37(c), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 5 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 1" is displayed statically, and in the following Figure (d), the pattern change display of special pattern 2 begins again, and the decorative pattern is displayed changing. The change icon display area 280 displays the change icon h0 for the time-saving display mode, and a normal preview is being executed. In other words, the current pattern change display suggests that there is a 75% chance of winning the time-saving mode. The hold icon in the gold display mode is the first hold icon h21.

In Figure 37(e), the second special symbol display device 214 displays the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in Figure 5(b). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 37(e) displays the word "success," and three "decorative symbols 11" (time-saving decorative symbols) shown in Figure 5(c) are displayed in a line. In other words, it is announced that a sudden time-saving symbol has been won. However, because a sudden time-saving symbol has been won but not a jackpot, the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is displayed as an "X." Furthermore, the mini symbol is displayed as a specific number combination (321) rather than as a decorative symbol 11 combination. Note that this specific combination is displayed only when a time-saving symbol that is not displayed as a static symbol is won in the event of a loss or jackpot.

By suddenly winning the time-saving mode, the game transitions to the time-saving mode without going through the jackpot mode. The time-saving mode lamp TL shown in Figure 37(f) is lit, and the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a castle town, representing the time-saving mode. Furthermore, the words "949 remaining" are displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a remaining time display, indicating that the time-saving mode will continue for another 949 plays. Furthermore, by transitioning to the time-saving mode, the first right-hit display RH1 is displayed, and the right-hit display lamp RL is also lit. Additionally, the gold-colored icon that was previously the first hold icon h21 has changed to the variable icon h0, and the variable display of the decorative symbol has begun. The variable icon h0 in the gold colored display mode is a normal preview, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot in the symbol variable display that has begun here is 75%. Note that song 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, and the song selection display MC has also begun to be displayed.

In Figure 37(g), the decorative symbol change display indicates that the game has entered a reach state. Then, in Figure 37(h), it develops into a super reach, and the reserved icon display area 282 and change icon display area 280 of special symbol 2 disappear, and the song selection display MC also disappears, along with the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, such as "949 remaining." The decorative symbol change display is also displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner. Song A, exclusive to super reach, is now being output from speaker 120, replacing Song 1, which had been continuously output up until now.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 37(i), the reduced display in the lower right corner returns to its original size, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, center symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. Here, the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" for the jackpot is displayed frozen, indicating a 2R special jackpot (Special Symbol B). Additionally, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of Special Symbol 2 is displayed frozen as a "○," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen as a "777" combination. Although the jackpot in this case is a jackpot on the remaining reserved Special Symbol 2, the predetermined condition is not met because the player first suddenly won the time-saving mode and transitioned to the time-saving game mode.

In Figure 37 (j), the opening effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text "Congratulations on the jackpot." Furthermore, because the variable winning slot 234 is located in the right-hand region, the first right-hit display RH1 is displayed, and the right-hit indicator lamp RL is also lit. The time-saving indicator TL is turned off. Furthermore, at the start of the jackpot game (during the opening effect), a second right-hit display RH2, which encourages a right-hit, is also displayed in addition to the first right-hit display RH1. This second right-hit display RH2 is a display mode in which the words "hit to the right" are displayed between two right-facing arrows spaced apart vertically, and is a larger display than the first right-hit display RH1. Additionally, the speaker 120 outputs a sound to notify the player of the right hit, saying "hit to the right."

In addition, because the jackpot game was initiated without the specified conditions being met, at least songs 1 through 5 are selectable, and the song selection display MC is displayed except for certain periods during the jackpot game. The song selection display MC displays a display UD imitating the up button 191 and down button 192 of the operation key unit 190 shown in FIG. 1, and while the song selection display MC is displayed, a song can be selected by operating the up button 191 or down button 192. The song selection display MC displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 37(j) displays the song title "Song 1," and song 1 is output from the speaker 120 along with the audio output of the right-hit notification. Note that while the audio of the right-hit notification is being output, the output volume of song 1 may be lowered or completely muted.

In Figure 37 (k), the first round has begun, and the second right-hit display RH2 has disappeared and is no longer displayed, but the first right-hit display RH1 is still displayed. The right-hit notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 120, and only song 1 is being output. Furthermore, on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has begun, a music video corresponding to song 1 being output from the speaker 120 is being displayed. The music video here is an animation of the lord, the main character, demonstrating swordsmanship to the accompaniment of song 1, and the lyrics of song 1 are also displayed. The song selection display MC is also displayed.

In Figure 37 (l), the second round has begun. In the case of a 2R probability jackpot, the V shutter VS opens in this second round (final round), making it possible to win a V prize. When the second round begins, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays the text "Aim for the V," encouraging the game ball to pass through the V passage switch VS, and although the music video continues to be displayed, the music selection display MC has disappeared and is no longer displayed. In other words, music selection cannot be performed in the round (final round) when a V prize can be won. Note that the speaker 120 continues to output music 1.

In Figure 37 (m), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a V-winning notification, notifying the player that a V-winning has been achieved. In other words, the player is notified that a transition to a special state will occur after the jackpot game ends. When the V-winning notification is displayed, the music video is hidden, but it may continue to be displayed along with the V-winning notification. Meanwhile, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120, but the V-winning notification sound may also be output from the speaker 120 along with music 1, or the V-winning notification sound may be output instead of music 1. Furthermore, even after a V-winning has been achieved, music selection is not possible until the end of the second round, but music selection may be possible for the remaining period of the second round once a V-winning has been achieved.

In Figure 37(n), the end effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the text "Jackpot End." The right-hit first display RH1 continues to be displayed throughout the jackpot game and is also displayed during this end effect. Song 1 also continues to be output from the speaker 120 during the jackpot game and is also output during this end effect. Furthermore, during the end effect, the display of the song selection display MC resumes, and a song can be selected by operating the up button 191 or down button 192. However, song selection may also be disabled during the end effect, just as in rounds where a V prize can be obtained. In this way, song selection is disabled during certain periods during the jackpot game. Furthermore, song selection is disabled during the Super Reach period shown in Figure 37(h). Furthermore, as shown in Figures 37(a), 37(c), and 37(i), song selection is also disabled while the special symbol is stopped. Additionally, songs cannot be selected when a specific mode is set or the settings menu is displayed.

By hitting the right button during the jackpot game, the second special symbol start slot 232 is also entered, and four reserved special symbols 2 are accumulated. When the jackpot game ends, the system transitions to the high probability special symbol/high probability normal symbol state, and the four reserved special symbols 2 are consumed, starting the variable display. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 37(o) displays a castle town background, indicating the time-saving game state, and the variable display of decorative symbols has begun. Additionally, the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays "119 remaining" as the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state, indicating that the time-saving game state will continue for another 119 times. Furthermore, the time-saving lamp TL and high probability lamp HL shown in Figure 37(o) are also lit. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the first right-hit display RH1, and the right-hit display lamp RL is also lit. In addition, the song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1" is also displayed, and Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

Figure 38 shows a step-by-step example in which the first reserved icon h21 of the reserved icons for special chart 2 is displayed in gold at the time when the pattern change display of the last special chart that can maintain the time-saving game state has ended.

In the example shown in Figure 37, the third reserved icon h21 among the reserved icons for Special Chart 2 was displayed in gold at the time the pattern change display for the last special chart ended, but in this example, the first reserved icon h21 is displayed in gold. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 37, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

The first reserved icon h21, which is displayed in gold as shown in Figure 38(a), changes to the variable icon h0, which is displayed in gold as shown in Figure 38(b), when the remaining reserved amount for Special Chart 2 begins to be consumed (when the withdrawal period begins).

Here, the results of the pre-reading are shown: the currently running Special 2 symbol change display (the symbol change display corresponding to the gold-colored symbol change icon h0) is a symbol change display for a jackpot. Furthermore, the next Special 2 symbol change display (the symbol change display corresponding to the first hold icon h21 shown in Figure 38(b)) will result in a sudden time-saving win. As a result of this pre-reading, since a jackpot is won in the preceding symbol change display, the symbol change display corresponding to this first hold icon h21 will be performed in the time-saving game state. Rather than updating the time-saving game state acquired by the jackpot with the sudden time-saving win, the sudden time-saving win is nullified to prioritize the time-saving game state acquired by the jackpot. Therefore, it will not be displayed in the time-saving display mode like the first hold icon h21 shown in Figure 37(b); in Figure 38(b), the first hold icon h21 is displayed in the default display mode. In other words, even if there is a reserved time-saving symbol that is expected to win, if there is a reserved time-saving symbol that will win the jackpot before that reserved time is consumed, pre-reading predictions for the time-saving symbol are prohibited.

In Figure 38(c), the display of the decorative symbols changes, entering a reach state. Then, in Figure 38(d), it develops into a super reach, and the speaker 120 outputs music A, a music exclusive to super reaches, instead of music 1, which had been output up until then. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 38(e), the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" for a jackpot is displayed statically, indicating a 2R probability jackpot (Special Symbol B). The jackpot in this case is a jackpot in the display of the decorative symbols for Special Symbol 2 that occurs as a result of the remaining reserved Special Symbol 2 symbols being consumed in a non-time-saving play state, and the specified conditions are met.

In Figure 38 (f), the opening performance of a jackpot game has begun. Due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the song selection confirmation display MD is displayed instead of the song selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 8 is displayed in the song selection confirmation display MD, announcing that song 8 has been selected by lottery. Furthermore, song 8 is being output from the speaker 120. Song 8 is a song that indicates a setting of 5 or 6, and a player who knows this will understand that the pachinko machine 100 they are currently playing is a pachinko machine with a high setting. Furthermore, song 8 is a rare song that may only be selected on pachinko machines 100 that are actually set to 5 or 6, and its selection rate is low. Therefore, being able to hear song 8 may increase the player's interest in the game. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 38 (f) displays the first right-hit display RH1 and the second right-hit display RH2, and the speaker 120 outputs the right-hit notification sound "Hit to the right" along with music 8.

In Figure 38(g), the first round has begun, and the right-hit second display RH2 has disappeared, but the right-hit first display RH1 is still displayed. The speaker 120 no longer outputs the right-hit notification sound; only song 8 is being output. Furthermore, once the first round has begun, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a music video corresponding to song 8 being output from the speaker 120. The music video here is an animation of a loincloth-clad boss striking a pose in time with song 8, and the lyrics of song 8 are also displayed. As shown in Figures 37(k) and 37(l), the lyrics for song 1, which does not suggest a setting, are displayed in text of a first color (e.g., black text), while the lyrics for song 8, which suggests a high setting, are displayed in text of a second color (e.g., gold text). The lyrics for song 7 may also be displayed in text of a third color (e.g., red text). The song selection confirmation display MD is also displayed in Figure 38(g).

In Figure 38 (h), the second round has begun. In the example of Figure 38, the text "Aim for V" is still displayed, and the song video continues to be displayed, but the song selection confirmation display MD has disappeared. Note that song 8 continues to be output from speaker 120.

In Figure 38 (i), the game ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a V-winning notification to notify the player that a V-winning has been achieved, and the music video disappears. The music selection confirmation display MD also remains hidden. Meanwhile, music 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 38 (j), the end effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the display of the music selection confirmation display MD has resumed. Music 8 has also been continuously output from speaker 120 during the jackpot game, and is also output during this end effect.

In Figure 38 (k), the game transitions to the time-saving game mode, the reserved special symbol 2 is consumed, and the variable display begins. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a castle town background, indicating the time-saving game mode, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. In addition, as the predetermined conditions are met and song 8 is selected by lottery, the song selection display MC, which displays the name of song 8, also begins to be displayed in the time-saving game mode. Song 8 continues to be output from the speaker 120 from the jackpot game.

In Figure 38 (l), the symbol change display for special symbol 2 is frozen, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a frozen decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8," which is a losing combination. This frozen symbol change display for special symbol 2 is the reserved symbol change display represented by the first reserved icon h21 at the time when the remaining reserved special symbol 2 begins to be consumed (when the pullback period begins). As described above, the symbol change display would normally have suddenly resulted in a time-saving win, but because a jackpot with time-saving has been won first, the time-saving symbol is not frozen on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the game does not transition to a time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol. In other words, in the time-saving game state, the frozen display of the time-saving symbol is restricted, and the time-saving symbol can be said to be a symbol that is frozen only in the non-time-saving game state. However, the time-saving symbol may also be frozen even in the time-saving game state.

Continuing from Figure 38(l), in Figure 38(m), the remaining number of times displayed in the time-saving game mode decreases by one, the text "118 remaining" is displayed, and the decorative symbols begin to change color, and in Figure 38(n), the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed frozen.

In addition, in Figure 38 (o), the number of remaining plays in the time-saving game state display decreases by another one, the text "117 remaining" is displayed, and the decorative pattern display begins to change. Furthermore, the song selection display MC showing the name of song 8 is displayed, and song 8 continues to be output from speaker 120.

Figure 39 shows a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 while the song selection display MC is displayed.

In the examples up to now, the operation key unit 190 was not operated even when the song selection display MC was displayed, but in the example shown in Figure 39, the operation key unit 190 is operated. The following explanation will focus on the differences from the example shown in Figure 38, and duplicate explanations may be omitted.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 39(a), the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4" is displayed in a static state, and the display of the symbol variation of the last special symbol that allows the time-saving game state to be maintained has ended.

In Figure 39(b), as in Figure 30(j), the game transitions from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state (special symbol low probability, normal symbol low probability state), the time-saving lamp TL is off, and the high probability lamp HL is also off. In addition, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to a special background displaying the words "One-shot reversal," and the song selection display MC, which displays the name of Song 1, begins to display. Song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 39 (c), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in Figure 39 (d), the song title for song 2 is displayed in the song selection display MC, and song 2 begins to be output from the speaker 120 a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the up button 191 is pressed. In other words, the song is confirmed a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the operation of the operation key unit 190. If the operation key unit 190 is operated again before the predetermined time has elapsed, the song title in the song selection display MC will change, and the song output from the speaker 120 will also change. Furthermore, the song may be confirmed if the OK button on the operation key unit 190 is pressed even before the predetermined time has elapsed.

In Figure 39(e), the decorative symbol display changes and enters a reach state, which then progresses to a super reach in Figure 39(f), with the speaker 120 outputting music A, a special music for super reaches, instead of the newly set music 2. Then, in Figure 39(g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7," resulting in a 2R probability jackpot (special symbol B), and the specified conditions are met.

In Figure 39(h), the opening presentation for a jackpot game has begun. Due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition, the song selection confirmation display MD is displayed instead of the song selection display MC. In this example, the song title of song 6 is displayed in the song selection confirmation display MD. Song 6 is also being output from the speaker 120. Song 6 is a song that does not suggest a setting. Note that the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 39(h) displays the right-hit first display RH1 and the right-hit second display RH2, and the speaker 120 also outputs the right-hit notification sound "Hit to the right" along with song 6.

In Figure 39(i), the first round has begun, and the right-hit notification sound is no longer being output from the speaker 120; only song 6 is being output. Furthermore, on the decorative pattern display device 208 where the first round has begun, a song video corresponding to song 6 being output from the speaker 120 is being displayed. The song video here is an animation of the Gakuran Style Banchou striking a pose in time with song 6, and the lyrics of song 6 are also displayed. Also in Figure 39(i), the song selection confirmation display MD is displayed.

In Figure 39 (j), the second round has begun. In the example of Figure 39, the text "Aim for V" is still displayed, and the song video continues to be displayed, but the song selection confirmation display MD has disappeared. Note that song 6 continues to be output from speaker 120.

In this example, the game ball does not pass through the V-pass switch VS, so no V-winning notification is made, and in Figure 39 (k), the end effect of the jackpot game begins. In the end effect of the jackpot game, the display of the music selection confirmation display MD resumes. In addition, music 6 has been output continuously from the speaker 120 throughout the jackpot game, and is also output in this end effect.

In Figure 39 (l), the game has transitioned to a time-saving game mode, the reserved special symbol 2 has been consumed, and the display has begun to change. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a castle town background, indicating the time-saving game mode, and the display of the decorative symbols has begun to change. Note that, since no V wins were made, the game has not entered a high probability mode, and the high probability lamp HL remains off.

Furthermore, when a predetermined condition is met and song 6 is selected by lottery, the song selection display MC showing the name of song 6 begins to be displayed during the time-saving game mode. Song 6 continues to be output from the speaker 120 from the time of the jackpot game.

In Figure 39 (m), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. Then, as shown in Figure 39 (n), the song selection display MC displays the name of the default song 1, and when song 1 is selected after a predetermined time has passed, song 1 begins to be output from the speaker 120. In this example, songs 7 and 8 have not been unlocked, and song 1 is played back after song 6.

In addition, if a specific operation (for example, pressing the down button 192 or pressing and holding the OK button) is performed during a specific period (for example, the period of the opening effect during a jackpot game as shown in Figure 39 (h)), song 6 may be released even if the specified conditions are not met. Even in this case, it is preferable that setting suggestion songs are not released.

Figure 40 shows a step-by-step example of operating the operation key unit 190 during a jackpot game that starts without the specified conditions being met.

In Figure 40(a), unlike the examples shown up to this point in Figure 38, the display of the special symbol's symbol variation has ended in the non-time-saving play state, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a frozen, missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4." The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 40(a) displays a reserve icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 against a plain white background, which represents the non-time-saving play state. The reserve icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 displays three reserve icons h11 to h13, of which the first reserve icon h11 is displayed in gold. Additionally, the time-saving lamp TL, right-hit indicator lamp RL, and high-probability lamp HL are all off. Furthermore, song 1 is being output from the speaker 120 shown in Figure 40(a).

In Figure 40(b), the display of the pending pattern change represented by the first pending icon h11 in a gold display mode has begun, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the same figure (b) has begun displaying the decorative pattern change. In addition, the variable icon display area 280 displays the variable icon h0 in a gold display mode, and a normal preview is being performed.

In Figure 40(c), the display of the decorative symbols changes, and the game enters a reach state. Then, in Figure 40(d), the game progresses to a super reach, and the speaker 120 outputs song A, which is specifically for super reaches, instead of song 1. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 40(e), the decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" for a jackpot is displayed statically, and a 3R probability jackpot (special symbol a) has been won. Since this jackpot is not a jackpot with special symbol 2 remaining in reserve, the specified condition is not met. Furthermore, in this example, this jackpot is the first jackpot, and the specified condition has not been met even once since the power was turned on (since the RAM was cleared).

In Figure 40 (f), the opening performance of the jackpot game has begun. Because the specified condition has not been met, the song selection display MC is displayed instead of the song selection confirmation display MD. The song title "Song 1" is displayed in the song selection display MC shown in Figure 40 (f), and Song 1 is output from the speaker 120 along with the audio output of the right-hit notification.

In Figure 40 (g), the first round has begun, and the right-hit notification sound is no longer being output from the speaker 120; only song 1 is being output. Additionally, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1," as well as a song video featuring the main character, the lord, who appears in the song 1.

As shown in Figure 40 (h), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 four times during the first round. The song selection display MC switches between the song titles of Song 2, Song 3, Song 4, and Song 5, in that order, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (i) displays the song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 5," and a song video with lyrics corresponding to Song 5 is displayed. Song 5 is also output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 40 (j), the player presses the up button 191 of the operation key unit 190 once. When the second round begins, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40 (k) displays a song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1," and a song video with lyrics corresponding to Song 1 is displayed. In other words, the display returns to Song 1, which was output in the first round, and here, output of Song 1 resumes from where Song 1 left off, which was output partway through in the first round. However, it is also possible to have the song be output from the beginning each time a song is selected.

When the third and final round begins on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 40(l), the song selection display MC disappears and song selection is no longer possible. The decorative pattern display device 208 continues to display a song video with lyrics corresponding to song 1. Additionally, song 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 40 (m), the gaming ball passes through the V-pass switch VS, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a V-winning notification to notify the player that a V-winning has been achieved, and the music video disappears. The music selection display MC also remains hidden. Meanwhile, music 1 continues to be output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 40 (n), the end effect of the jackpot game has begun, and the display of the music selection display MC has resumed. Additionally, music 1 is being output from the speaker 120.

In Figure 40 (o), the game has transitioned to the time-saving game mode, the reserved special symbol 2 has been consumed, and the display has begun to change. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a castle town background, which indicates the time-saving game mode, and the display of the decorative symbols has begun to change. The decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the song selection display MC showing the song title "Song 1," and Song 1 is also output from the speaker 120 without interruption when switching from jackpot game mode to non-time-saving game mode or time-saving game mode. Note that even if there is no song change when switching from jackpot game mode to non-time-saving game mode or time-saving game mode, the song may not be output continuously but may be interrupted and then resumed, or the song may be output again from the beginning when switching to non-time-saving game mode or time-saving game mode.

The predetermined condition for music selection is that a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 pattern change display that occurs as a result of the remaining reserved Special Chart 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving play state. However, for example, music may be selectable during a 10R jackpot game as shown in Figure 40 (h) or (j), and music may not be selectable during a 2R jackpot game as shown in Figure 38 (f), etc.

The present invention can also be applied to so-called type 1/type 2 hybrid machines, in which a small win occurs during time-saving play and a big win is won when the ball enters the V winning area in the attacker.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a notification means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a speaker 120, a frame lamp 122, etc.),
In a non-time-reduction game state, the notification means may execute a first notification (for example, a left-hit notification such as a left-hit first display LH1 or a left-hit second display LH2) to prompt the launch of the game ball toward the first game area,
When the first condition [for example, there are four reserved special figures 2] is met when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state,
The first notification is not executed during the first period after the transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state [for example, the period during which the remaining reserved special symbol 2 is consumed in the non-time-saving game state and the pattern change display of the special symbol 2 is performed (pull-back period), which is the period from FIG. 30(j) to FIG. 30(o) to FIG. 31(d)] [for example, FIG. 30(l)],
After the first period ends, the first notification (e.g., the left-hand hit notification of the left-hand hit first display LH1) is executed over a second period (e.g., the left-hand hit notification period of Figure 31 (e) to (h)).
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the following.
He explained about:

This gaming machine makes it possible to provide appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

Note that the first notification is always executed during the second period.

Furthermore, the notification means may not execute the first notification even if a power outage occurs during the first period and is subsequently restored.

Also,
"When the second condition [for example, there is only one reserved special symbol 2] is met when transitioning from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state, the notification means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208]
The first notification is not executed during a third period (e.g., the period from FIG. 32(j) to FIG. 32(m)) that is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-shortened gaming state to the non-time-shortened gaming state (e.g., FIG. 32(l)),
After the third period ends, the first notification (e.g., the left-hand hit notification of the left-hand hit first display LH1) is executed over the second period (e.g., the left-hand hit notification period of Figures 32(n) to 32(o) to 33(b)).
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that
He also explained.

This gaming machine is also capable of providing appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

Also,
"When the first condition and the second condition are not met when transitioning from the time-shortened game state to the non-time-shortened game state [for example, when the remaining reserve of special symbol 2 is 0], the notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] may execute the first notification [for example, left-hit notification of left-hit first display LH1] over the second period [for example, the period from Figure 34(j) to Figure 34(l)] after transitioning from the time-shortened game state to the non-time-shortened game state [for example, it may be executed as in the example shown in Figure 34, or if the remaining reserve of special symbol 2 is 2 or 3, the left-hit first display LH1 may not be executed immediately].
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the fact that
He also explained:

This gaming machine is also capable of providing appropriate notifications depending on the game situation.

Also,
"A second starting hole (e.g., a second special starting hole 232) arranged in a second game area (e.g., a right area),
A second pattern display means [for example, a second special pattern display device 214] that can execute a second pattern change display [for example, a special pattern 2 pattern change display] based on winning the second starting hole;
Equipped with
The notification means (e.g., decorative pattern display device 208) executes a second notification (e.g., right-hit first display RH1) to prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area in the time-saving game state,
The notification means executes a reservation number notification representing the reservation number of the second pattern change display [for example, a number notification in the reservation number display area of the special pattern 2 which is the lower left of the fourth pattern / reservation number display area 284],
The notification means, during the execution of the last second pattern change display (hereinafter referred to as the "last second pattern change display") in the time-saving game state [for example, Figure 30 (f) to (h)], executes a third notification [for example, right-hit second display RH2] which is a notification mode different from the second notification and encourages the launch of the game ball toward the second game area,
The notification means executes the third notification in the final second pattern change display, while executing the notification mode of the reserved number notification that has been executed before the final second pattern change display is started without changing it [for example, Figure 30 (f) to (h)],
This is a gaming machine that is characterized by the following.
He also explained.

For the final second symbol change display, if the player does not save up reserved balls for the second symbol change display, they will incur a loss. First, the reserved number notification is executed without changing the notification format, so the player can check the reserved number for the second symbol change display. Then, by executing a special notification such as the third notification, the launch of the game ball toward the second game area is emphasized, preventing the player from incurring a loss.

The notification means may also be configured to always execute the third notification while the final second symbol variation display is being executed.

Further, the notification means executes the first notification in response to detection that a game ball is being shot toward the second game area in the non-time-shortened game state after the second period has ended,
The notification means does not execute the first notification during the first period even if it detects that a game ball is being launched toward the second game area.

Also,
"A first starting hole (e.g., a first special starting hole 230) arranged in the first game area (e.g., the left side area),
A first pattern display means [for example, a first special pattern display device 212] that can execute a first pattern change display [for example, a special pattern 1 pattern change display] based on winning the first starting hole;
Equipped with
The first symbol display means does not stop and display a time-saving symbol [for example, the time-saving symbol (special symbol D) shown in FIG. 5(b)] in the first symbol variable display in the non-time-saving game state,
The second symbol display means may stop and display the time-saving symbol in the second symbol variable display in the non-time-saving game state [for example, FIG. 37(e)],
When the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol variation display, the game transitions to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot game [for example, FIG. 37(f)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Even in the same non-time-saving game state, if there is a reserved symbol in the second symbol change display, the time-saving symbol may be won, and there is a higher chance of transitioning back to the time-saving game state than if there is no reserved symbol. For this reason, the first notification is not issued, preventing the player from needlessly aiming at the first starting hole.

In addition, a pre-reading notice means capable of executing a pre-reading notice suggesting that the time-saving pattern will be stopped and displayed is provided,
The advance notice means may not execute the advance notice for the second reserved symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second reserved symbol"), which stops displaying the time-saving symbol, when the reserved symbol that is consumed before the second reserved symbol has won a certain type of jackpot.

Also, if the reserved ball consumed before the second reserved ball wins a special jackpot, the game may not transition to the time-saving game state based on the time-saving symbol even if the second reserved ball is consumed after the special jackpot game is played.

In other words, after the jackpot game of the special jackpot ends, the game transitions to the time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol will not be displayed in a stopped state even if the second reserved amount is consumed. Also, the game is already in the time-saving game state when the second reserved amount is consumed.

The present invention can also be applied to enclosed pachinko machines. In enclosed pachinko machines, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. In other words, gaming media fired from the firing means into the gaming area are ejected from the gaming area and can be supplied to the firing means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of gaming media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the gaming area on the front of the gaming machine, and the upper tray 126 and lower tray 128 shown in Figure 1 are not provided.

As explained above, this sealed-in type pachinko machine seals in balls, which are then circulated within the machine for use. The sealed-in balls may be used as fired balls, and the payout of balls may be carried out using credits.

Next, we will use Figure 41 to explain a slot machine (reel gaming machine) as a gaming machine that can be used with the present invention. Here, Figure 41 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1000 that can be used with the present invention, viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, center reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown in Figure 41) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by a driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each of the reels 1010-1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010-1012 are displayed vertically in approximately three rows through the symbol display window 1013, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each of the reels 1010-1012, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each of the reels 1010-1012 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. Furthermore, while the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) is located on the back of each reel 1010-1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable for the reel backlight to be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1010-1012, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. The rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined based on the detection results of this sensor, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1020 indicates which paylines 1014 are active. The active paylines are predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, the top horizontal payline and the bottom horizontal payline are active, adding three lines. If three medals are bet, the bottom horizontal payline and the top right-upward payline are active, adding five lines. Note that the number of paylines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five lines active may be the middle horizontal payline, the top horizontal payline, the bottom horizontal payline, the bottom right-upward payline, and the top right-upward payline. Hereinafter, active paylines may be referred to as active lines.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in the internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

Medal insertion buttons 1030-1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in slot machine 1000. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when medal insertion button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX medal insertion button. Note that game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, game start lamp 1021 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030-1032, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1041; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during bonus play) as numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination. In the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41, the stored coin number display 1025, game information display 1026, and payout coin number display 1027 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. In other words, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or when the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1035 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037-1039 as an example of an operating means. The stop buttons 1037-1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010-1012 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010-1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037-1039 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. The reel targeted by the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel targeted by the second stop operation being referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel targeted by the third stop operation being referred to as the third stop reel. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037-1039, and when the stop buttons 1037-1039 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout outlet for dispensing medals.

To the right of the medal insertion button 1032 is provided a chance button 1100, which serves as an example of an operating means. The chance button 1100 can perform operations related to the operation of the reels 1010-1012, or operations related to the display on the liquid crystal display device 1057. Furthermore, like the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the chance button 1100 can be in multiple states, and may be able to change states during the valid period for operation of the chance button 1100.

The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling up a user menu (e.g., a menu for setting a player's personal gaming history information), and is made up of multiple buttons. The information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation means.

Below the stop button unit 1036 is a title panel 1062 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed, and a title panel lamp 1064 lights up the title panel 1062. Below the title panel 1062, a medal payout opening 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided.

Sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker installed inside slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of front door 1002 are decorative lamps to add excitement to the game. A performance device 1060 is installed above front door 1002, and sound hole 1043 is installed above performance device 1060. This performance device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 consisting of two shutters, right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown, performance image display device) installed behind this shutter 1063. When right shutter 1063a and left shutter 1063b are opened horizontally outward in front of liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears on the front (player side) of slot machine 1000.

Note that the display device does not have to be an LCD display, as long as it is configured to display various presentation images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregularly shaped. Also, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Furthermore, while the present invention has been described using pachinko machines and slot machines as examples of gaming machines, it is not limited to these and may also be applied to arrange ball gaming machines, Jankyu gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

In the case of the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41, the predetermined conditions for selecting a song include winning the nth consecutive bonus, lining up a specific symbol (for example, a red 7 symbol) to win a bonus, lining up symbols on a specific winning line (for example, the horizontal winning line in the middle row) to win a bonus, winning the AT for the 10th consecutive win, winning an additional bonus for a specified number of sets or a specified number of games, or winning the AT that aligns a specified winning combination.

Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state in the examples shown in Figures 30 to 40 will be a bonus gaming state, ART state, AT state, etc. in the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 41. Furthermore, if the jackpot gaming state is set to a bonus gaming state, the time-saving gaming state will be an ART state, AT state, etc., and if the jackpot gaming state is set to an ART state, it will be an AT state, RT state, etc.

In addition, song release information was previously reset when the RAM was cleared, but it could also be reset when a power outage occurs across the date range, or it could be set so that it is not reset if the power is restored before a certain time (for example, 6:00 AM) even across the date range.

Furthermore, when power is restored after a power outage, the selected song will be reset to the default song that was previously selected.

In the above description,
"A gaming machine equipped with a sound output means (e.g., a speaker 120) capable of outputting music,
The sound output means is capable of outputting music in a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state, a bonus game state, or an ART state),
The first advantageous state is a state that is advantageous to the player,
A predetermined condition [for example, winning a jackpot in the pattern change display of special chart 2, which is performed as a result of the remaining reserve of special chart 2 being consumed in a non-time-saving game state, there being a reserve that will become a jackpot again as a result of a pre-read during a jackpot game (so-called reserve consecutive wins), winning the most advantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the largest number of rounds or the largest number of time-saving times), winning the most disadvantageous jackpot for the player (for example, a jackpot with the smallest number of rounds or the smallest number of time-saving times), winning the nth consecutive jackpot, winning the nth consecutive bonus, a specific pattern (for example, red 7 pattern) lining up to win a bonus, a specific winning line (for example, The first number of songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined conditions are not met (for example, winning a bonus by lining up symbols on the horizontal winning line in the middle row, winning the AT for the 10th consecutive win, or meeting a predetermined AT start condition (for example, winning an additional predetermined number of sets or a predetermined number of games, winning an AT that aligns a predetermined role, etc.)) is different from the second number of songs that the sound output means can output in the first advantageous state when the predetermined conditions are met (for example, "1" for one song determined by lottery as shown in FIG. 35(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

With this gaming machine, when the specified condition is met, a different number of songs are played than when the condition is not met, thereby enhancing the sense of exclusivity of the first advantageous state when the specified condition is met and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Also,
"The second number of songs [e.g., 1] is less than the first number of songs [e.g., 5 or more and 8 or less].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

By reducing the number of songs that can be played in the first advantageous state when the specified conditions are met, the sense of exclusivity felt when the first advantageous state is reached when the specified conditions are met can be enhanced, making the game more enjoyable.

Also,
"Equipped with a display means [e.g., decorative pattern display device 208],
the sound output means is capable of outputting music even in the second advantageous state,
The second advantageous state is a state that is different from the first advantageous state and is advantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving gaming state, an ART state or an AT state when the first advantageous state is a bonus gaming state, or an AT state or an RT state when the first advantageous state is an ART state),
The display means does not display a video corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the second advantageous state (e.g., FIGS. 30(a) to 30(i), 38(k) to 38(o)),
The display means displays a video corresponding to the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state (e.g., FIGS. 38(g) to 38(h), 40(g) to 40(k)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, in the first advantageous state, video can be displayed along with the output of music to liven up the game, and in the second advantageous state, music output can liven up the game while preventing interference with the variable effects that notify the player of whether or not they have won, for example.

Also,
"When the predetermined condition is met, the music output by the sound output means in the first advantageous state can suggest game information (for example, a set value, a hold during a jackpot game that will result in another jackpot as a result of a pre-reading (so-called hold consecutive wins), a win type (whether or not there is a probability change), and the number of consecutive wins)."
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

This gaming machine suggests game information when the specified conditions are met, thereby increasing the player's desire to play and achieve those conditions.

The game information may also be information about the game that players would not normally be able to know.

Also,
"Equipped with an operating means [for example, an operating key unit 190],
In the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not met, the music to be output by the sound output means can be selected using the operation means [e.g., Figure 40(h) or (j)], but in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met, the music to be output by the sound output means cannot be selected using the operation means [e.g., a music selection confirmation display MD shown in Figure 39(h) etc. is displayed, making it impossible to select].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

With this gaming machine, by making music unselectable in the first advantageous state when the predetermined conditions are met, it is possible to suggest that this music is a special music (a music that suggests information), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The game may also include a display means, which is capable of displaying a song selection display showing songs that the player can select.

Furthermore, the display means does not display the song selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is met,
The display means may be capable of displaying the song selection display in the first advantageous state when the predetermined condition is not met.

Furthermore, the display means does not display lyrics of the music being output from the sound output means in the second advantageous state,
The display means may be configured to display lyrics of the music being output from the sound output means in the first advantageous state.

When the predetermined condition is met, a first song [e.g., song 7 or song 8] is added as a song selectable by the player in a certain advantageous state [e.g., a jackpot game state or a time-saving game state] that occurs after the predetermined condition is met, and the first song can be selected in the first advantageous state, but the first song may not be selectable in the normal game state [e.g., a non-time-saving game state] [e.g., Figure 36].

It may also be possible that during a certain period in the first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) (e.g., the round (final round) in which a V prize can be obtained), it is not possible to select a song using the operating means.

It may also be possible that, even during certain periods in the second advantageous state [for example, a time-saving gaming state] [for example, a super reach period, a period when a special symbol is displayed statically, a period when a demo display is being executed, or a period when a menu display is being executed in a demo display], music selection using the operating means is not possible.

Alternatively, during a certain period in the normal game mode (e.g., non-time-saving game mode), it may be impossible to select a song using the operating means.

Also, if a power outage occurs while a song is selected and then power is restored, a preset initial song may be treated as the selected song.

The following is an additional note, including what has been explained so far.

(Appendix 1)
Music can be output during special games (for example, jackpot games, etc.),
The number of songs that can be output during a special game when the predetermined condition is not met is a predetermined number, but the number of songs that can be output during a special game when the predetermined condition is met is a specific number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 2)
Attachment 1, the gaming machine described in
The specific number is a number that is less than a predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 3)
A gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A predetermined number of songs can be output even during advantageous play (for example, time-saving play, etc.),
During special play, a video corresponding to the type of music being played is displayed, but during advantageous play, a video corresponding to the type of music being played is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
When a predetermined condition is met, music may be output during a special game to suggest predetermined information related to the game.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
During a special game in which the predetermined condition is not met, the player can select the music to be output using the operation means, but during a special game in which the predetermined condition is met, the player cannot select the music to be output using the operation means.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 6)
In non-time-limited play mode,
This is a game state in which the game ball should be launched toward the first game area (left area),
Time-saving play state:
This is a game state in which the game ball should be launched toward the second game area (right area),
If the first condition is met when transitioning from time-limited play state to non-time-limited play state,
The execution of a first hitting notification (left hitting notification) that notifies the player that a ball should be fired into the first game area during a first period after the transition from the time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state is restricted,
After the first period ends, the first hitting style notification is executed for a third period.
A gaming machine characterized by the following.

(Appendix 7)
Attachment 6: A gaming machine according to claim 6,
If a second condition different from the first condition is met when transitioning from a time-limited play state to a non-time-limited play state,
The execution of the first hitting method notification is restricted during a second period that is shorter than the first period after the transition from the time-shortened gaming state to the non-time-shortened gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized in that after the second period ends, the first playing method notification is executed over the third period.

(Appendix 8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 6 or 7,
If the first and second conditions are not met when transitioning from a time-limited game state to a non-time-limited game state,
After transitioning from a time-shortened gaming state to a non-time-shortened gaming state, the first hitting method notification may be executed over the third period.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8,
The first condition is to remember the first number's special two-reservation,
The second condition is that the second number of special reserves less than the first number is stored.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 9,
When transitioning from a non-time-saving game state to a time-saving game state, a second hitting notification (right hitting notification) is executed to notify that the ball should be launched into the second game area,
In the final fluctuation in the time-saving game state,
A third hitting method notification (reserved save notification) is executed in a manner different from the second hitting method notification executed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation, and notifies the player that the ball should be shot into the second game area, while displaying the reserved number in the same manner as the reserved number displayed in the fluctuation before the final fluctuation.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 10,
In the special game judgment based on special 1 in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol (time-saving symbol) will not be won, while in the special game judgment based on special 2 (special symbol 2 remaining reservation) in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol may be won,
When the special symbol is won, the game machine is characterized in that it shifts to a time-saving game state without going through a special game.

Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, as explained above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, various examples, or appendix, it will still constitute a single, cohesive technical idea even if it is applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, or appendix.

Next, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100) will be described in detail using Figures 42 to 62. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 42 to 62 will be used in principle only in the description using Figures 42 to 62, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 42 to 62 will take precedence in the description using Figures 42 to 62.
<Overall structure>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 42. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that allows players to win profits when certain conditions are met, and is equipped with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a gaming board 200 on its front (player side).

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store.

The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as the base shaft of the gaming machine, shaped like a vertical rectangle and rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via hinges 112. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape, with a space 114 inside. Staff at the store (gaming parlor) where this pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and it is equipped with a main body opening sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is open.

The front frame door 106 is a door element with a locking function and is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely. It is frame-shaped and has an opening on the inside. Gaming parlor staff can also open and close this front frame door 106, and it is also equipped with a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is opened. A transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is installed in the opening of the front frame door 106, and a speaker 120, a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, and an upper frame lamp 122U are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front of the game board 200 define a space in which the play area 124 is located. The front frame door 106 is an example of a door body. In this embodiment, lamps that use LED light sources are also referred to as lamps.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door element that has a locking function and is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front of the pachinko machine 100 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The ball storage tray door 108 is opened by pressing the opening lever 1081, which can be operated when the front frame door 106 is open. A ball storage tray door sensor 1082 is also provided to detect when the ball storage tray door 108 is open. The door 108 with ball storage tray is equipped with a ball storage tray 126 that can store multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and has a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a ball removal button 130 that is operated by the player to eject the game balls stored in the ball storage tray 126 from the ball storage tray 126, a ball launch handle 134 that is operated by the player to launch the game balls that have been guided to the launching device 110 into the game area 124 of the game board, an effect button 136 that is operated by the player to change the effect mode of various effect devices, a button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 and causes the effect button 136 to light up, and a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending command to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. Also, although not shown in Figure 42, a return operation button is provided to the right of the ball lending operation button 140, which is used to instruct the card unit to return the player's balance. It also has an operation key unit 190 on which a cross key and a decision button are located.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and comprises a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously operated by the player, this launching device 110 launches a game ball toward the play area 124 of the game board every predetermined launch period (e.g., 0.6 seconds), and is an example of a launching means.

Figure 43 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 100 in Figure 42.

At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upwards for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150 for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the back.

The dispensing device 152 consists of a cylindrical member, and inside it is equipped with a dispensing motor, sprocket, and dispensing sensor (not shown). This dispensing device 152 is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, it connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

The sprocket is rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains gaming balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152. By driving the payout motor and rotating it a predetermined angle, the temporarily retained gaming balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies driving force to gaming balls to transport them.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of gaming balls sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 45) when a gaming ball is passing, and the other signal, either a high or low, when a gaming ball is not passing. Gaming balls that pass this payout sensor are configured to travel through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the ball storage tray 126 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and when a predetermined award condition is met, the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to award (pay out) to the player an amount of gaming value (gaming balls) according to that award condition.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152 are a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 (see Figure 45) that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see Figure 45) that performs control processing for presentations based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300, a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see Figure 45) that performs control processing for presentations based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and an error resolution unit 167 that constitutes the payout control unit 600 (see Figure 45) that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and clears errors by operation by a gaming store employee. The system is equipped with a payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 equipped with a clear switch 168, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see Figure 45) that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 (see Figure 45) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off when operated by a gaming store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and an interface unit 606 that sends and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

In addition, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192, a setting change button 194, and a bonus ratio/setting display 196 are provided on the main board 156. In this embodiment, when the setting change key 192 is operated provided that the RAM clear switch 180 is pressed when the power is turned on, the machine can transition to a setting change mode in which the machine can be set to one of several settings with at least different jackpot probabilities. In the setting change mode, the current setting is displayed on the bonus ratio/setting display 196, and the store clerk can change the setting by pressing the setting change button 194 while checking this. Note that the machine may also be configured so that the setting can be changed when the setting change key 192 is operated when the power is turned on, even if the RAM clear switch 180 is not pressed.

The reel ratio/setting display 196 is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156 and located inside the main board case 158, and is attached in a manner that is visible to store staff. As shown in FIG. 421(A), the reel ratio/setting display 196 consists of two digit 7-segment LEDs arranged above and below, with a single digit 7-segment LED modularized on the right side. The reel ratio monitor is an indicator that reports the reel ratio (YH) and consecutive reel ratio (RY), and the setting monitor is a monitor for checking the current setting. The reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a single-color red LED, for example, but it may also be capable of emitting light in three colors: red, green, and orange, or may be a full-color LED. At least a portion of the reel ratio/setting display 196 may be mounted on the game board 200, for example, to be visible to players.

In addition, in this embodiment, a dip switch board 198 is disposed on the back surface of the first sub-board case 162. Details of the dip switch board 198 will be described later.

Figure 44 (a) is a simplified front view of the game board 200. Here, arrows d2 and d3 indicate the directions when the pachinko machine 100 is fixed in place. Arrow d2 indicates the width direction (sometimes referred to as the left-right direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and when viewed from the front, the left hand may be referred to as the left and the right hand as the right. Arrow d3 indicates the height direction (sometimes referred to as the up-down direction) of the pachinko machine 100, and the higher side may be referred to as the top and the lower side as the bottom. Although not shown in Figure 44, in the depth direction (sometimes referred to as the front-to-back direction) of the pachinko machine 100, the front side facing the player may be referred to as the front side or front side, and the far side may be referred to as the rear side or back side.

The game board 200 has a play area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. Note that the play area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

A variety of structures can be used to attach the game board 200 to the main body 104. For example, one possible structure is to insert the left side (hinge portion 112 side) of the game board 200 as seen from the front into the left side of the main body 104 as seen from the front, and then rotate the game board 200 around this position while pressing the right side (right side) 200b of the game board 200 against the main body 104 to set it in place. This structure may improve workability.

The game board 200 is a unit in which various parts are attached to the game board 201, which is a plate-shaped main body. The game board 201 is formed, for example, from resin, and its surface (front) constitutes a decorative surface displaying characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. The decorative surface may be formed, for example, by attaching a sheet on which characters from the pachinko machine 100, etc. are printed. A vibration sensor SR3 is disposed on the lower right of the game board 201. If a vibration is detected by the vibration sensor SR3, error processing (for example, an alert using an image or sound, or stopping the game to prevent further play) can be performed. The vibration sensor SR3 may also be a magnetic sensor or other fraud detection sensor.

An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, defining a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. A portion of the outer rail 202 is formed by a rail member 209 that can be attached and detached to the main body 104. Within the game area 124, the area between the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 forms a guide area 201a that guides the launched game ball.

Areas on the game board 200 other than the play area 124 may be referred to as non-play areas. The play area 124 and non-play areas can be distinguished by the outer rail 202 as a boundary. Furthermore, the area inside the area through which game balls pass when the game ball's launch strength is at its maximum may be referred to as the play area 124. The play area 124 may include areas through which game balls do not pass due to the presence of a performance device or the like within the play area 124. The play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area because game balls flow down during play, and the non-play area may be referred to as a non-flow-down area because game balls do not flow down during play except during maintenance or accidents. The entire play area 124 may be referred to as a flow-down area, but areas through which game balls do not flow down due to the presence of a performance device or the like may also be referred to as non-flow-down areas.

A decorative symbol display device 208 is located approximately in the center of the play area 124. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying various decorative symbols and effects, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display (LCD). This decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c each display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays images used in the effects. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are capable of displaying various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The main control lamp board 254 is located below the play area 124.

Figure 44(b) is an enlarged view of the various lamps mounted on the main control lamp board 254.

As shown in Figure 44 (b), the main control lamp board 254 is provided with a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, a special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, a high probability lamp RK, an electric support lamp RD, a right-hit lamp RM, and a round indicator lamp RR. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The regular map display device 210 is a display device for displaying regular maps, and in this embodiment is composed of two vertical LEDs. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are each composed of two rows, one above the other, for a total of eight LEDs.

The regular symbol reserve lamp 216 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved regular symbol variable games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of regular symbol variable games. The special symbol 1 reserve lamp 218 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games. The special symbol 2 reserve lamp 220 is a lamp that indicates the number of reserved special symbol variable games, and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special symbol variable games.

The high probability lamp RK is a lamp that indicates that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or that it will enter a high probability state. The electric support lamp RD is a lamp that indicates that the normal symbol variable display time is shortened and that the electric support state is in which the blade members 2311 of the electric tulip (electric chute) described below are likely to open for a long period of time. The right hit indicator lamp RM is a lamp that indicates that the game is in a jackpot game state, a probability variable state, or an electric support state, and that the player can benefit from these states by hitting right. The round indicator lamp RR is a lamp that indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot game related to that jackpot, in the event of a jackpot.

The gaming board 200 shown in Figure 44(a) has a warp device 242 and a stage 244 in an area where gaming balls can roll. The warp device 242 ejects gaming balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 from a warp exit 242b onto the stage 244. The stage 244 is located below and in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is the stage where gaming balls that have passed through the warp device 242 can perform movements such as reciprocating and rotating. The reciprocating and rotating movements of the gaming balls increase the time they remain in the stage 244.

Furthermore, a first performance movable body 7 is positioned above the play area 124, supported by the main body 104. The first performance movable body 7 is provided with a rectangular light-emitting section 71 in which multiple light-emitting diodes capable of emitting light in full color are arranged. Furthermore, a second performance movable body 8 modeled after a human right arm is positioned on the right side of the play area 124. This second performance movable body 8 consists of an upper arm 81 and a forearm 82, and is equipped with an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm to the shoulder position, a forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm to the elbow position, and finger motors (not shown) that bend and extend the five fingers. The second performance movable body 8 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 as a movable area by the upper arm motor and forearm motor.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), a portion of the top of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative cover 203. The upper right portion of the play area 124 is covered with a decorative upper right cover 205, and a normal map start port 228 is located behind (behind) the decorative upper right cover 205. The normal map start port 228 is a device known as a gate or through chucker for determining whether a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the play area 124. In this embodiment, one is located on the right side of the play board 200. A ball that passes through the normal map start port 228 is not ejected to the play area. However, if a ball enters the normal map start port 228, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., one ball) may be paid out, and the entering game ball may be guided to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and ejected to the play area. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 initiates a normal map variable game using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, a single first special symbol start hole 230 is located in the lower center of the game board 200. A star-shaped effect lamp 206 is located directly below the first special symbol start hole 230. Furthermore, a sub-LCD display device 207 is located to the left of the first special symbol start hole 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special symbol start hole 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is activated, a predetermined number of balls (e.g., four) are discharged as prize balls into the ball storage tray 126, and a special symbol variable game is initiated by the first special symbol display device 212. The ball that enters the first special symbol start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, an attacca unit 23 is located in the lower right corner of the game area 124, and this attacca unit 23 is also separately provided with an electric chute-type first special symbol start hole. Hereinafter, the first special symbol start opening 230 located at the bottom center of the gaming board 200 will be referred to as the first special symbol start opening (fixed) 230, and the electric chute-type first special symbol start opening separately located in the attacca unit 23 will be referred to as the first special symbol start opening (variable) 231, to distinguish between the two. The blade members 2311 of the first special symbol start opening (variable) 231 move back and forth; when advanced, they form a ball passage, making it difficult to win, and when retracted, they make it easy to win. In the following explanation, when the blade members 2311 are advanced, they will be referred to as closed, and when retracted, they will be referred to as open. The attacca unit 23 also has a light-emitting diode (not shown) that can emit full-color light.

In addition to the first special symbol starting opening (variable) 231, the attacca unit 23 also has a second special symbol starting opening 232, a first variable winning opening 234, and a second variable winning opening 235. These variable winning openings are sometimes referred to as "attacca." The first door element 2341 of the first variable winning opening (attacca) 234 moves back and forth in the forward and backward directions. When it is advanced, it forms a ball passage, making it difficult to win, and when it is retracted, it becomes easy to win. In the following description, when the first door element 2341 is advanced, it may be referred to as "closed," and when it is retracted, it may be referred to as "open." The second door element 2351 of the second variable winning opening (attacca) 235 also moves back and forth in the forward and backward directions, but unlike the first door element 2341, when it is advanced, it forms a ball passage, making it easy to win, and when it is retracted, it becomes difficult to win. In the following description, when the second door element 2351 is advanced, it is referred to as "open," and when it is retracted, it is referred to as "closed."

As shown in Figure 44(a), the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230 located in the lower center is positioned in such a way that it is difficult for a game ball to enter it when hit from the right. Meanwhile, a special route 244a is provided in the center of the above-mentioned stage 244, making it easier for a ball that reaches stage 244 to enter the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230 located in the lower center of the game board 200. It is also possible to aim for the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230 from the left side without passing through stage 244. Therefore, the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230 located in the lower center of the game board 200 is a starting hole that can be expected to enter when hit from the left.

Furthermore, although not shown, the gaming area 124 is provided with multiple general winning openings. When a ball enters a general winning opening, a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects it, and as a winning ball at the general winning opening, the payout device 152 is activated, and a predetermined number of balls (for example, four) are discharged into the ball storage tray 126 as prize balls. Balls that enter a general winning opening are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged toward the game island.

In addition, the play area 124 is equipped with a disk-shaped ball direction changer 236 called a windmill, as well as multiple play nails, and the bottom of the inner rail 204 is provided with an outlet 240 for guiding balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the play island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies a ball stored in the ball storage tray 126 to the launch position on the launch rail, which drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, causing the ball to pass through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 using the launch rod and launch hammer and launch into the play area 124. The ball then flows downward, changing direction using the ball direction changing member 236 and play pins, and either enters one of the various winning slots or starting slots, or reaches the outlet 240 without entering any winning slots or starting slots, or simply passing through the normal starting slot 228. In this embodiment, a discharged ball receiving port (not shown) that receives all game balls discharged from the game board 200 is formed at the lower edge of the space 114 of the main body 104 so as to open upward, and an out ball detection sensor SWout that detects the passage of game balls received in the discharged ball receiving port is provided at a predetermined position on the main body 104. Note that the out ball detection sensor SWout may also be provided on the game board 200 side. In this embodiment, all game balls discharged from the game board 200 (including game balls discharged from the outlet 240 and game balls that have entered various winning ports) are received by this discharged ball receiving port and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via a predetermined discharge passage; however, it is also possible for only game balls discharged from the outlet 240 to pass through the out ball detection sensor SWout.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be explained in detail using Figure 45. Note that this figure is a functional block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the core of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls in response to commands sent by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100.

First, we will explain the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring program processing anomalies, and a random number generator (counter circuit) 318 (which is assumed to have two built-in counters). Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308; the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, described below. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as the system clock. Additionally, the random number generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a. Note that although the random number generation circuit 318 is assumed to be built into the basic circuit 302, it may also be connected to the basic circuit 302.

The basic circuit 302 also includes a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a ball storage tray full sensor, and outputting the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the CPU 304 and random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302; a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the first special pattern display device 212 and the second special pattern display device 214; a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of predetermined pattern display devices, such as the normal pattern display device 210; and various status display units. 328 (e.g., normal symbol hold lamp 216, special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, high probability lamp RK, electric support lamp RD, right hit lamp RM, round display lamp RR, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 including predetermined movable parts, such as a drive means for driving the blade member 2311 of the first special symbol start port (variable) 231 as a normal electric device, and a drive means for driving the first door member 2341 of the first variable winning port 234 and the second door member 2351 of the second variable winning port 235 as special electric devices. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may also be included in the random number generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special symbol starting hole 230, 231, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the random number generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special symbol starting hole 230, 231 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special symbol 1. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special symbol starting hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special symbol starting hole 232 at that timing and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to special symbol 2.

Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 via this information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like.

The main control unit 300 also has a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. If the power supply voltage value is below a predetermined value (9 V in this example), this voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also has a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it begins game control (starting the main control unit main processing, described below).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, while information communication between the main control unit 300 and the dispensing control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured not to allow the first sub-control unit 400 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to be two-way communication. Also, the dispensing control unit 600 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300, but may be configured not to allow the dispensing control unit 600 to send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

Next, we will explain the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I/O 410 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a serial communication control circuit 424. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. Note that the control program and various effect data may be stored in separate ROMs. Alternatively, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440, which controls the game board lamp 442, and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450, which controls the game table frame lamp 452, and controls lighting via serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. The game board lamp 442 includes a star-shaped effect lamp 206, a light-emitting unit 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7, and a light-emitting diode (not shown) located on the attacca unit 23. The game table frame lamp 452 also includes a left frame lamp 122L, a right frame lamp 122R, an upper frame lamp 122U, and a button lamp 138 that illuminates the effect button 136.

The basic circuit 402 is also connected to a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 422 for controlling the drive of the motors of various performance devices such as the first performance movable body 7 at the top and the second performance movable body 8 on the right side shown in Figure 44(a), a sensor circuit 428, and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 outputs detection signals from various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current positions of the various performance devices, and a button sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the performance button 136 and various buttons that make up the operation key unit 190, to the basic circuit 402.

Next, we will explain the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. The basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, memory 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads image data stored in ROM 506 based on signals from the CPU 504, generates display images using the work area of VRAM 518, and displays the images on the decorative pattern display unit 208 and the sub-LCD display unit 207. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, ROM 506 is connected to basic circuit 502, which stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, as well as data for image display. In this embodiment, memory 508 is used as a temporary storage area, and is composed of a recording medium (e.g., EEPROM or flash memory) that can retain its stored state even when power is cut off. This allows, for example, information for displaying the jackpot history to be retained even when the main control unit 300 is initialized or settings are changed. It is also possible to use RAM, which volatilizes stored information when power is cut off.

Next, we will explain the payout control unit 600, launch control unit 630, and power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, and detects whether the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. The payout control unit 600 also communicates with a card unit 608, which is provided separately from the pachinko machine 100, via an interface unit 606. The payout control unit 600 also outputs prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been paid out, loan ball information indicating that a predetermined number of loan balls (e.g., 25 balls) have been paid out, and other information to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is also connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body open sensor 1041 that detects when the main body 104 is open, and a front frame door sensor 1061 that detects when the front frame door 106 is open. These sensors detect when the main body 104 or the front frame door 106 is open and output an open signal. When the frame sensor 605 outputs an open signal, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door open information to the main control unit 300.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the ball storage tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that instructs whether to allow or stop launching, and a control signal output by the launch intensity output circuit located within the ball launch handle 134 that instructs the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied externally to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300 and first sub-control unit 400, and each device, such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) to supply power to certain components (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. Note that in this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies power of a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. However, power of a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and device via another power supply path.

Next, using Figures 46(a) to (d), we will explain the types of special symbols and regular symbols that are displayed when stopped by the first special symbol display device 212, second special symbol display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, and regular symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100.

Special chart 1 variable play begins when the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 1 start port 230, 231, and special chart 2 variable play begins when the second start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special chart 2 start port 232. When special chart 1 variable play begins, the first special chart display device 212 performs a "special chart 1 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the bottom row). Furthermore, when special chart 2 variable play begins, the second special chart display device 214 performs a "special chart 2 variable display" (special chart variable play) by flashing some of the eight lamps (for example, the first lamp from the left in the bottom row). Then, when the change time determined before the start of special chart 1 change has elapsed, the first special chart display device 212 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1, and when the change time determined before the start of special chart 2 change has elapsed, the second special chart display device 214 will display a stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 2. Hereinafter, the change display from the start of this "change display of special chart 1 or 2" to the stopped display of the stopped pattern mode of special chart 1 or 2 may be referred to as the special chart change display. This special chart change display may be performed multiple times in succession.

In addition, in this embodiment, the system is designed to start displaying the changes in special charts regardless of whether one of special charts 1 and 2 is displaying the changes in the other special chart (pachinko machines with such specifications are sometimes called "simultaneous change machines").

Figure 46(a) shows an example of the stop pattern configuration of Special Design 1. Four types of special designs, "Special Design A" to "Special Design D," are shown in Figure 46(a). In Figure 46(a), the white areas in the drawing indicate lamps that are turned off, and the black areas indicate lamps that are turned on.

In this embodiment, two types of jackpot symbols ("Special Symbol A" and "Special Symbol B") are provided as the stopping symbol patterns for Special Symbol 1. "Special Symbol A" is a 6-round (R) normal jackpot symbol. When "Special Symbol A" is displayed, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, transitioning to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special symbol low probability, normal symbol high probability state. Furthermore, "Special Symbol B" is a 6R guaranteed jackpot symbol. When "Special Symbol B" is displayed, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, transitioning to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special symbol high probability, normal symbol low probability state. Note that while this embodiment provides two types of jackpot symbols, it goes without saying that three or more types of jackpot symbols may be provided. It is also possible to provide jackpots that are virtually difficult to win in some rounds (for example, jackpots that are difficult to win due to short opening).

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the determination of whether a jackpot occurs during special symbol variable play is made by a hardware random number lottery, while the determination of whether a normal jackpot or a special symbol variable jackpot occurs is made by a software random number lottery. The difference between a normal jackpot and a special symbol variable jackpot is whether the probability of winning a jackpot in the next special symbol variable play is high (special symbol variable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot). Hereinafter, this state of high jackpot probability is referred to as the special symbol high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special symbol variable jackpot" or simply "special symbol variable jackpot"), and the state of low jackpot probability is referred to as the special symbol low probability state. Note that in this embodiment, as described below, there is almost no difference in jackpot probability between the special symbol low probability state and the special symbol high probability state, and the special symbol variable time is configured to differ significantly between the special symbol low probability state and the special symbol high probability state. In addition, after the jackpot play ends, the machine may transition to a time-saving state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state refers to a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than in a non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special symbol variable play and the start of the next jackpot. While time-saving is described in detail below, the time-saving state is referred to as a normal symbol high-probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "normal symbol probability variable"), and a state other than the time-saving state is referred to as a normal symbol low-probability state. Thus, the electric support state (time-saving state) is initiated upon the end of a jackpot play. Strictly speaking, the "electric support state" is a state related to normal symbols, while the "time-saving state" is a state related to special symbols or a state related to both normal symbols and special symbols. A time-saving flag is stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time-saving flag is set to on, the state is electric support state and the normal symbol high-probability state. In the normal symbol high-probability state, it is easier to win in normal symbol variable play (normal symbol probability variable) compared to the normal symbol low-probability state. For example, the winning probability of a normal variable game is 0/100 (i.e., a guaranteed miss) in a normal low probability state (non-electric support state), whereas it rises to 100/100 (i.e., a guaranteed win) in a normal high probability state (electric support state). Also, the variable time of a normal variable game is shorter in an electric support state than in a non-electric support state (normal variable shortening). For example, the variable time of a normal variable game, which is 10 seconds in a non-electric support state, is shortened to 2 seconds in an electric support state. Also, in an electric support state, the opening time of the blade member 2311 of the special game 1 starting hole (variable) 231 per opening tends to be longer than in a non-electric support state (extended electric chute opening period). For example, the electric chute opening period, which is 0.5 seconds in a non-electric support state, is extended to 2 seconds in an electric support state. Furthermore, in the electric support mode, the vane members 2311 tend to open more frequently (increased number of electric chute openings) than in the non-electric support mode. For example, the vane members 2311 only open once per winning entry into the normal game start slot 228 in the non-electric support mode, but open twice in the electric support mode (open for two seconds, closed for one second, and then open again for two seconds). By extending the electric chute opening period and increasing the number of times the electric chute opens, the probability of the ball entering the special game start slot 1 (variable) 231 increases. The time-saving flag is set to off during jackpot play. Therefore, the non-electric support mode is maintained during jackpot play. This is because, particularly during jackpot play, game balls may be picked up by the electric chute with a smaller number of winning balls, resulting in fewer winning balls entering the first variable winning slot 234 or the second variable winning slot 235, which can be detrimental to the player. In this embodiment, the electric support state (time-saving state) includes all of the following: normal symbol probability variation, normal symbol variation reduction, extended electric chute opening period, and increased electric chute opening count. However, if at least one of these is performed, the player's advantage is increased, and the electric support state (time-saving state) may be established. Alternatively, the electric support state (time-saving state) may be established if either the extended electric chute opening period or increased electric chute opening count, which increases the probability of the ball entering the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231, is performed. In the non-electric support state, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231 changes between a difficult-to-enter state where the game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-enter state where the game ball is easy to enter. The entrance of this special symbol 1 starting hole (variable) 231 remains in an easy-to-enter state for a longer period of time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" is displayed, the electric support state is maintained for 50 special chart variable plays after the subsequent jackpot play ends, and on the 51st play, the state transitions to non-electric support (normal chart low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot without electric support ("Special Chart B") is won, the state does not transition to electric support after the jackpot play ends.

In this way, in this embodiment, when "Special Chart A" is displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special chart low probability, normal chart high probability state. Also, when "Special Chart B" is displayed, after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special chart high probability, normal chart low probability state.

In this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot symbol, a small jackpot symbol ("Special Symbol C") is also provided for Special Symbol 1. When a small jackpot occurs on "Special Symbol C," the second door element 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens 12 times for 0.06 seconds after the symbol stops. The opening time and number of times the second door element 2351 opens can be set as appropriate. During a small jackpot game, once a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the second variable winning opening 235, or once a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) has been acquired, the small jackpot game ends, and the second door element 2351 will no longer open. During a small jackpot game, the game transitions to a special symbol low probability/normal symbol low probability state. A small jackpot is a win in which the control state does not change before and after the small jackpot game, and after the small jackpot game ends, the control state before the start of the small jackpot game returns to the state it was in before the game began.

As mentioned above, this embodiment is a simultaneous variable machine, so when a small win occurs on special chart 1 and a transition to small win play occurs, it is possible that special chart 2 is currently displaying a change. In this case, when a small win occurs on special chart 1, the display of changes on special chart 2 is interrupted, and when the small win play related to that small win ends, the display of changes on special chart 2 resumes. Also, it is possible that a big win occurs on special chart 1 and a transition to big win play occurs, and special chart 2 is currently displaying a change, and when a big win occurs on special chart 2 and a transition to big win play occurs, special chart 1 is currently displaying a change. In this case, when a big win occurs on one special chart, the display of changes on the other special chart is forcibly terminated, the result of the display of changes is discarded, and a loss result is displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stopping symbol is prepared as a losing symbol. "Special Symbol D" is the losing symbol.

Figure 46(b) shows an example of the stopped symbol pattern for special symbol 2. Figure 46(b) shows five types of special symbols, "special symbol a" to "special symbol e," three of which are jackpot symbols ("special symbol a" to "special symbol c"). "Special symbol a" is a 6R normal jackpot symbol, and when "special symbol a" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special symbol low probability, normal symbol high probability state. Furthermore, "special symbol b" is a 6R guaranteed jackpot symbol, and when "special symbol b" is stopped and displayed, the game transitions to a jackpot game state in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and after the jackpot game ends, the control state becomes a special symbol high probability, normal symbol low probability state. "Special symbol c" is a 10R probability jackpot symbol, and when "Special symbol c" is displayed, the first variable winning slot 234 opens, transitioning to a jackpot game state. After the jackpot game ends, the control state changes to a special symbol high probability/normal symbol low probability state. Note that some rounds may have jackpots that are virtually difficult to win (for example, difficult to win due to short opening). Also, while three types of jackpot symbols are provided for Special symbol 2, more than three types of jackpot symbols may be provided.

In addition, special chart 2 also features a small win symbol ("special chart d") in addition to the big win symbol. When a small win occurs on "special chart d," the second door element 2351 of the second variable winning opening 235 opens once for 0.06 seconds after the symbol stops. Compared to the small win symbol on special chart 1 ("special chart C"), a small win on special chart 1 ("special chart C") is more likely to allow more game balls to enter the second variable winning opening 235 than a small win on special chart 2 ("special chart d"), resulting in more winning balls. In other words, a small win on special chart 2 does not result in winning balls, but a small win on special chart 1 does. The opening time and number of times the second door element 2351 opens can be set as desired.

In addition, Special Chart 2 also has one type of stopping pattern available as a losing pattern. "Special Chart e" is the losing pattern.

Figure 46 (c) shows an example of a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, there are ten types of decorative patterns, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10." When a ball enters the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230, the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, i.e., when the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 1 starting hole (fixed) 230 or the special pattern 1 starting hole (variable) 231, or when the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the special pattern 2 starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern variable display" may be performed in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208, switching the display in the following order: "Decoration 1" → "Decoration 2" → "Decoration 3" → ... "Decoration 9" → "Decoration 10" → "Decoration 1" → ... That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. It also displays a static symbol pattern, which is a combination of decorative symbols. In this embodiment, in the normal game mode and electric support mode, where special symbol 1 is primarily displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 1, while in the special variable mode, where special symbol 2 is primarily displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2. On the other hand, in the normal game mode and electric support mode, even if special symbol 2 is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, the decorative symbol is not displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, and the symbol is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2. Meanwhile, in the normal game mode and electric support mode, even if special symbol 2 is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, the decorative symbol is not displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, and the symbol is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, which will be described later. Meanwhile, in the special variable mode, even if special symbol 1 is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 1, the decorative symbol is not displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, and the symbol is displayed in accordance with the display of special symbol 2, which will be described later.

When the first special symbol display device 212 confirms a 6R special jackpot in normal game mode or electric support mode, or when the second special symbol display device 214 confirms a 10R special jackpot in special mode, a combination of decorative symbols consisting of three decorative symbols of the same number lined up other than "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4") will be displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Furthermore, when the first special symbol display device 212 confirms a 6R probability variable jackpot ("special symbol B") in normal game mode or electric support mode, or when the second special symbol display device 214 confirms a 10R probability variable jackpot ("special symbol c") in the probability variable mode, the symbol display areas 208a-208c display a static display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7." Furthermore, when a losing symbol such as "Special symbol D" or "Special symbol e" is to be announced, the symbol display areas 208a-208c display a static display of a decorative symbol combination other than those described above (for example, scattered symbols).

Hereinafter, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the display from the start of this "decorative pattern variable display" to the display of the stopped decorative pattern pattern will be referred to as the decorative pattern variable display (sometimes referred to as the "decorative pattern variable display"). The decorative pattern variable display is performed under the control of the second sub-control unit 500.

Figure 46(d) shows an example of a normal symbol stop pattern. In this embodiment, there are two types of normal symbol stop display patterns: "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, and "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol. When the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a "normal symbol change display" (normal symbol change game) by alternately lighting two LEDs arranged vertically. Then, after the change time has passed, either "Normal Symbol A," which is a winning symbol, or "Normal Symbol B," which is a losing symbol, is displayed as a stopped symbol. In Figure 46(d), the white areas in the figure indicate the locations of the lamps that will be turned off, and the black areas indicate the locations of the lamps that will be turned on.

Hereinafter, the display from the start of this "regular map changing display" to the stop display of the regular map's stopping pattern will be referred to as the regular map changing display.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in Fig. 45 will be described with reference to Fig. 47. Note that Fig. 47 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores special symbol random number values, special symbol round determination random number values, special symbol electric support determination random number values, and special symbol pattern determination random number values. RAM 308 also has a random number counter that generates these various random number values. RAM 308 also stores the number of reserved special symbols, special symbol winning random number values, and various judgment (lottery) results. Hereinafter, the area in RAM 308 that stores the number of reserved special symbols may be referred to as the special symbol reserved number storage area. RAM 308 also has a start information storage unit for special symbols divided into areas for the maximum number (four in this example) that can reserve the start of the win/loss judgment (lottery), as well as a random number value storage area for regular symbols. As described below, the start information storage unit for special symbols stores multiple types of start information as a set, with one set of this start information stored in each area in order of winning (reserved order).

As mentioned above, the main control unit 300 shown in Figure 45 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When this start signal is input, the CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in Figure 47 in accordance with the control program pre-stored in ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. This initial setting 1 sets the stack initial value (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, sets the interrupt mask, initializes the I/O 310, initializes various variables stored in the RAM 308, and sets operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value for the WDT 314.

In step S103, the counter value of WDT314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT314 is restarted.

In step S105, the process monitors whether the low voltage signal is ON, i.e., whether the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating a voltage drop when the voltage value of the power supply supplied by the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500 is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is ON (the CPU 304 has detected a power interruption), the process returns to step S103. If the low voltage signal is OFF (the CPU 304 has not detected a power interruption), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after power is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. This initial setting 2 includes the following: setting a value in the timer circuit 312 that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below; outputting a clear signal from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400); and setting to allow writing to RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether the state before the power was interrupted (before power was cut off) will be restored. If the state before power was cut off will not be restored (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the process proceeds to step S113 and subsequent steps to perform initialization processing.

If it is not determined that the state before the power outage will be restored (Step S109; No), it is determined whether the cause is the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 43 being operated by a gaming parlor staff member or the like (Step S113). That is, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RAM clear switch 180 is operated is ON (indicating that an operation has been performed). If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is ON (Step S113; Yes), it is determined whether the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115). If it is determined that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (Step S115; Yes), it executes the setting change process (Step S117).

When the setting change process is executed, the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor on the bonus ratio/setting display 196 flashes to indicate "1," indicating that the setting can be changed. In this state, the 7-segment display on the setting monitor increments each time the setting change button 194 is pressed. Pressing the setting change button 194 while the 7-segment display corresponding to the setting monitor indicates "6" returns the display to "1." In this embodiment, a user can select one of settings 1 through 6, each with a different jackpot probability. After changing to the desired setting, the setting is confirmed by pressing the setting change key 192 to the OFF position. At this time, the setting value displayed on the setting monitor is erased. After the setting is confirmed, the setting value can be redisplayed on the setting monitor for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) by operating the setting change button 194. While the setting value is displayed on the setting monitor of the bonus ratio/setting display 196 in this embodiment, it may also be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or announced via audio output, for example. Additionally, in this embodiment, six settings are provided, from setting 1 to setting 6, but other settings are also possible, or the setting may not be changed. Also, in this embodiment, the initial setting value displayed on the setting monitor is set to "1," but the setting value before the power was turned off may be retained and the retained setting value may be displayed.

Furthermore, if it is not determined in step S113 that the RAM clear signal is ON (step S113; No), or if it is not determined in step S115 that the setting change key 192 has been operated to the ON side (step S115; No), the setting change process of step S117 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S119.

In step S119, initialization processing is performed to return the basic circuit 302 to its initial state (step S119). Here, if the RAM clear signal is ON, the power status information stored in the power status storage area in RAM 308 is read. If this power status information does not indicate a suspend state, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a specified area (e.g., all areas) of RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. The checksum is then determined to be a specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is anything other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (i.e., if the checksum result is abnormal), initialization processing is performed to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. This initialization processing includes disabling interrupts, setting the stack pointer to a stack initial value (main setting), and initializing all storage areas in RAM 308. Note that in this embodiment, even after initialization, the settings set in the setting change processing (step S117) are retained. Furthermore, a normal return command and a setting command indicating the settings selected in step S117 are set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S119) has been performed, and like the power recovery command described below, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S121, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. This basic random number initial value update process updates two initial value generation random number counters that generate the initial values for the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter. For example, if the possible range of values for the normal winning random number is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area in RAM 308 that is used to generate the normal winning random number, and 1 is added to the obtained value before storing it in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same way. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S121 except while performing timer interrupt processing, which starts at a predetermined cycle.

Meanwhile, in step S111, power restoration processing is performed. In this power restoration processing, the stack pointer value stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. The values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power outage are also read and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. The CPU 304 then executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state it was in when power was lost. In other words, processing resumes from the command following the command (specified in step S121) executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing (described below) immediately before power outage. The RAM 308 installed in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 43 also has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in that transmission information storage area. This power restoration command indicates that the state at the time of power outage has been restored, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 48. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 shown in Figure 45 is equipped with a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 4 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal triggers the start of main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. This timer interrupt start processing includes processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S203, WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of processing abnormalities).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from various sensors 320 (shown in FIG. 45), including various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310, and the presence or absence of detection signals is monitored and stored in signal status memory areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Using ball detection sensor detection signals as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times before last (approximately 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308. Information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (approximately 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previously described previous detection signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals from each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the currently detected signal storage area mentioned above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area is compared to determine whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While a gaming ball passes through a ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeatedly activates at very short intervals of approximately 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, the aforementioned step S205 checks for a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed the same ball detection sensor are stored in the aforementioned second-to-last detection signal memory area, previous detection signal memory area, and current detection signal memory area. In other words, when a gaming ball begins to pass through a ball detection sensor, there will be no second-to-last detection signal, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In this embodiment, taking into account erroneous detection and noise from the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a win has occurred. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 45 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was no detection signal two times before last, that there was a detection signal the previous time, and that there was a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was no detection signal two times before last, that there was a detection signal the previous time, and that there was a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot, the first variable winning slot 234, the second variable winning slot 235, the first special starting slot (fixed) 230, the first special starting slot (variable) 231, and the second special starting slot 232, or passed through the general starting slot 228. That is, it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning slot, these variable winning slots 234, 235, and these starting slots 230, 231, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in the first starting slot sensor that detects a ball entering the first special symbol starting slot (fixed) 230 matches the winning determination pattern information described above, it is determined that a winning has occurred in the first special symbol starting slot (fixed) 230, i.e., that a gaming medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with subsequent winnings in the first special symbol starting slot (fixed) 230 is performed. However, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times does not match the winning determination pattern information described above, processing associated with subsequent winnings in the first special symbol starting slot (fixed) 230 is not performed, and the system branches to subsequent processing. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there was a detection signal two times before last, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there was no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a win has occurred, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the win determination clear pattern information. If the information matches the win determination clear pattern information, it will then be determined whether or not it matches the win determination pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value, performed in step S121 above, is updated, and then the random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value and the special random number value used by the main control unit 300, are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 99, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and the value is then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Furthermore, if it is determined that the random number counter has completed one cycle as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the respective random number counter is obtained and set in the random number counter memory area. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value, which varies between 0 and 99, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (e.g., 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating initial values corresponding to the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value and set in the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value, and the currently set initial value is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area to determine when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining when the random number counter for generating a normal winning random number value has completed its next cycle, RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining when the random number counter for generating a special random number value has completed its next cycle.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. This process updates the random number counter used to generate random numbers for performances used by the main control unit 300.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. This timer update process updates various timers, including a normal symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display pattern update timer for timing the time for the symbol to change or stop being displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214, and timers for timing the specified winning performance time, specified opening time, specified closing time, specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a prize slot counter update process is performed. In this prize slot counter update process, when a prize is won at prize slots 234, 235 or starting slots 230, 231, 232, the value in the prize ball count memory area provided for each prize slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

Furthermore, in step S217, a winning entry acceptance process is performed. During the winning entry acceptance process, if certain conditions are met, multiple types of start information are acquired. The multiple types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in an available area in the start information storage section of RAM 308 according to the order of winning (order of pending).

In step S219, which is executed following step S217, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in Figure 45 consists of one byte, with bit 7 indicating strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bit 6 indicating power-on information (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), bits 4 and 5 indicating the current processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 indicating the payout request count after encryption processing.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process performs one of several processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process during the normal map variation display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to alternately flash the two LEDs that make up the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 displays the variation of the normal map (normal map variation game).

In addition, during the normal symbol status update process when the normal symbol variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the two LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the winning symbol is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the two LEDs that make up the normal symbol display device 210 are controlled to turn on and off so that the losing symbol is displayed. Also, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for various settings to be made in various processes, not just the normal symbol status update process. Here, the above-mentioned on and off control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal symbol is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 will confirm and display either the winning symbol (normal symbol A shown in Figure 46(d)) or the losing symbol (normal symbol B shown in Figure 46(d)). Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the regular symbol stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. This setting causes the confirmed symbol to be displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the regular symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Furthermore, if the result of the normal symbol variable play is a win, the normal symbol win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal symbol win flag is on, the normal symbol status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the normal symbol stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the normal symbol in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in Figure 45) that drives the opening and closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special symbol start port (variable) 231 to keep the blade member 2311 in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and sets information indicating the opening period in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal pattern state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the blade open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in Figure 45) used to drive the opening and closing of the blade member 2311 of the first special pattern starting port (variable) 231 provided in the attacker unit 23 to maintain the blade member 2311 in a closed state for the specified closed period (for example, 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the blade closed time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that begins when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a loss, as described below, the normal map loss flag is turned on. If this normal map loss flag is on, the normal map status update process that occurs when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a regular map-related lottery process is performed. In this regular map-related lottery process, when the opening and closing control of the regular map variable game and the first special map start port (variable) 231 is not being performed (the regular map state is inactive), and the number of reserved regular map variable games is one or more, a win determination is made to determine whether the result of the regular map variable game is a win or a loss by random number lottery based on the regular map winning random number value stored in the random number value memory area. If a win is determined, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If a loss is determined, the win flag is set to OFF. Regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is obtained as the regular map timer random number value, and one time for displaying the regular map on the regular map display device 210 is selected from multiple variation times based on the obtained regular map timer random number value. This variation display time is stored as the regular map variation display time in the regular map variation time memory area provided in RAM 308. The number of reserved normal variable games is stored in a reserved normal game number storage area provided in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved normal variable games minus 1 is stored again in this reserved normal game number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special symbol pre-reading process (step S224) is executed. In the special symbol pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information in each of special symbols 1 and 2, pre-determines the stop symbol and change time before the hit/miss determination process, and stores the pre-determination result (special symbol pre-reading result) in the pre-reading result storage unit in RAM 308.

Next, special chart status update processing is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. First, special chart status update processing (special chart 2 status update processing) is performed for special chart 2 (step S225). In this special chart 2 status update processing, one of the following multiple processes is performed depending on the status of special chart 2.

For example, during the special symbol 2 status update process when the special symbol 2 variable display is in progress (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or greater), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off certain of the eight LEDs that make up the special symbol 2 display device 214. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 variable play). In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends. In addition, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number storage unit provided in RAM 308 is 1 or greater, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 10R jackpot flag, a 6R jackpot flag, a small jackpot flag, a miss flag, a special symbol probability change flag, and a regular symbol probability change flag. These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stopping symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process described below. In the special chart 2 state update process, which starts when the special chart 2 variation display time has elapsed (when the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 10R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is also on, and the normal chart probability variation flag is off, the display will be special chart c as shown in Figure 46 (b); when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is also on, and the normal chart probability variation flag is off, the display will be special chart b; when the 6R jackpot flag is on, the special chart probability variation flag is off, and the normal chart probability variation flag is on, the display will be special chart a; when the small hit flag is on, the display will be special chart d; and when the miss flag is on, the display will be special chart e, and a setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that the special chart 2 is currently being displayed. By performing this control, the special symbol 2 display device 214 displays one of the following symbols: 10R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol e), 6R probability variable jackpot symbol (special symbol b), 6R normal jackpot symbol (special symbol a), small jackpot symbol (special symbol d), and losing symbol (special symbol e). In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, which is a simultaneous variable machine, the special symbol 1 variable display may be performed during the variable display of the special symbol 2. However, if the winning symbol is displayed when the special symbol 2 variable display time has elapsed, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol 1, the lottery result will be discarded in the special symbol 1 at the time of the display of the winning symbol of the special symbol 2, and the losing symbol will be displayed. Additionally, if the special chart 1 variation display is being performed while the special chart 2 variation display is in progress, and the small win symbol is displayed stationary when the special chart 2 variation display time has elapsed, the progression of the special chart 1 variation display time will be interrupted when the special chart 2 small win symbol is displayed, and as a result, the time from when the special chart 1 variation display begins to when the special chart 1 symbol is displayed stationary will be extended by the time from when the special chart 2 small win symbol is displayed stationary to the end of the small win game.

Furthermore, to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (e.g., 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 stop time management timer provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the fixedly displayed special chart 2 is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the special chart 2 variable play is notified to the player. Furthermore, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times memory section provided in RAM 308 is 0 and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during jackpot play (special play state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern that will stop the variable display is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described below, before terminating the process.

Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol 2 variable play is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on, as described below. When this jackpot flag is on, the special symbol 2 status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) sets the special symbol 2 in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and sets information indicating the winning presentation period in the memory area of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for the specified winning presentation period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot has begun by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Furthermore, specified transmission information indicating that the winning presentation setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special symbol 2 status update process, which begins when the specified winning presentation period ends (when the value of the special symbol 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 45) that drives the opening and closing of the first door element 2341 of the first variable winning opening 234 to keep the first door element 2341 in an open state (retracted state) for the specified opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until the entry of a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) into the first variable winning opening 234 is detected), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door open time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information memory area described above.

In addition, the special chart 2 state update process, which begins when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid (part of the various solenoids 332 shown in Figure 45) that drives the opening and closing of the first door element 2341 of the first variable prize opening 234 for the specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds) to keep the first door element 2341 in a closed state (advanced state), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the special prize opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information memory area.

Furthermore, the door element opening/closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (10 rounds or 6 rounds in this example), and the special symbol 2 state update process begins when the control ends. To set the process to wait for a predetermined end effect period (e.g., 3 seconds), i.e., the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot has ended is displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, information indicating the effect wait period is set in the memory area of the effect wait time management timer provided in RAM 308. Furthermore, if the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag is set on, a time-saving count (e.g., 50 times) is set in the time-saving count memory section provided in RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag is set off, the time-saving count is not set in the time-saving count memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on. Furthermore, if the special symbol probability fluctuation flag is set on, a probability variable flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game.

The term "time-saving" here refers to the pachinko machine entering a state advantageous to the player by shortening the time between the end of a jackpot in special variable play and the start of the next jackpot. When the time-saving flag is set to on, the machine is in a high-probability normal play state (normal probability change). In a high-probability normal play state, the probability of winning is higher in normal variable play than in a low-probability normal play state. Furthermore, in a high-probability normal play state, the variable time of normal variable play is shorter than in a low-probability normal play state (short-probability normal play). Furthermore, in a high-probability normal play state, the opening time of the blade members 2311 of the special variable play hole 231 tends to be longer per opening (extended electric chute opening) than in a low-probability normal play state. Additionally, in a high-probability normal play state, the blade members 2311 tend to open more than in a low-probability normal play state. The state in which any of these is set is called an electric support state (electric tulip support for winning the starting hole).

As mentioned above, the time-saving flag is set to OFF during jackpot play (special play state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during jackpot play. This is to solve the problem that if the normal high probability state is in effect during jackpot play, many game balls will enter the special game 1 starting port (variable) 231 before a predetermined number of game balls enter the first variable winning port 234 during jackpot play, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot (number of balls dispensed), which increases the risk of gambling. Note that in this embodiment, the number of prize balls for a prize that enters the special game 1 starting port (variable) 231 is "1," so the number of balls dispensed during jackpot play does not actually increase, and the time-saving flag may remain ON even during jackpot play.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), specified transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

In addition, the special chart 2 status update process, which begins when the specified end effect period ends (when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308.

The above describes an example of a big win game using the first variable winning slot 234, but the same applies to a small win game using the second variable winning slot 235.

Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable play is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. If this loss flag is on, the special chart 2 status update process at the timing when the above-mentioned specified stop display period ends (when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 inactive in the setting area of RAM 308. When the special chart 2 status update process is in the case where the special chart 2 is inactive, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, special chart status update processing (special chart 1 status update processing) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update processing, the processes described in the special chart 2 status update processing above are performed depending on the state of special chart 1. The processes performed in this special chart 1 status update processing are the same as the processes described in the special chart 2 status update processing above, with "special chart 2" replaced with "special chart 1", so their explanation is omitted. Note that the order of the special chart 2 status update processing and the special chart 1 status update processing may be reversed.

Once the special chart status update processing in steps S225 and S227 is completed, special chart-related lottery processing is then performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. The special chart 2-related lottery processing (step S229) is executed using the earliest special chart 2 winning random number value and special chart 2 random number value in the special chart 2 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that special chart 2 variable play is not being performed, special chart 2 is in an inactive state, neither special chart 1 nor special chart 2 is in a jackpot play, and the number of reserved special chart 2 variable play games is one or more. The special chart 1-related lottery processing is executed using the earliest special chart 1 winning random number value and special chart 1 random number value in the special chart 1 random number value storage area, with the starting conditions being that special chart 1 variable play is not being performed, special chart 1 is in an inactive state, neither special chart 1 nor special chart 2 is in a jackpot play, and the number of reserved special chart 1 variable play games is one or more. In other words, in this embodiment, special chart 1 can start variable play regardless of whether special chart 2 is in variable play or not, and special chart 2 is configured to be able to start variable play regardless of whether special chart 1 is in variable play or not (simultaneous variable play machine).

The results of the decorative pattern display device 208's judgment on whether or not a special symbol variable game has been won are notified by the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, in the special variable state, notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 takes priority over notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231. In the normal game state and the time-saving state, notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special symbol 1 starting port (variable) 231 takes priority over notification of the lottery results based on winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232. However, if the result of the lottery for the special chart 1 variable play in the special variable state is a jackpot, the lottery result based on winning at the special chart 2 starting port 232 may be announced in parallel with the announcement of the lottery result based on winning at the special chart 2 starting port 232, or the announcement of the lottery result based on winning at the special chart 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 may be announced after temporarily suspending the announcement of the lottery result based on winning at the special chart 2 starting port 232. Furthermore, if the result of the lottery for special chart 2 variable play in normal play mode or time-saving mode is a jackpot, the lottery result based on winning at special chart 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 may be notified in parallel, or the notification of the lottery result based on winning at special chart 1 starting port (fixed) 230 and special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 may be interrupted and the notification of the lottery result based on winning at special chart 2 starting port 232 may be carried out.

In the case of the special chart 2-related lottery processing in step S229, the main control unit 300 acquires the special chart 2 start information (a set of the special chart 2 winning random number and the special chart 2 random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) reserved position in the special chart 2 random number storage area, and determines whether it will be a big win, a small win, or a miss (win/lose determination) using the win/lose determination table stored in ROM 306 based on the special chart 2 winning random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the value of the special chart probability change flag in RAM 308. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the pattern (stop pattern) to be displayed after the special chart 2 changes, using the special chart determination table stored in ROM 306, based on the special chart 2 random number value in the acquired special chart 2 start information and the determined win/lose determination result. Next, the main control unit 300 determines the variable display time (timer number) for the special symbol 2 using various tables stored in ROM 306, based on, for example, the result of the hit/miss judgment, the stopped symbol, the number of special symbols 2 reserved at the time of the hit/miss judgment, and the acquired random number value for determining the special symbol variable time.

After retrieving the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special chart 2 start information from the special chart 2 random number value storage area and subtracts 1 from the special chart 2 reserved number storage area. At this time, the special chart 2 start information retrieved from the special chart 2 random number value storage area may be stored in a temporary area provided in RAM 308, and the above-mentioned decision may be made based on the special chart 2 start information stored in this temporary area.

After the above-described special drawing 2-related lottery process (step S229), the special drawing 1-related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special drawing 1-related lottery process and the special drawing 2-related lottery process may be reversed.

In the above explanation, the special symbol status update process and special symbol-related lottery process are performed independently for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, respectively, allowing multiple special symbols to change simultaneously. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not perform lottery processing or variable play for the reserved special symbol depending on the state of one special symbol. In this embodiment, as described below, when multiple special symbols are changed simultaneously, in the normal play state and the time-saving state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays effects matching the variable display of special symbol 1, but does not display effects for the variable display of special symbol 2. In the probability variable state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays effects matching the variable display of special symbol 2, but does not display effects for the variable display of special symbol 1. However, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be provided with multiple areas for displaying the lottery results for each special symbol, or multiple decorative symbol display devices may be provided for displaying the lottery results for each special symbol, and each lottery result may be displayed separately. Additionally, when changes are being made to multiple special charts at the same time, the lottery results for the special chart that stopped changing first may affect the lottery results for the special chart that stops changing later.

In step S233, which follows step S231, a command setting and transmission process is performed. In this command setting and transmission process, various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this example, basic command, prize entry command, ball out command, launch position command, special chart change start command, special chart change stop command, special chart stop type command (a command sent when special chart 1 and special chart 2 start changing, specifying whether special chart 1 or special chart 2 will stop first), special chart win start command, special chart win end command, jackpot win gate open command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, pre-read result information command, setting command, or other information that can identify the type of command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. Furthermore, if the command type is a special chart variation start command, the command data includes information indicating various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, loss flags, and the timer number selected in the special chart-related lottery process. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the special chart variation start command is set, stopping symbol information that can identify the stopping symbol is included. In the case of a special chart variation stop command, the data includes the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags, while in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the data includes the number of jackpot rounds. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special chart 1 starting port (fixed) 230, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the special chart 2 starting port 232, whether or not a prize has been awarded at the first variable prize winning port 234, and whether or not a prize has been awarded at the second variable prize winning port 235. In the case of a look-ahead result information command, the command data includes information such as the types of special chart 1 and special chart 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area, and the stopping symbols stored in the look-ahead result storage unit. In the case of a setting command, it also includes setting information.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc., is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various jackpot flags, small jackpot flags, and loss flags stored in RAM 308, etc., is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, sub LCD display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned ending effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, sub LCD display device 207, various lamps (442, 452), and speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information stored in RAM 308 indicating the number of jackpot rounds, the number of reserved special symbol 1 variable games or special symbol 2 variable games, etc. In the process of transmitting the jackpot closure settings described above, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in RAM 308, the number of reserved special chart 1 variable games or special chart 2 variable games, etc.

In addition, step S233 also performs a general command special drawing reserve increase process. In this general command special drawing reserve increase process, the command data is set with special drawing identification information (information indicating special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308.

The first sub-control unit 400 can determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and can also determine the presentation control content based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, which follows step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in RAM 308 is output via the information output circuit 336 to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100.

In step S237, the next step after step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal status of various sensors stored in the signal status memory area in step S205 is read to monitor for the presence or absence of specified errors, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error. If a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or a ball storage tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-controller 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the first special symbol start port (variable) 231, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235, and display data output to the normal symbol display device 210, special symbol 1 display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, etc. via drive circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of I/O 310.

In step S239, which follows step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243; if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process then returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in Figure 47. Meanwhile, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers used to restore the state at the time of power interruption when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power interruption processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the system then enters a HALT state.

Next, the determination tables used in the regular drawing lottery process (step S223), the special drawing 2 lottery process (step S229), and the special drawing 1 lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 will be explained with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49(a) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the regular drawing pass/fail determination table, FIG. 49(b) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing 1/2 pass/fail determination table, and FIG. 49(c) is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the special drawing determination allocation table.

The normal winning/losing determination table shown in Figure 49(a) is a winning/losing determination table for normal winning/losing games used when determining whether a normal winning/losing game is a winning/losing game. This table is stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in Figure 49(a), when this winning/losing determination table is used, in the low probability state of normal winning, there are no winning values, i.e., the winning probability is 0%, and in the high probability state of normal winning, the possible range of the random number is 0 to 65535, and the winning values are 0 to 65535. In other words, the winning probability is 65536/65536 (i.e., 100%). In the low probability state of normal winning (when the time-saving function is not activated), there may be a certain probability (e.g., 1%) of winning, and in the high probability state of normal winning (when the time-saving function is activated), there may be a certain probability (e.g., 1%) of losing.

The table for determining whether special charts 1 and 2 are correct or incorrect, shown in Figure 49 (b), is a table referenced when determining whether special charts 1 and 2 are correct or incorrect. The record to be referenced is selected depending on whether the setting is 1 to 6, and whether the special chart is in a low probability state or a high probability state. This table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 1, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 329/65536 (approximately 1/200) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 330/65536 (approximately 1/199) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 2, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 341/65536 (approximately 1/193) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 342/65536 (approximately 1/192) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 3, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 363/65536 (approximately 1/181) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 364/65536 (approximately 1/180) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 4, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 375/65536 (approximately 1/175) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 377/65536 (approximately 1/174) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 5, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 451/65536 (approximately 1/146) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 452/65536 (approximately 1/145) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In the low probability state of special charts in setting 6, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 701/65536 (approximately 1/94) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2. In the high probability state of special charts, a jackpot is selected with a probability of 703/65536 (approximately 1/93) as a result of the success/failure judgment of the jackpot lottery for special charts 1 and 2.

In addition, regardless of whether the setting is 1-6, or whether the special chart is in a high probability state or a low probability state, the result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 will be a small jackpot with 12 openings and closings with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10), and the result of the jackpot lottery for special chart 1 will be a small jackpot with 1 opening and closing with a probability of 6580/65536 (approximately 1/10). It is also possible to prevent small jackpots from occurring on special chart 1, and have small jackpots (small jackpots with 12 openings and small jackpots with 1 opening and closing) occur only on special chart 2. The probability of a small jackpot may also be made different for each setting.

In this embodiment, in all settings 1 to 6, the probability of a jackpot in the special chart high probability state is slightly higher than the probability of a jackpot in the special chart low probability state, but the settings are such that the probabilities can be considered almost the same. Also, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting, with the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a jackpot, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a jackpot. Therefore, the lower the setting, the harder it is to win a jackpot, but when the game transitions to the special chart state, there is a tendency for small jackpots to occur more frequently than with a high setting, which may allow for different gameplay characteristics.

In this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set to be almost the same in both the high-probability special symbol state and the low-probability special symbol state in both settings. However, a major difference is the display time of the special symbol 2. In this embodiment, the display time of the special symbol 2 in the high-probability special symbol state is selected to be, for example, 1 to 5 seconds. In the high-probability special symbol state, when a right-handed hit is made, a large number of game balls are more likely to enter the second special symbol start port 232, allowing for multiple display of the special symbol 2, resulting in a higher frequency of small jackpots. In this embodiment, the high-probability special symbol state can be considered a state in which the frequency of small jackpots increases, and is therefore sometimes referred to as a "small jackpot rush." Furthermore, when there are four (full) display of the reserved special symbol 2 symbols, it takes longer to consume one display of the special symbol 1 symbol than to consume all of the display of the special symbol 2 symbol symbols, making it less likely that a jackpot will occur on the special symbol 1. On the other hand, the fluctuation time of Special Chart 2 in the low probability state of Special Chart is set to, for example, 580 seconds. Therefore, in the low probability state of Special Chart, if you hit from the right, the frequency of the ball entering the Special Chart 2 starting hole 232 and the probability of a small win will not change, but since it will take approximately 10 minutes for the results of the Special Chart 2 fluctuation display to be displayed, hitting from the right will effectively be disadvantageous to the player. Note that in the low probability state of Special Chart, the fluctuation time of Special Chart 2 is set to 580 seconds for misses and small wins, but the fluctuation time for a big win is shorter, set to, for example, 227 seconds.

Figure 49 (c) shows an example of a distribution table for determining special symbols, which determines the stopping symbol based on the result of the hit/miss judgment for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 as described above. This table is also stored in ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This distribution table for determining special symbols specifies a random number range corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern of the special symbol (see Figures 46 (a) and (b)) for each hit/miss judgment result.

First, if the result of the Special Chart 1 hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, one of "Special Chart A" and "Special Chart B" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special Chart A" is a 6R normal jackpot in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and "Special Chart B" is a 6R special jackpot in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens. The selection rate for each is 1/2 regardless of the setting.

Furthermore, if the result of the Special Chart 1 hit/miss judgment is a small hit, "Special Chart C" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special Chart C" is a small hit in which the second variable winning port 235 repeatedly opens shortly up to 12 times.

Next, if the result of the Special Chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, one of "Special Chart a" to "Special Chart c" will be selected. As mentioned above, "Special Chart a" is a 6R normal jackpot in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens, "Special Chart b" is a 6R special jackpot in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens, and "Special Chart c" is a 10R special jackpot in which the first variable winning slot 234 opens. Regardless of the setting, the selection rate for each is 60/100 for "Special Chart a," 5/100 for "Special Chart b," and 35/100 for "Special Chart c."

Also, if the result of the Special Chart 2 hit/miss judgment is a small hit, "Special Chart D" is selected. As mentioned above, "Special Chart D" is a small hit in which the second variable winning port 235 opens once.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. Figure 50 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S301 of Figure 50 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S301. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM 408.

In step S303, which follows step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S307, which follows step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S309, which follows step S307, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S307, processing such as reading performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is performed.

In step S311, which follows step S309, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control processing, operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190 is detected, and processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 190, depending on the detection result.

In step S313, the step following step S311, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command to the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S315, which follows step S313, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control processing, if the effect data read in step S309 contains commands for the various lamps 442, 452, these commands are output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table frame lamp drive circuit 450. In this way, light emission control is performed for the button lamp 138 that illuminates the effect button 136, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, the light-emitting unit 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7, and the light-emitting diode (not shown) located on the attacca unit 23.

In step S317, which follows step S315, movable body control processing is performed. For example, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the first movable performance body 7 at the top shown in Figure 44(a) or the second movable performance body 8 located on the right, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S319, the next step after step S317, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission processing, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command. Then, processing returns to step S303.

Figure 50 (b) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Figure 50 (c) is a flowchart of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined period. In step S341 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S343, the next step after step S341, the control command set in the information transmission process (step S319) of the first sub-control unit main processing is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and other processes such as updating random number values for performance are performed.

Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. Figure 51 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S401 of Figure 51 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization processing is first performed in step S401. This initialization processing includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization processing of the memory area in RAM (not shown).

In step S403, which follows step S401, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, the timer variable is assigned a value of 0.

In step S407, which follows step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S409, which follows step S407, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S407, processing such as reading the performance data corresponding to this command (performance data displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and performance data displayed on the sub LCD display device 207) from ROM (not shown) is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

In step S411, the step following step S409, image control processing is performed. In the image control processing, if the performance data read in step S409 contains a command to the VDP 516, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Then, processing returns to step S403.

Figure 51 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM.

Figure 51 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt triggers the execution of timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S441 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM described in step S403 of the second sub-control unit main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S443, which follows step S441, other processing such as updating random number values for presentation purposes is performed.

Figure 51(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing in step S411 of the second sub-control unit main processing. In step S451, an instruction is issued to transfer image data (movie data and texture data, described below). Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of frame buffer 1 and frame buffer 2 in VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 or the sub-LCD display device 207. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address in ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the destination address in VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S453, which follows step S451, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S453: Yes), the process proceeds to step S455; if not (step S453: No), the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S455, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on image data information (such as VRAM 518 coordinate axes, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) that constitutes the display image in order to form a display image in frame buffer 1 or 2 of VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 518 in step S451. The VDP 516 sets parameters in accordance with the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S457, the next step after step S455, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S459, the step following step S457, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the completion of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input (step S459: Yes), the process proceeds to step S461; if not (step S459: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S461, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and processing ends.

Next, the specific configuration of the reel ratio/setting display 196 and the dip switch board 198 will be explained with reference to Figure 52. Here, Figure 52(A) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the reel ratio/setting display 196, and Figure 52(B) is a diagram showing an example of the specific configuration of the dip switch board 198.

As described above, the reel ratio/setting display 196 is composed of a reel ratio monitor and a setting monitor. The reel ratio monitor displays the continuous reel ratio (RY) and reel ratio (YH), and the setting monitor displays the current setting value.

Here, the consecutive feature ratio refers to the proportion of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature when the feature is activated consecutively (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the first variable winning opening 234 opening and winning during a jackpot game). It may also be the proportion of the number of game balls acquired as a result of winning in the first variable winning opening 234 to the number of out balls. Furthermore, the feature ratio refers to the proportion of the number of game balls acquired (i.e., safe balls) that are due to the operation of the feature (i.e., the number of game balls acquired as a result of the first special chart start opening (variable) 231, the first variable winning opening 234, and the second variable winning opening 235 opening and winning). It may also be the ratio of the number of game balls acquired by winning through the first variable winning opening 234, the second variable winning opening 235, the first special symbol starting opening (fixed) 230, the first special symbol starting opening (variable) 231, the second special symbol starting opening 232, and the general winning opening to the number of balls that have been released.

In this embodiment, if the calculation of the consecutive feature ratio determines that the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the consecutive feature ratio flashes, and then a security signal (RY) is output. Here, the security signal (RY) is an error signal that is output when the consecutive feature ratio exceeds 60%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336. It may also be output from a test terminal that can be mounted on the main board 156. This may allow the gaming machine's type application test to be carried out smoothly.

Furthermore, if the calculated ratio of the reel is determined to be greater than 70%, the two-digit 7-segment LED that displays the ratio of the reel is caused to flash, and then a security signal (YH) is output. Here, the security signal (YH) is an error signal that is output when the ratio of the reel exceeds 70%, and is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

In this embodiment, when the continuous feature ratio or feature ratio exceeds the upper limit of the normal value, a specific 7-segment LED is made to flash, but for example, the light color may also be changed.

As shown in Figure 52 (B), eight dip switches are arranged on the dip switch board 198. Each dip switch is connected to the first sub-board 160, and when the power is turned on, the position of each dip switch is read, allowing the probability of an effect occurring to be changed. For example, it is possible to set the frequency with which setting suggestions are executed, the probability of previews appearing, the probability of entering an effect mode, etc.

In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the attack of the second variable winning opening 235 is not opened during a big win game, but is opened only during a small win game. However, a big win in which the attack of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened may also be prepared. For example, as a big win for Special Chart 2, a 3R big win (effectively a 1R big win) or a 6R big win may be prepared in which the attack of the second variable winning opening 235 is opened instead of the attack of the first variable winning opening 234.

Furthermore, while small wins are available on both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, small wins may be provided only on Special Chart 2. In other words, only on Special Chart 2, a small win in which the second variable winning port 235 repeatedly short-opens a maximum of a certain number of times (for example, 12 times) and a small win in which it short-opens only once may be provided. By doing this, when the special chart has a high probability and the normal chart has a low probability, if the special chart 1 starting port (variable) 231 does not enter a winning-friendly state, and the attacker of the first variable winning port 234 is in a winning-difficult state and the attacker of the second variable winning port 235 is also in a winning-difficult state, most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the second special chart starting port 232, allowing a jackpot or small win to be obtained in Special Chart 2 variable play. In particular, because the probability of winning a small win is higher (for example, approximately 10 times higher) than the probability of winning a big win, it is easier to win a small win in which the second variable winning slot 235 repeatedly opens for a maximum of a certain number of short periods (for example, 12 times), and it is expected that you will earn balls through this small win game.

Next, we will explain a specific example of the effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 42.

Figure 53 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a presentation centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine shown in Figure 42.

Figure 53 shows the decorative pattern display device 208. Note that the first special pattern display device 212, second special pattern display device 214, normal pattern display device 210, special pattern 1 reserve lamp 218, special pattern 2 reserve lamp 220, and normal pattern reserve lamp 216 are not shown (the same applies to the example shown in Figure 60).

Figure 53 also shows a star-shaped effect lamp 206, one of the game board lamps 442.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53(a) also displays a static decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7." Note that the background here is a plain white background, but a default background image is displayed. In the following explanation, when the background is a plain white background, the default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Note that various background images different from the default background image (for example, background images according to the mode) may also be displayed. Also, a miniature pattern is displayed in the upper left of the display area, and the variable and static display is performed in accordance with the decorative pattern displayed large in the center of the display screen.

The decorative pattern display device 208 has a fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 is an area for reporting whether the pattern is changing (or the pattern is stopped) and for reporting the number of reserved balls, with a special pattern 1 pending number display area provided in the upper left of the display area and a special pattern 2 pending number display area provided in the lower left. Furthermore, a special pattern 1 pending number change notification area is provided in the upper right of the display area, and a special pattern 2 pending number change notification area is provided in the lower right. A regular pattern pending number change notification area and a regular pattern pending number display area may also be provided. The numerical value shown in the special pattern 1 pending number display area is aligned with the pending number indicated by the special pattern 1 pending lamp 218, and the numerical value shown in the special pattern 2 pending number display area is aligned with the pending number indicated by the special pattern 2 pending lamp 220. Additionally, in the special symbol 1 symbol change notification area, while the special symbol 1 symbol is stopped, the display will change depending on the result. For example, if it's a big win, a "○" will be displayed, if it's a small win, a "△" will be displayed, and if it's a miss, an "X" will be displayed. Also, while the special symbol 1 symbol is changing, a "-" will flash, allowing you to recognize that the special symbol 1 symbol is changing. The display in the special symbol 2 symbol change display area is similar to the display in the special symbol 1 symbol change display area, and the display mode changes in response to the special symbol 2 symbol change and stop display. Note that by changing the display mode, lighting mode, or flashing mode of the fourth symbol, or by changing the display mode of the numbers displayed in the reserved number display area, advance notices or warnings regarding the ongoing symbol change display may be given. The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 described above is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 60.

The decorative pattern display device 208 also has a variable icon display area 280 at the bottom center of the effect display area 208d. The variable icon display area 280 displays a variable icon corresponding to the currently occurring pattern change.

Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 53 is the normal game state (special symbol low probability, normal symbol low probability state). In this normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a special symbol 1 reserved icon display area 281 to the left of the variable icon display area 280 (the same as the example shown in Figure 60). Note that in the normal game state, the decorative symbol display device 208 does not explicitly show the special symbol 2 reserved icon display area, but a special symbol 2 reserved icon display area may be provided.

The reserve icon display area 281 for special chart 1 displays reserve icons representing reserves for special chart 1. The number of reserves for special chart 1 is represented by the number of lit reserve lamps 218 for special chart 1 and the number shown in the reserve number display area for special chart 1, as well as the number of reserve icons for special chart 1. The number of reserves for special chart 2 is represented by the number of lit reserve lamps 220 for special chart 2 and the number shown in the reserve number display area for special chart 2. It may also be represented by the number of reserve icons for special chart 2. In other words, the reserve icons correspond to the start information stored in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the reserve icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as the first reserve icon, the reserve icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as the second reserve icon, and so on. In the reserve icon display area 281 for special chart 1, reserve icons are displayed side by side, with the hold icons on the right being the ones with the oldest winnings.

In Figure 53 (a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode (normal display mode).

Figure 54 shows the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 42. All of the hold icons shown in Figure 54 are round, but they may deform from this round shape, for example, into a character icon.

Figure 54 (a) shows a hold icon in display mode A (default display mode). Display mode A (default display mode) is a plain, white display mode. In the drawing, the white color is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the left. The hold icon indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the advance preview depending on the display mode. In other words, it indicates the expected probability of a jackpot in the pattern change display that occurs when the hold represented by the hold icon is consumed. Display mode A (default display mode) indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%. However, it may also be possible to indicate that the expected probability of a jackpot is 0%. Alternatively, the default display mode may not indicate the expected probability of a jackpot at all.

Figure 54 (b) shows a hold icon in display mode B. Display mode B is a plain, green display mode. In the drawing, the green color is represented by hatching pointing diagonally downward to the right. This display mode B indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%.

Figure 54 (c) shows a hold icon in display mode C. Display mode C is a patternless, red display mode. In the drawing, the red color is represented by diagonal cross-hatching. This display mode C indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%.

Figure 54 (d) shows a hold icon in display mode D. Display mode D is a display mode consisting of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background. Note that yellow is represented by vertical hatching in the drawing. This display mode D is a display mode that symbolizes the pachinko machine manufacturer (company) that produced the pachinko machine 100 shown in Figure 42. In other words, this second display mode is a display mode that many players will associate with a specific pachinko machine manufacturer, and can be said to be a display mode that allows the pachinko machine manufacturer to be recognized. In other words, it is a display mode that is well-known for being used by a specific pachinko machine manufacturer. It can also be said to be a display mode unique to a pachinko machine manufacturer, or, if the pachinko machine manufacturer is the same, a display mode in which the same manufacturer pattern is commonly used across multiple models. This second display mode is called a manufacturer pattern. Manufacturer patterns include animal patterns such as animal prints, floral and fruit patterns, fireworks patterns, striped patterns, checkered patterns, and other geometric patterns, as well as repeating patterns with multiple structural elements arranged regularly (or irregularly). Because manufacturer patterns are patterns expressed using multiple colors, they are broadly considered to be included in the term "color." A single color may symbolize the pachinko machine manufacturer, in which case it becomes the manufacturer's color. This second display mode indicates a 75% chance of winning. In addition to the pachinko machine manufacturer, the pattern may also be the pachinko machine distributor (company), or even the machine model (machine model pattern) instead of the manufacturer.

Figure 54 (e) shows a hold icon in display mode E. Display mode E is a rainbow-colored display mode. This rainbow color may be a mode in which the display color changes continuously one color at a time to display each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple), but here it refers to a mode in which all seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed at once, dividing the display area. In the drawing, this rainbow color is represented by vertical and horizontal cross-hatching. This display mode E suggests that the probability of a jackpot is 100%. In other words, it suggests that a jackpot is confirmed.

In addition, a display mode F may be provided that is patternless and gold, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

The five display modes described above appear less frequently the higher the likelihood of a jackpot, but display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear less frequently than display mode E (rainbow color). In other words, the hold icon for display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may appear least frequently.

In addition, the five display modes shown in Figure 54 are also used for the variable icons that change the pending icon, and function as a preview (normal preview) of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to that variable icon.

Furthermore, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 located directly below the first special chart start port (fixed) 230 can emit light in a lighting pattern that represents the display pattern of the hold icon and variable icon.

The right side of Figure 54 shows the light-emitting modes of the star-shaped effect lamp 206. The effect lamp 206 can emit light in light-emitting mode A (white light-emitting mode), which represents display mode A (default display mode) of the hold icon and variable icon. The effect lamp 206 can also emit light in light-emitting mode B (green light-emitting mode), which represents display mode B (green display mode) of the hold icon and variable icon. The effect lamp 206 can also emit light in light-emitting mode C (red light-emitting mode), which represents display mode C (red display mode) of the hold icon and variable icon. The effect lamp 206 can also emit light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow light-emitting mode), which represents display mode E (rainbow display mode) of the hold icon and variable icon. The rainbow light-emitting mode of the effect lamp 206 is a mode in which the seven colors that make up the rainbow are illuminated at once, separating the light-emitting areas. These light-emitting modes also indicate the expected probability of a jackpot, just like the display modes of the hold icon and variable icon.

Strictly speaking, the colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, i.e., the colors of the hold icon and variable icon, and the light color of the performance lamp 206 will be different shades of color due to the different display media, but the two colors will be described as being within the same or similar range.

On the other hand, the effect lamp 206 does not have an illumination pattern that represents the second display pattern (manufacturer pattern) of the hold icon and variable icon, and the effect lamp 206 does not emit light in an illumination pattern that is the same as or similar to the manufacturer pattern.

In addition, a gold light-emitting mode may be provided as light-emitting mode E, indicating that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

In addition, other displays on the decorative pattern display device 208 (for example, background display of the title, etc.) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in FIG. 54. In other displays, the display mode may also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, or the display mode in other displays may be unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, the display on the sub-LCD display device 207 (for example, the lord's kimono, etc.) may also be displayed using the display mode shown in Figure 54, excluding the second display mode (maker pattern). The display on the sub-LCD display device 207 may also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, or it may be unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, lamps other than the effect lamp 206 (such as the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. 45) can also emit light in light-emitting modes that represent other display modes excluding the second display mode. For example, the light-emitting unit 71 provided on the first effect movable body 7 or the unillustrated light-emitting diodes located on the attacca unit 23 can emit white, green, red, and rainbow colors. The rainbow colors can be displayed by simultaneously illuminating each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow, or by continuously changing the illuminating color one by one to illuminate each of the seven colors that make up the rainbow. This type of rainbow-colored change in illumination can also be achieved as the illumination mode D of the effect lamp 206. The illumination modes of lamps other than the effect lamp 206 can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, similar to the display modes of the hold icon and variable icon, or the illumination mode of lamps other than the effect lamp 206 can be an illumination mode unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot.

Furthermore, except for display mode D (manufacturer pattern) and display mode E (rainbow colors), it is also used as the color of the decorative body.

Figure 55 shows the decorative elements provided on the second performance movable body 8.

In the second performance movable body 8, which resembles a human right arm, the four fingers, excluding the fifth finger (pinky finger), are decorative. All four fingers are difficult to see when bent, but when extended, the decoration on the palm side becomes visible.

Figure 55(a) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the forearm 82 raised and the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 extended. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 55(a), decoration A (white) is applied to the palm side of the fourth finger 824. In other words, it is painted white.

Figure 55(b) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the forearm 82 raised and the third finger (middle finger) 823 extended. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 55(b), decoration B (green) is applied to the palm side of the third finger 823. In other words, it is painted green.

Figure 55(c) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the forearm 82 raised and the second finger (index finger) 822 extended. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 55(c), decoration C (red) is applied to the palm side of the second finger 822. In other words, it is painted red.

Figure 55(d) shows the second performance movable body 8 with the forearm 82 raised and the first finger (thumb) 821 extended. In the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 55(d), decoration D (gold) is applied to the palm side of the first finger 821. In other words, it is painted gold.

In addition, in the second performance movable body 8, there is no decoration on the palm side of the fifth finger (little finger) 825.

Note that, strictly speaking, the color displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the color of the decorative body are different shades due to the different display media, but these colors will be described as being within the same or similar range.

Furthermore, each decoration on the second performance movable body 8 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, just like the hold icon and variable icon. Therefore, when the fourth finger (ring finger) 824 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 5%, when the third finger (middle finger) 823 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 25%, when the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 50%, and when the first finger (thumb) 821 is extended, it indicates that the expected probability of a jackpot is 70%.

On the other hand, there are no manufacturer-patterned or rainbow-colored decorations. Therefore, the decorations do not provide high-probability predictions with an expected jackpot rate of 75% or more.

Although the pending icon and variable icon indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, the likelihood value may be different from the pending icon and variable icon values. For example, decoration B (green) may be 30%, decoration C (red) may be 60%, and decoration D (gold) may be 90%.

Returning to Figure 53, in Figure (a) to make it easier to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of Special Chart 1, hold icons that are not actually displayed are also shown with dotted lines.

On the other hand, the value shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 2 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is 0, and there are no reserved symbols for special symbol 2. This is because, as mentioned above, the control state (game state) shown in Figure 53 is the normal game state (low probability of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol), and therefore the variable display time for special symbol 2 is extremely long (for example, 500 seconds) in most cases (in the case of a miss or a small win), making winning at the special symbol 2 start port 232 meaningless. In the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 in Figure 53, the value shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 2 remains 0, and the fourth symbol of special symbol 2 remains displayed as a stopped "X".

In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, the hold icon display area for the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, whichever is more likely to display a result, is displayed depending on the control state (game state). In other words, in this embodiment, when the control state is the normal game state or the electric support state (low probability of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol), the display result of special symbol 1 is more likely to be displayed, as described above, so as shown in FIG. 53(a), the hold icon display area 281 for special symbol 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and conversely, when the control state is the probability change state (high probability of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol), the hold icon display area for special symbol 2 is displayed.

Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Chart 2 is the same as the default display mode of the hold icon in Special Chart 1, but may be different.

In addition, the effect lamp 206 shown in Figure 53 (a) is lit in the default lighting mode (white lighting mode), which is the lighting mode that represents the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In this embodiment, the display of the special symbol pattern change begins in the following order: change begins on the special symbol display device → change begins on the fourth symbol pattern display → animation of the pending icon movement begins or disappears → change begins on the decorative symbol pattern, but this order may be reversed.

In Figure 53 (b), the display of the pattern change for special pattern 1 has begun. In other words, the pattern change has begun in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change for the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also begun, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change for the decorative pattern has also begun. The number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display has begun to flash for the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one place to the right, and reserved icon h11, which was previously the first reserved icon, is now displayed as variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280.

In Figure 53 (c), one ball enters the first special chart starting hole (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons for special chart 1 increases. This increased reserved icon is displayed in red (display mode C) at the display position of the second reserved icon h12, functioning as a preview. In synchronization with the start of display of the red reserved icon h12 (display mode C), an eighth note sound effect (appearance sound) is output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, in response to the increase in reserved icons represented by this red reserved icon h12 (display mode C), the star-shaped display lamp 206, which had previously been emitting light in the default light-emitting mode (white light-emitting mode), changes to light-emitting mode C (red light-emitting mode), which represents the display mode of the reserved icon h12 representing the increased reserved icon. In other words, the light-emitting mode of the display lamp 206 becomes a light-emitting mode in a color that is the same as or similar to the red of the reserved icon h12. The timing at which the red (display mode C) reserve icon h12 begins to display and the timing at which the star-shaped effect lamp 206 changes to light-emitting mode C may be simultaneous, or the reserve icon h12 may display earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may display earlier (the same applies to the examples up to FIG. 60). In the figure, the reserve icon h12 and the effect lamp 206 are depicted as being approximately the same size, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. For this reason, the effect lamp 206 is more noticeable than the reserve icon h12, and if the effect lamp 206 changes earlier, the player may be more likely to expect a jackpot, as indicated by the red color. Note that the number shown in the reserve number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserve number display area 284 has increased by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (d), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a frozen combination. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In Figure 53 (e), the display of the pattern change for Special Chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display begins flashing for the fourth pattern of Special Chart 1. The red reserved icon (display mode C) has moved one position and is now displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). In addition, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (f), the missing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen combination. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C (red light emission mode).

In Figure 53 (g), the hold represented by the red (display mode C) hold icon has been consumed, and the display of the pattern change for special chart 1 has begun. In other words, the decorative pattern is displaying a change, and the red (display mode C) hold icon is displayed as the red (display mode C) change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. In addition, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C. Note that the value shown in the hold number display area for special chart 1 in the fourth pattern/hold number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display has begun flashing for the fourth pattern of special chart 1.

In Figure 53(h), the decorative symbol variable display enters a reach state, and in Figure 53(i), the background image switches from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special symbol 1 reserved icon display area 281 disappear. That is, in Figure 53(i), the red (display mode C) variable icon h0 disappears, and in response to this disappearance of the variable icon h0, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 also goes out. In Figures 53 to 58, the state in which the effect lamp 206 is turned off is represented by a plain state without hatching. The timing at which the variable icon h0 disappears and the star-shaped effect lamp 206 go out may be simultaneous, or the variable icon h0 may go out earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may go out earlier (the same applies to the examples up to Figure 60). The fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Additionally, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the miniature pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In Figure 53(j), the game has progressed to a super reach (jii reach). The reach title LT1 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53(j). The reach title LT1 here is displayed with "jii reach" written in black letters on a green background. In this reach title LT1, the background color is the same as or similar to the green color used by the hold icon and decoration to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but as shown in Figure 61, the background color of the reach title LT1 for "jii reach" cannot be any color other than green. In other words, the type of background color of the reach title LT1 does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, and it can be said that the green color does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (k), an old man character appears, and then an animation of the old man character is displayed. Following the animation of the old man character, in the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (l), a depressed-looking old man character is displayed. In addition, the decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 3 - Decoration 4". Note that the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display variations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 53 (m), the display returns from the reduced size in the lower right to its original size, and decorative pattern combinations are displayed frozen in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c. Here, the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen in the combination of "434". In Figure 53 (m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is turned off in response to the non-display of the variable icon h0, remains in the off state until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, but may continue to emit light in light-emitting mode C until the game develops into a super reach (until the timing of Figure 53 (j)). Alternatively, it may continue to emit light in light-emitting mode C until the background display changes and the decorative pattern variable display displayed in a reduced size in the lower right corner begins to sway (until the timing of Figure 53 (l)). Furthermore, it may continue to emit light in light-emitting mode C until the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed (until the timing of Figure 53 (m)).

The example shown in Figure 53, which has been explained above, is an example in which the display mode of the hold icon and the light emission mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which is one of the game board lamps 442, are related.

Figure 56 shows a step-by-step example of a presentation in which the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the background when displaying the reach title are related.

Figure 56 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the performance lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 56(a) displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a static state.

In addition, in Figure 56(a), one special chart 1 hold icon h11 is displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and this special chart 1 hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode. In addition, the effect lamp 206 shown in Figure 56(a) is lit in the default light emission mode A (white light emission mode), which is the light emission mode that represents the display mode of the hold icon h11.

In Figure 56 (b), the display of the pattern change for special symbol 1 has begun. That is, the pattern change has begun in the first special symbol display device 212, and the display of the change for the fourth symbol and mini symbol has also begun. The movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change for the decorative symbol has also begun. The number shown in the reserved symbol number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved symbol number display area 284 changes from 1 to 0, and the "-" display has begun flashing for the fourth symbol of special symbol 1. In addition, the reserved symbol has shifted one position to the right, and reserved symbol h11, which had previously been the display position of the first reserved symbol, is now displayed as the variable symbol h0 in the variable symbol display area 280. When reserved symbol h11, which was in the default display mode, is displayed in the variable symbol display area 280, i.e., when it changes to variable symbol h0, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and variable symbol h0 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Variable symbol h0 that has changed to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) normally functions as a preview. In synchronization with the timing at which the variable icon h0 in display mode D (manufacturer pattern) starts to be displayed (timing at which the display mode changes), the speaker 120 outputs a sound effect (changing sound) represented by a quarter note. Also, the star-shaped effect lamp 206, which had previously been emitting light in the default light-emitting mode A (white light-emitting mode), has changed to light-emitting mode C (red light-emitting mode) in response to the appearance of the variable icon h0 in display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In other words, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode representing the display mode of the variable icon h0, and is not emitting light in a light-emitting mode with a pattern identical or similar to that of display mode D (manufacturer pattern). More specifically, the effect lamp 206 has changed to a light-emitting mode that suggests a lower expectation of a jackpot than that suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0. In addition, the effect lamp 206 may change to an illumination mode (illumination mode D (rainbow)) that suggests a higher probability of winning than the probability of winning suggested by the display mode D of the variable icon h0, or may be made to illuminate in a color that is not used in the reserved icon or variable icon, or may be made to illuminate in a different illumination mode even if it is a color that is used in the reserved icon or variable icon (for example, flashing red). In addition, the timing at which the variable icon h0 starts to display and the timing at which the effect lamp 206 changes may be simultaneous, or the variable icon h0 may be earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may be earlier (the same applies to the example shown in Figure 60). In the figure, the size of the variable icon h0 and the size of the effect lamp 206 are shown to be approximately the same as the reserved icon, but in reality, the effect lamp 206 is larger. For this reason, the effect lamp 206 is more noticeable than the variable icon h0, and if the timing of the change in the effect lamp 206 is faster, the player will first recognize the likelihood of a jackpot indicated by the red color, and then, by seeing the manufacturer pattern of the variable icon h0, their likelihood of a jackpot will increase even further. Furthermore, by not emitting light in a pattern that is the same as or similar to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), the rarity of manufacturer patterns with high expectations is increased, and the sense of expectation and exclusivity of the manufacturer pattern can be enhanced.

In Figure 56(c), the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, and in Figure 56(d), the background image switches from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 disappear. That is, in Figure 56(d), the variable icon h0 for display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is hidden, and in response to this variable icon h0 not being displayed, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 is also turned off. Note that the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 is displayed. Also, the decorative pattern variable displays that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have moved to the bottom right corner and are displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the mini pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In Figure 56(e), the game has progressed to a Super Reach (Swordsman Reach). The Reach title LT2 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 56(e). The Reach title LT2 here is displayed with "Swordsman Reach" written in black letters against a rainbow-colored background. In other words, the same display mode used for the hold icon and variable icon is also used for the background display of the Reach title LT2, suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot. In addition, the first performance movable body 7, which was located above the decorative pattern display device 208, has descended to a position in front of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, overlapping the display screen. Furthermore, the rectangular light-emitting portion 71 located on the first performance movable body 7 is lit in light-emitting mode D (rainbow-colored light-emitting mode), which represents the colors of the rainbow. That is, the light-emitting unit 71 of the first effect movable body 7 emits light in a manner identical to or similar to the rainbow color of the background display of the reach title LT2, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. The background display of the reach title LT2 may also be a display manner representing display manner E (rainbow color), which is the display manner of the hold icon and variable icon. That is, the background display of the reach title LT2 is a manner identical to or similar to display manner E (rainbow color); for example, even if the shape of the single-color display area is slightly different from display manner E (rainbow color) used as the display manner of the hold icon and variable icon, as long as the player can imagine display manner E (rainbow color), it will be a display manner similar to display manner E (rainbow color) (the same applies to the reach title LT3 in Figure 58 (j) described below).

As shown in Figure 61(a), the background color of this reach title LT2 can be selected from "white," "red," "manufacturer pattern," and "rainbow," with the expected probability of a jackpot for "white" being "20%," for "red" being "35%," for "manufacturer pattern" being "75%," and for "rainbow" being "100%." In other words, unlike the "jii reach" mentioned above, the type of background color of the reach title LT2 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 61(b), the light-emitting color of the light-emitting unit 71 can be selected from "white," "red," and "rainbow," with the expected probability of a jackpot for "white" being "20%," "red" being "45%," and "rainbow" being "100%." In other words, unlike the types of background colors for the reach title LT2, the types of light-emitting colors for the light-emitting unit 71 do not have a "manufacturer pattern" set. Note that the background color of the reach title LT2 and the light-emitting color of the light-emitting unit 71 may be related to each other (they may be the same color). However, even in this case, the "manufacturer pattern" is not set as the light-emitting color of the light-emitting unit 71, and the light-emitting unit 71 will emit light in another color (for example, "gold light" or "flashing red" is set instead of the "manufacturer pattern").

In the state shown in Figure 56 (e), the descending first effect movable body 7 does not overlap the background display in reach title LT2, but if the first effect movable body 7 is capable of descending to a position where it overlaps with the background display, when the display mode of the background display is a manufacturer pattern, it will only descend to a position where it does not overlap with the background display. Furthermore, the effect movable body is configured not to overlap not only the background display, but also the manufacturer pattern hold icon and variable icon.

The display mode of the background display in the reach title LT2 may be the manufacturer's pattern, but the light-emitting unit 71 on the first performance movable body 7 may not be able to light up in a light-emitting mode that displays the manufacturer's pattern, and may also not be able to light up in a light-emitting mode that displays rainbow colors. In such a case, the light-emitting unit 71 may remain off, or may light up in a light-emitting mode that displays red.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 56(f) begins displaying an animation of a duel scene between the main character, a lord, and the opposing swordsman. This animation continues until Figure 56(i). In Figure 56(i), the main character, a lord, defeats the opposing swordsman, and the decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4." Note that the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display variations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 56(j), the reduced display in the lower right corner returns to its original size, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen in the combination "444." In Figure 56(j), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

Figure 57 shows an example of a staged effect in which animation is displayed on the sub LCD display device using zone effects.

Figure 57 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the effect lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 57(a) displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a stopped state. The effect lamp 206 shown in Figure 57(a) is also in an off state. In addition, Figure 57 also displays the sub-LCD display device 207 located to the left of the first special pattern start slot (fixed) 230. The sub-LCD display device 207 shown in Figure 57(a) is in a state where nothing is displayed.

In addition, in Figure 57 (a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode.

In Figure 57(b), the display of the symbol variation for special symbol 1 has begun. That is, the symbol variation has begun in the first special symbol display device 212, and the display of the fourth and mini symbols has also begun, and the movement of the reserved icon has also ended. The reserved icon has shifted one position to the right, and the reserved icon h11, which was previously the first reserved icon, is now displayed as the reserved icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280, in this example, without changing its display mode and remaining in its default display mode. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(b), the display of decorative symbol variations has begun in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. However, the zone title ZT, which represents the title of the zone effect, is displayed overlapping the display of the decorative symbol variations, making the display of the decorative symbol variations difficult to see. The zone title ZT is displayed as "Training Zone" in red letters on a solid blue oval background. This zone title ZT displays the word "Training Zone" in a color identical to or similar to the red color used by the reserved icon and decorative elements to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. However, this red color does not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. That is, when this zone title ZT is displayed, "Training Zone" is always displayed in red text and is never displayed in any other color. Neither the color of the text in the reach title LT1 shown in FIG. 53(j) nor the color of the text in this zone title ZT indicates the likelihood of a jackpot, although the color of the text may indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. On the other hand, the manufacturer pattern only indicates the likelihood of a jackpot and is never a non-indicative representation of the likelihood of a jackpot. Therefore, the manufacturer pattern is not used in displays related to various settings that can be changed by the player on the gaming machine (e.g., tone from the speaker 120, game mode, etc.), the number of plays, or the number of consecutive jackpots. Whenever a manufacturer pattern is displayed, it always suggests that a jackpot is likely to occur, and players can expect a jackpot with a fairly high probability. If a manufacturer pattern with a high expectation is used when no jackpot expectation is suggested, players may mistakenly believe that the jackpot is likely to be high and become overly hopeful. However, by not using a manufacturer pattern with a high expectation when no jackpot expectation is suggested, players can be prevented from mistakenly believing that the jackpot is likely to be high, and excessive excitement over the expectation can be reduced.

In Figure 57(b), where the zone title ZT described above is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub-LCD display device 207 begins displaying a zone animation, showing an animation of the main character, a lord wearing a red kimono, practicing swordsmanship. The color of the lord's kimono can be selected from "white," "green," "red," and "rainbow," as shown in Figure 61(c). The expected jackpot probability for "white" is "20%," for "green" is "30%," for "red" is "45%, and for "rainbow" is "100%." Note that this is not displayed for "manufacturer symbols." This animation continues until Figure 57(i). Note that the value shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 shown in Figure 57(b) changes from 2 to 1, and a "-" begins flashing on the fourth symbol of special symbol 1.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(c), the background display has switched to a wilderness background display, which is the background display of the training zone. This wilderness background display continues until Figure 57(i). Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(c), the changing display of decorative symbols occurring in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are visible. Also, in Figure 57(c), one ball enters the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons for special symbol 1 increases. This increased reserved icon h12 is displayed in green (display mode B) in the display position of the second reserved icon, functioning as a pre-reading notice. In synchronization with the start of the display of the green reserved icon h12 (display mode B), a sound effect (appearance sound) represented by a sixteenth note is output from the speaker 120. In this example, the effect lamp 206 does not light up in response to the increase in the number of holds represented by the green (fifth display mode) hold icon h12, and the effect lamp 206 remains off. Note that the number shown in the hold number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/hold number display area 284 has increased by one to 2.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57(d), the losing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 3-Decoration 5-Decoration 8" is displayed as a frozen symbol. Furthermore, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed as a frozen symbol "X," and the mini symbols are also displayed as a frozen combination of "358." The star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains off.

In Figure 57 (e), the display of the pattern change for Special Chart 1 has started again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display begins flashing for the fourth pattern of Special Chart 1. The green reserved icon (display mode B) has moved one position and is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). In addition, the star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains off.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 57 (f), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed as a frozen combination. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "814". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 remains off.

In Figure 57 (g), the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon has been consumed, and the display of the pattern change for special symbol 1 has begun. That is, the decorative symbol is displaying a change, and the green (display mode B) hold icon is displayed as a green (display mode B) change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. The star-shaped effect lamp 206, which was in an off state, begins to emit light in light-emitting mode B (green light-emitting mode) representing green (display mode B) in response to the start of the pattern change display by the first special symbol display device 212, based on the hold represented by the green (display mode B) hold icon that had been displayed until then. That is, the effect lamp 206 begins to emit light in a light-emitting mode that is the same or similar to the green of the change icon h0. In this example, the effect lamp 206 did not begin to emit light until the change that was the subject of the warning began. The timing when the green (display mode B) variable icon h0 starts to display and the timing when the star-shaped effect lamp 206 starts to light up due to light-emitting mode B may be simultaneous, or the variable icon h0 may start earlier, or the effect lamp 206 may start earlier. Note that the number shown in the reserved number display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display begins flashing on the fourth symbol of special symbol 1.

In Figure 57 (h), the decorative symbol change display enters a reach state, but in this example, it does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 57 (i) displays the missing decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" as frozen. Furthermore, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as an "X," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen as the combination of "434." Furthermore, the green (fifth display mode) variable icon h0 disappears upon completion of the symbol change display by the first special symbol display device 212. The timing of the end of the symbol change display and the timing of the variable icon h0 disappearing may be simultaneous, or the symbol change display may come earlier, or the variable icon h0 may come earlier. Furthermore, the performance lamp 206 also goes out upon the disappearance of the green (display mode B) variable icon h0.

The effects executed on the sub-LCD display device 207 (second display means) are not limited to the display of the zone effect animation described above, and various other effects may be used. For example, when the decorative symbols temporarily stopped during the pseudo-sequential preview are changed again, a lord may be displayed on the sub-LCD display device 207, and the color of the lord's kimono may be used to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Even in this case, the "maker pattern" is not displayed. In other words, the sub-LCD display device 207 is designed not to display the "maker pattern" under any circumstances. In this way, by not displaying the "maker pattern" on the sub-LCD display device 207, the rarity of highly anticipated manufacturer patterns is increased, thereby enhancing the sense of expectation and exclusivity of the manufacturer pattern. Note that the "pseudo-sequential preview" refers to a preview in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then changed again during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one jackpot drawing. This preview may involve multiple display and temporary stop of the decorative symbols.

Figure 58 shows an example of a step-by-step effect in which the display mode of the hold icon and the lighting mode of the star-shaped effect lamp 206 are related, and a super reach is performed.

Figure 58 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208 and the performance lamp 206. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58(a) displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" in a static state.

In addition, in Figure 58 (a), two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the special chart 1 hold icon display area 281, and these two special chart 1 hold icons h11 and h12 are both displayed in the default display mode.

In addition, the effect lamp 206 shown in Figure 58 (a) is lit in the default lighting mode (white lighting mode), which is the lighting mode that represents the display mode of the hold icons h11 and h12.

In Figure 58 (b), the display of the pattern change for special pattern 1 has begun. That is, the pattern change has begun in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change for the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also begun, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change for the decorative pattern has also begun. The number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 has changed from 2 to 1, and the "-" display has begun flashing in the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one place to the right, and reserved icon h11, which was previously the first reserved icon, is now displayed as variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280.

In Figure 58 (c), one ball enters the first special symbol starting hole (fixed) 230, and the number of reserved icons for special symbol 1 increases. This increased reserved icon is displayed in red (display mode C) in the display position of the second reserved icon h12, functioning as a preview. In time with the start of the display of the red reserved icon h12 (display mode C), an eighth note sound effect (appearance sound) is output from the speaker 120. Also, as in the example shown in Figure 53, in this example too, the star-shaped display lamp 206, which had previously been emitting light in the default light-emitting mode (white light-emitting mode), changes to light-emitting mode C (red light-emitting mode), which represents the display mode of the reserved icon h12, indicating the increased reserved icon. Note that the number shown in the reserved icon display area for special symbol 1 in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284 increases by one to 2.

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58 (d), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 3 - Decoration 5 - Decoration 8" is displayed as a frozen combination. Furthermore, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed as a frozen "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed as a frozen combination of "358". The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C.

In Figure 58 (e), the display of the pattern change for Special Chart 1 has begun again, and the decorative pattern is changing. The number shown in the reserved number display area for Special Chart 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 1, and the "-" display begins flashing in the fourth pattern for Special Chart 1. The red reserved icon (display mode C) has moved one position and is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon (reserved icon h11). When the reserved icon that was red (display mode C) is displayed in the display position of the first reserved icon, the display mode changes to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the reserved icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In accordance with the timing of the change in the display mode of the reserved icon, a sound effect (changing sound) represented by a quarter note is output from the speaker 120. Meanwhile, the performance lamp 206 that was emitting light in the red light mode (light mode C) maintains its light emission mode and does not change even when the display mode of the reserved icon changes. The effect lamp 206, which is more noticeable than the hold icon, does not change its light emission pattern; however, upon closer inspection, the hold icon h11 is displayed in display pattern D (manufacturer pattern), which appears least frequently, and a player who discovers this may find their interest in the game greatly increased. Note that, in response to the hold icon h11 changing to display pattern D (manufacturer pattern), the effect lamp 206 may also change to a light emission pattern (for example, light emission pattern F (gold light emission pattern)) that is different from the light emission pattern representing display pattern D (manufacturer pattern).

In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58 (f), the losing decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 8 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. Additionally, in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, the fourth pattern of special pattern 1 is displayed frozen as an "X", and the mini patterns are also displayed frozen as the combination "814". The reserved icon h11 is displayed in display mode D (manufacturer pattern), and the performance lamp 206 continues to emit light in light emission mode C.

In Figure 58 (g), the hold represented by the hold icon h11 in display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is consumed, and the display of the pattern change of special pattern 1 has begun. In the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58 (g), the display of the decorative pattern change has begun, and the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0 in the change icon display area 280. In this example, when the hold icon h11, which was in display mode D (manufacturer pattern), is displayed in the change icon display area 280, i.e., when it changes to the change icon h0, the display mode changes to display mode E (rainbow), and the change icon h0 is displayed in display mode E (rainbow). The change icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow) functions as a normal notice of a confirmed jackpot. Even when the display mode of the hold icon changes here, a sound effect (changing sound) represented by a half note is output from the speaker 120. Additionally, in response to the appearance of variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow colors), star-shaped performance lamp 206, which had previously been emitting light in light mode C, changes to light mode D (rainbow light mode) representing the rainbow colors (display mode E). In other words, it begins emitting light in a light mode that is the same as or similar to the rainbow colors of variable icon h0. Note that the value shown in the reserved number display area for special chart 1 in fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 becomes 0, and the "-" display begins flashing on the fourth pattern of special chart 1.

In this example, the display mode changes from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors), but the display mode may not change from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors) (change rate is 0%), and may change to display mode E (rainbow colors) only from other display modes (default display mode, display mode B, display mode C, display mode F) other than display mode D (manufacturer pattern). Alternatively, the rate at which the display mode changes from the other display modes to display mode E (rainbow colors) may be higher than the rate at which the display mode changes from display mode D (manufacturer pattern) to display mode E (rainbow colors).

In Figure 58(h), the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, and in Figure 58(i), the background image switches from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special pattern 1 pending icon display area 281 disappear. In Figure 58(i), the variable icon h0 in display mode E (rainbow color) is hidden, but the star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow color light-emitting mode). In this way, the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light even when the variable icon h0 is hidden, but only when it is emitting light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow color light-emitting mode) indicating a confirmed jackpot. Note that the effect lamp 206 may continue to emit light or turn off based on the results of the effect lottery, regardless of the light-emitting mode. Note that the fourth pattern/pending number display area 284 is displayed. Additionally, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the miniature pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In Figure 58(j), the game has progressed to a Super Reach (Tono Reach). The star-shaped effect lamp 206 continues to emit light in illumination mode D (rainbow). The Reach title LT3 is also displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58(j). The Reach title LT3 is displayed with "Tono Reach" written in black letters against a rainbow background. The background color of this Reach title LT3 can be selected from "White," "Red," "Manufacturer's Design," and "Rainbow," as shown in Figure 61(a). The expected probability of a jackpot for "White" is "20%," for "Red," for "Manufacturer's Design," for "35%," for "75%, and for "Rainbow," for "100%." In other words, unlike the "Ji Reach" described above, the type of background color of the Reach title LT3 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot. Furthermore, the illumination mode D (rainbow-colored illumination mode) of the effect lamp 206 is the same as or similar to the display mode of the background display in reach title LT3.

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 58(k) displays an animation of the Lord's character, and the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in the following Figure 58(l) displays a proud-looking Lord's character. Furthermore, the decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4." Note that the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 remain off, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display variations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed and displayed.

The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 58(m) returns to its original size from the reduced display in the lower right, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. Also, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen in the combination "444." In Figure 58(m), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 58, the effect lamp 206, which continued to emit light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow colors) even after the start of the Super Reach (Tono Reach), continues to emit light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow colors) during the Super Reach, and continues to emit light even after the decorative pattern combination is displayed in a stopped state, continuing to emit light in light-emitting mode D (rainbow colors) until the subsequent jackpot game start effect begins. Note that the effect lamp 206 may be set to turn off when the pattern change display by the first special pattern display device 212 ends.

Figure 59 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a performance in which the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the decorative element provided on the second performance movable body 8 are related.

Figure 59 also shows the decorative pattern display device 208. Furthermore, in Figure 59, the star-shaped performance lamp 206 is omitted from the illustration, and instead shows the second performance movable body 8 arranged to the right of the decorative pattern display device 208. As explained above, the performance lamp may emit light by changing its light emission mode in accordance with the display mode of the hold icon or variable icon. Alternatively, in this example, the performance lamp 206 may remain off or may remain in its default light emission mode (white light emission mode).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59(a) displays the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 1 - Decoration 7" frozen. Also, in Figure 59(a), one special pattern 1 hold icon h11 is displayed in the special pattern 1 hold icon display area 281, and this special pattern 1 hold icon h11 is displayed in the default display mode.

The second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59 (a) is located in its initial position. The second performance movable body 8 located in its initial position is in a position that does not overlap the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front, and avoids the display screen, with both the upper arm 81 and the forearm 82 facing downward.

In Figure 59 (b), the display of the pattern change for special pattern 1 has begun. That is, the pattern change has begun in the first special pattern display device 212, and the display of the change for the fourth pattern and mini pattern has also begun, the movement of the reserved icon has also ended, and the display of the change for the decorative pattern has also begun. The number shown in the reserved number display area for special pattern 1 in the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 changes from 1 to 0, and the "-" display has begun flashing for the fourth pattern of special pattern 1. In addition, the reserved icon has shifted one place to the right, and reserved icon h11, which was previously in the display position of the first reserved icon, is now displayed as variable icon h0 in the variable icon display area 280. The reserved icon h11, which was in the default display mode, remains in the default display mode even after changing to variable icon h0.

The second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59 (b) remains in its initial position.

When the decorative pattern display device 208 begins displaying the changing decorative patterns, a button effect begins. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59(c) displays an operation prompt notification image 136P that encourages the player to press the effect button 136 within the valid period. This operation prompt notification image 136P displays an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the valid period to the right of the lord's character image. Although the display of the changing decorative patterns is hidden by the operation prompt notification image 136P, the player can recognize that the special pattern is changing by the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284, etc. Note that the display position of the decorative patterns may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the operation prompt notification image 136P so that the decorative patterns are not hidden.

In Figure 59(d), the remaining time display bar 136P2 shows the valid period decreasing, and in Figure 59(e), the player is pressing the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period, the success or failure of the button effect is notified. In this example, if the display mode of the variable icon h0 is upgraded, it is a success, and the variable icon display area 280 shown in Figure 59(f) displays the variable icon h0, which has changed from the default display mode to display mode C (red). In other words, the button effect is successful, and the normal preview has begun. In synchronization with the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, an effect sound (changing sound) represented by an eighth note is output from the speaker 120. In addition, the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may also emit red light. Note that if the button effect is unsuccessful, the display mode of the variable icon h0 will not change even if the effect button 136 is pressed within the valid period. In addition to this, if the button is successful, a warning will be given that you will enter a reach state.

As shown in Figure 59(f), even when the success or failure of the button effect is announced, the second effect movable body 8 remains in its initial position. However, as shown in Figure 59(g), when the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, the second effect movable body 8 begins to operate. That is, the upper arm 81 begins to rotate upward, and the forearm 82 also begins to rotate upward. As a result, the second effect movable body 8 begins to overlap part of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 from the front. In the following Figure 59(h), the background image switches from the default background image to hidden, and the variable icon display area 280 and the special pattern 1 hold icon display area 281 disappear. As a result, the variable icon h0 of display mode C (red) also becomes hidden. The upper arm 81 of the second effect movable body 8 further rotates upward, and the forearm 82 is raised significantly. Note that the fourth pattern/hold number display area 284 is displayed. Additionally, the decorative pattern changes that were previously displayed in the left pattern display area 208a, middle pattern display area 208b, and right pattern display area 208c have been moved to the bottom right corner and displayed in a reduced size. Meanwhile, the miniature pattern in the upper left continues to be displayed.

In Figure 59(i), the game has progressed to a Super Reach (Lord Reach). The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59(i) displays the Reach title LT4. The Reach title LT4 here is displayed in black text against a red background, reading "Lord Reach." Furthermore, in the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59(i), the forearm 82 is held up high and vibrates, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended, making decoration C (red) visible. This decoration C is a display mode that displays red and is the same as or similar to the display mode C (red) of the variable icon h0 that changed in the button performance. The decoration on the second finger (index finger) 822 also indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. In this example, the display mode of the background display in the Reach title LT4 and the display mode of the decoration of the second performance movable body 8 are the same or similar, but may also be different.

The background display of reach title LT4 may also be a display mode that represents the color red. In other words, the background display of reach title LT4 is the same as or similar to display mode C (red), and even if it is a slightly different color from display mode C (red), which is the display mode of the hold icon or variable icon, as long as the player can imagine display mode C (red), it will be a display mode similar to display mode C (red).

The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59(j) displays an animation of the lord's character, and the second performance movable body 8, which has its forearm 82 raised high and its second finger (index finger) 822 extended, begins to return to its initial position. The decorative pattern display device 208 shown in Figure 59(k) displays a proud-looking lord's character, and the second performance movable body 8 has returned to its initial position. The decorative pattern variation display displayed in reduced size in the lower right corner shows the fluctuation of the decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4." Note that the variable icon display area 280 and the reserved icon display area 281 for special pattern 1 remain blank, but the fourth pattern/reserved number display area 284 and mini patterns are displayed. The mini patterns continue to display variations for all patterns until the patterns are confirmed and displayed.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in Figure 59(l), the display returns from the reduced size in the lower right to its original size, and decorative symbol combinations are displayed frozen in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c. Here, the jackpot decorative symbol combination of "Decoration 4-Decoration 4-Decoration 4" is displayed frozen. In addition, in the fourth symbol/reserved number display area 284, the fourth symbol of special symbol 1 is displayed frozen as a "circle," and the mini symbols are also displayed frozen in the combination "444." In Figure 59(l), the background is hidden, but in reality, a background image different from the default is displayed.

Figure 60 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example of a performance similar to the performance in which the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59 moves, and the explanation focuses on the differences from the example of performance shown in Figure 59.

Figures 60(a) to 60(e) are the same as Figures 59(a) to 59(e), and button effects are being executed.

In Figure 60 (f), the button effect is also successful, and the variable icon h0, which has changed from the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), is displayed in the variable icon display area 280. In addition, in time with the change in the display mode of the variable icon h0, a quarter note effect sound (changing sound) is output from the speaker 120. Note that the button lamp 138 of the effect button 136 may not emit light in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer pattern, but may emit light in a red light-emitting mode.

In the following Figure 60(g), as in Figure 59(g), the decorative pattern variable display enters a reach state, and the second movable effect body 8 begins to operate. Note that, for example, if the variable icon h0 is displayed in display mode B (green), the second movable effect body 8 may not operate and may remain stationary in its initial position. That is, when display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second movable effect body 8 may be more likely to operate than when display mode B (green) is displayed. Also, when display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second movable effect body 8 may be more likely to operate than when display mode C (red) shown in Figure 59(g) is displayed. In other words, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that the second movable effect body 8 will operate. Note that when display mode D (maker pattern) is displayed, the second movable effect body 8 may always operate.

In Figure 60(h), like Figure 59(h), the background image has been switched from the default background image to hidden, and in this example, the variable icon h0 of display mode D (manufacturer pattern) is also hidden. Also, like Figure 59(h), the forearm 82 of the second performance movable body 8 is raised significantly.

In Figure 60(i), the game progresses to a Super Reach (Lord Reach), and the Reach title LT5 is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The Reach title LT5 here is displayed as "Lord Reach" in black letters against a manufacturer pattern background. Similarly to the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 59(j), the second performance movable body 8 shown in Figure 60(j) vibrates with the forearm 82 held high, and the second finger (index finger) 822 is extended. As a result, decoration C is visible, but decoration C is a display mode that displays red, which is a different decoration from display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which was the display mode of the variable icon h0 that changed with the button performance. In other words, the decoration is one level lower in terms of the expected probability of a jackpot. Alternatively, the first finger (thumb) 821 may be extended to make visible decoration D (see FIG. 55(e)), which indicates a 70% chance of winning. However, even in this case, the chance of winning is lower than the 75% chance suggested by display mode D (maker pattern). The player can see the variable icon h0 of display mode D (maker pattern), which appears least frequently, and furthermore, can see the manufacturer pattern even in the background display mode for reach title LT5, which can make the player feel quite excited, and the decoration of the second effect movable body 8 may be able to calm the player down a little.

The background display of reach title LT5 may be a display mode that represents display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the hold icon and variable icon. In other words, the background display of reach title LT5 is the same as or similar to the manufacturer pattern; for example, even if the shape of the polka dots is slightly different from display mode D (manufacturer pattern), which is the display mode of the hold icon and variable icon, as long as the player can imagine display mode D (manufacturer pattern), it will be a display mode similar to display mode D (manufacturer pattern).

From here on, Figures 60(i) to 60(l) are the same as Figures 59(i) to 59(l), and the jackpot decorative pattern combination of "Decoration 4 - Decoration 4 - Decoration 4" is displayed statically, resulting in a jackpot.

Figure 61(a) shows the reach title background color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the background color using the reach title background color determination table shown in FIG. 61(a) during the presentation control process (step S409) shown in FIG. 51(a). In this case, as described above, green is always selected as the background color for the reach title LT1 of "Ji Reach," and this background color does not indicate the expected probability of a jackpot. On the other hand, the background colors of the reach title LT2 of "Kengou Reach" and the reach title LT3 (LT4) of "Tono Reach" indicate the expected probability of a jackpot, and the CPU 504 determines the background color based on commands received from the first sub-control unit 400. For both the reach title LT2 of "Kengou Reach" and the reach title LT3 of "Tono Reach," the background color includes a manufacturer's design. Note that the same relationship between background color and expected probability of a jackpot is used for both reach titles LT2 and LT3, but different background colors may also be used.

Figure 61 (b) shows the emission color determination table stored in ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400.

The CPU 0404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the light color of the light-emitting unit 71 in the first effect movable body 7 using the light color determination table shown in FIG. 61(b) in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 50(a). The light color of the light-emitting unit 71 indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, and the CPU 404 determines the light color based on commands received from the main control unit 300. White, red, and rainbow colors are available as light colors, and no manufacturer-designed light colors are available. Furthermore, the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the red light color is different from the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the red background color of the reach title described above. Furthermore, the expected probability of a jackpot indicated by the red display mode of the hold icon and variable icon, as explained using FIG. 54, is also different.

Figure 61(c) shows the lord's kimono color determination table stored in ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500.

This determination table is used to determine the color of the lord's kimono displayed on the sub LCD display device 207 in the zone presentation described using Figure 57. As with the background color determination described above, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines the color of the lord's kimono based on the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 in the presentation control process (step S409) shown in Figure 51 (a). At this time, the determination table shown in Figure 61 (c) is used. As mentioned above, manufacturer patterns are not displayed on the sub LCD display device 207, so manufacturer patterns are not available for the color of the lord's kimono. The color of the lord's kimono also indicates the likelihood of a jackpot.

In the above explanation, sound effects such as the appearance sounds of hold icons and variable icons and the sound of the display mode changing are output from speaker 120. The shortest sound effect, a sixteenth note, is output in response to display mode B (green) (Figure 57(c)), a shorter sound effect, an eighth note, is output in response to display mode C (red) (Figures 53(c), 58(c), 59(f)), a longer sound effect, a quarter note, is output in response to display mode D (maker pattern) (Figures 56(b), 58(e), 60(f)), and the longest sound effect, a half note, is output in response to display mode E (rainbow) (Figure 58(g)). In other words, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot, the longer the sound effect duration is. While different sound effects were used for each display mode, different sound effects may be used for display modes with a relatively high probability of winning a jackpot (display modes D and E above 50%) and display modes with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot (display modes B and C below 50%). In other words, a special sound effect may be output only when the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high. Furthermore, a specific sound effect different from that used for other display modes may be output only for the sound of the pending icon or variable icon appearing in display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or the sound of the change to display mode D (manufacturer pattern). The specific sound effect may be a sound effect related to display mode D (manufacturer pattern) or a sound effect representing display mode D (manufacturer pattern). For example, if the manufacturer pattern is an animal pattern, the sound of an animal representing that animal pattern may be output as the specific sound effect.

In addition, in the above explanation, the text color of the reach title LT1 shown in Figure 53(j) and the text color of the zone title ZT shown in Figure 57(b) do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Conversely, the background display of the reach title LT2 shown in Figure 56(e), the background display of the reach title LT3 shown in Figure 58(j), the background display of the reach title LT4 shown in Figure 59(i), and the background display of the reach title LT5 shown in Figure 60(i) indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. However, the display mode of the title text may also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, in which case the title text will be displayed in different display modes depending on the likelihood of a jackpot. Conversely, the title background display may also not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, in which case the title background display will always be displayed in the same display mode.

Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the title text and background display, the display mode of the text, background display, and frame display of the cut-in preview, or the display mode of the text, background display, and speech bubble display of the dialogue preview, may also suggest the likelihood of a jackpot through the display mode (color and pattern) of the hold icon and variable icon. For example, in these previews, the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) appears. On the other hand, the second display mode (manufacturer pattern) does not appear during the demo performance.

In addition, during jackpot play, the light-emitting means (performance lamp 206, light-emitting portion 71 of first performance movable body 7, game board lamp 442 such as a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged on attacca unit 23, left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, game table frame lamp 452 such as button lamp 138, etc.) may emit light in a rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern. For this reason, unless a changing pattern is being displayed, the rainbow-colored light-emitting pattern (light-emitting pattern D) may not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot. Note that even during jackpot play, the light-emitting means will not emit light in a light-emitting pattern representing the manufacturer pattern (display pattern D).

Furthermore, the frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may be higher in the second game state (e.g., a special pattern high probability state) than in the first game state (e.g., a special pattern low probability state). Furthermore, the frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may not be changeable by the player's setting operation, but if it is changeable in custom mode, the frequency of appearance of the manufacturer pattern may be higher in the second mode (e.g., custom mode) than in the first mode (e.g., non-custom mode (normal mode)).

Furthermore, as with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, if a right hit is made in a state where the probability of a special symbol is low, and it takes a long time for the result of the variable display of special symbol 2 to be displayed, which would be disadvantageous to the player, the manufacturer pattern may not appear, but in a state where the probability of a special symbol is high and a small hit rush can be expected, the manufacturer pattern may appear. Alternatively, in a type 1/type 2 hybrid machine where a V is won via a small hit, the manufacturer pattern may not appear in the variable presentation when a small hit is won in the normal play state, but may appear in the variable presentation when a small hit is won in the time-saving play state.

Also, although the manufacturer's pattern appears least frequently, its frequency of appearance may be set to the same as the frequency of rainbow colors. Alternatively, the manufacturer's pattern may appear less frequently than red, but more frequently than rainbow colors. As mentioned above, this frequency of appearance may be changeable by the player's setting operation.

In addition, what was previously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 may also be displayed on the sub-LCD display device 207, or may be displayed on the sub-LCD display device 207 instead of the decorative pattern display device 208.

Also, as a display means in place of the sub-LCD display device 207, a transparent or translucent light guide plate (second display means) covering the game board 200 or the game area 124 may be installed in front of the game board 200 or the game area 124. This light guide plate is an optical element that emits light incident from the side forward, and can switch its light emission mode depending on the color of the incident light. It is also possible to display patterns or designs as the light is emitted forward. Note that even when a light guide plate is used in place of the sub-LCD display device 207, manufacturer designs should not be displayed.

Furthermore, in the explanations of Figures 53 to 60, white, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, which may (but may not) represent the likelihood of a jackpot, manufacturer patterns, which always represent the likelihood of a jackpot, and blue, which never represents the likelihood of a jackpot, are used, but other colors and patterns may also be used.

Furthermore, when changing the display mode of the hold icon or variable icon, it may be possible to prevent a change from the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern), but to change from the default display mode to display mode E (rainbow). In this case, display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may only be able to change from display mode C (red), or it may be able to change from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green). Conversely, it may be possible to prevent a change from the default display mode to display mode E (rainbow), but to change from the default display mode to display mode D (manufacturer pattern). In this case, display mode E (rainbow) may only be able to change from display mode C (red), or it may be able to change from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green). Furthermore, display mode D (manufacturer pattern) may be able to change from display mode C (red) and display mode B (green) in addition to the default display mode.

As mentioned above, various effects using color have been explained, but the predetermined colors displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (the predetermined colors displayed in the background display of the reach title, the hold icon, the variable icon, and the zone title), the predetermined colors emitted by the light-emitting means (effect lamp 206, light-emitting portion 71 of the first effect movable body 7, game board lamps 442 such as light-emitting diodes (not shown) arranged in the attacca unit 23, game table frame lamps 452 such as left frame lamp 122L, right frame lamp 122R, upper frame lamp 122U, and button lamp 138), the predetermined color displayed on the sub LCD display device 207 (the lord's kimono), and the predetermined color of the decoration of the decorative body provided on the second effect movable body 8 all have different display media and effects, so strictly speaking, the hue of each display will be different.

However, even if the hues are slightly different, as long as the player can imagine that they are a "predetermined color" (for example, red), it can be said that the "predetermined colors" displayed in each display represent the same "predetermined color," or that they are the same or similar "predetermined colors."

Figure 62 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied, viewed from the front side (player side).

This slot machine 1000 comprises a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, center reel 1011, right reel 1012) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer peripheries (not shown in Figure 62) are housed inside the center of the main body 1001 and are configured to rotate within the slot machine 1000. These reels 1010 to 1012 are driven to rotate by driving means such as a stepping motor.

In the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 62, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame to form each of the reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed vertically in approximately three columns through the symbol display window 1013, for a total of nine symbols. By spinning each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the symbol combinations visible to the player change. In other words, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display device that variably displays multiple symbol combinations. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal displays can also be used as such display devices. Furthermore, while the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 62 has three reels located inside the center of the slot machine 1000, the number of reels and their installation locations are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown in Figure 62) is located on the back of each reel 1010-1012 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each reel 1010-1012, and a light-blocking piece of a certain length attached to the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection results of this sensor, the rotational position of the symbols on the reel is determined, and the reels 1010-1012 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the pay line.

The payline indicator lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates which paylines 1014 are active. The active paylines are predetermined based on the number of medals bet as gaming media. There are five paylines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal payline is active. If two medals are bet, three additional paylines, the upper horizontal payline and the lower horizontal payline, are active. If three medals are bet, five additional paylines, the lower right-hand side payline and the upper right-hand side payline, are active. Note that the number of paylines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, if one medal is bet, the five active paylines may be the middle horizontal payline, the upper horizontal payline, the lower horizontal payline, the lower right-hand side payline, and the upper right-hand side payline.

The notification lamp 1023 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1022 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be played again (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

BET buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, one medal is inserted each time BET button 1030 is pressed, up to a maximum of three medals; two medals are inserted when BET button 1031 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when BET button 1032 is pressed. Hereinafter, BET button 1032 is also referred to as the MAX BET button. The game medal insertion lamps 1029 light up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1021 lights up, indicating that game play can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1034 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals to start playing. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or physical medals can be inserted (inserted) through the medal insertion slot 1034; the term "inserting" encompasses both. The stored medal count display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during bonus play) as numerical values. The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning a certain winning combination.

The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 begin to rotate. Operating the start lever 1035 is called the start operation of a game. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process is executed to determine which of multiple types of roles has been won, and it is determined whether the slot machine 1000 will be in a relatively advantageous or disadvantageous state for the player.

The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started spinning by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with each reel 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. Light-emitting elements may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 1033 is a button that can be pressed to remove inserted medals if they become jammed. The settlement button 1043 is a button that can be used to settle medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000. The medal payout outlet 1055 is a payout outlet for paying out medals.

In addition, the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62 has an operation key unit 1090, which is the same as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42, provided between the MAX BET button 1032 and the medal insertion slot 1034. This operation key unit 1090 also has a directional pad, an OK button, and a cancel button. Furthermore, next to the operation key unit 1090 is provided an effect button 1091, which is the same as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42, and this effect button 1091 also lights up with a button lamp (not shown).

The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting sound from the speaker installed inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. The side lamps 1044 installed on the left and right sides of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps to liven up the game. An effect device 1080 is arranged above the front door 1002. This effect device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 consisting of two doors, a right door 1063a and a left door 1063b, which can be opened and closed horizontally. A liquid crystal display device 1057 is disposed behind the door member 1063. The effect device 1080 also includes an effect movable body 1058, which is the same as the second effect movable body 8 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42. When the two doors, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) appears in front of the slot machine 1000 (toward the player), and the effect movable body 1058 also appears to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1057. The right door 1063a and the left door 1063b are equipped with light-emitting diodes (not shown) capable of emitting full-color light. The effect movable body 1058 shown in FIG. 62 also includes the decorative element described in FIG. 55. Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device; it may be configured to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen may be used. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62, the display screen is a flat rectangular surface, but it may also be a flat square surface. Furthermore, decorations (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may be curved.

In addition, the slot machine 1000 shown in Figure 62 may also be provided with a sub-LCD display device separate from the LCD display device 1057.

Display modes A to E are used on the LCD display 1057 and/or the sub LCD display to display the title text, title background, preview background, preview frame, preview text, etc. That is, the manufacturer pattern display of display mode D is also used. In the slot machine 1000, each display of display mode A to display mode E is an indication image that suggests the likelihood of transitioning to the AT state or the likelihood of winning a bonus. Furthermore, the side lamp 1044, the unillustrated light-emitting diodes located on the right door 1063a and left door 1063b, and the unillustrated button lamp that illuminates the effect button 1091 can emit light in light-emitting modes A to E, but do not emit light in the light-emitting mode representing the manufacturer pattern.

The present invention can also be applied to sealed-in pachinko machines. In sealed-in pachinko machines, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., gaming balls) are circulated within the gaming machine. That is, gaming media fired from the firing means into the gaming area are ejected from the gaming area and can be supplied to the firing means again. In addition, display means for displaying information on the number of gaming media (prize balls, loaned balls, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the gaming area on the front of the gaming machine, and the ball storage tray 126 shown in Figure 42 is not provided. In this sealed-in pachinko machine, balls are sealed in and circulated within the machine for use; the sealed balls are used as fired balls, and balls may be paid out using credits.

According to the above description,
"A display means [for example, a decorative pattern display device 208, a sub-liquid crystal display device 207, a liquid crystal display device 1057, etc.] capable of displaying suggestive images [for example, a hold icon, a variable icon, a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, etc.] that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will gain an advantage [for example, a jackpot expectation, a probability of transitioning to an AT state, a probability of obtaining a bonus, etc.], and
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light in a plurality of light-emitting modes (for example, the performance lamp 206 shown in FIG. 44, the light-emitting portion 71 of the first performance movable body 7, a game board lamp 442 (see FIG. 45) such as a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the attacca unit 23, a game table frame lamp 452 (see FIG. 45) such as the left frame lamp 122L, the right frame lamp 122R, the upper frame lamp 122U, and the button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 44, a side lamp 1044 shown in FIG. 62, a light-emitting diode (not shown) arranged in the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b, and a button lamp (not shown) that illuminates the performance button 1091, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a first display mode (for example, a white display mode shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 61(a), a green display mode shown in FIG. 54(b), or a red display mode shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 61(a)),
the display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a second display mode (for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIG. 54(d) and FIG. 61(a));
the second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation is higher (for example, 75%) than the first display mode,
the light-emitting means may emit light in a first light-emitting mode that represents the first display mode (for example, a white light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 61(b), a green light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 54(b), or a red light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 61(b), etc.),
the light-emitting means does not emit light in a second light-emitting mode representing the second display mode (for example, a light-emitting mode of green and yellow polka dots on a white background);
A gaming machine characterized by the above [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42, or a slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 62].
He explained about:

This gaming machine increases the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, and may increase the sense of expectation and specialness of the second display mode.

The expected probability may be the expectation of a jackpot.

The light-emitting means may be a panel lamp or a frame lamp. Alternatively, it may be a light-emitting body attached to a movable part or other accessory.

Furthermore, the first light-emitting mode may be slightly different from the first display mode, as long as it is generally recognized as being related to the first display mode. Furthermore, the light-emitting means does not emit light in a light-emitting mode that is generally recognized as being related to the second display mode.

Furthermore, the display means may be capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, i.e., a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%, or a display mode that does not suggest the expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored display mode shown in Figure 54(e) and Figure 61(a)],
the third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation is higher (for example, 100%) than the second display mode,
The light-emitting means may emit light in a third light-emitting mode (e.g., a rainbow-colored light-emitting mode shown in FIG. 54( e) or FIG. 61( b)) that represents the third display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The first light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the first display mode,
the second light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the second display mode,
The third light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode that is the same as or similar to the third display mode.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The first light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the first display mode, the second light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the second display mode, and the third light-emitting mode may be a light-emitting mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the only difference between the first light-emitting mode and the first display mode is due to differences in the media, such as the light-emitting means and the display means, then the first light-emitting mode can be said to be the same light-emitting mode as the first display mode, and the third light-emitting mode can be said to be the same light-emitting mode as the third display mode.

Also,
"The second display mode is a display mode using a plurality of colors [e.g., yellow and green],
The third display mode is also a display mode using a plurality of colors [for example, the seven colors that make up the rainbow (red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

Also,
"The third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation rate is 100%.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

For example, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests a confirmed jackpot.

Also,
The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine [for example, a manufacturer pattern or manufacturer color].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine to be identified.

According to the above description,
"A display means [for example, the decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 44, the sub-liquid crystal display device 207, the liquid crystal display device 1057 shown in FIG. 62, etc.] capable of displaying suggestive images [for example, a hold icon, a variable icon, a title character display, a title background display, a notice background display, a notice frame display, a notice character display, etc.] that suggest the degree of expectation that the player will gain an advantage [for example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot, the degree of expectation of transitioning to an AT state, the degree of expectation of winning a bonus, etc.], and
Movable means whose movable area is closer to the player than the display means (for example, the first effect movable body 7 and the second effect movable body 8 shown in FIG. 44, the right door 1063a and the left door 1063b shown in FIG. 62, and the effect movable body 1058),
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a first display mode (for example, a white display mode shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 61(a), a green display mode shown in FIG. 54(b), or a red display mode shown in FIG. 54(c) and FIG. 61(a)),
the display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a second display mode (for example, a display mode of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background as shown in FIG. 54(d) and FIG. 61(a));
the second display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation is higher (for example, 75%) than the first display mode,
the moving means includes a first decoration in a display mode representing the first display mode (for example, a white decoration shown in FIG. 55( a), a green decoration shown in FIG. 55( b), or a red decoration shown in FIG. 55( c));
The movable means does not include a second decoration according to the display mode representing the second display mode [for example, a decoration of green and yellow polka dots (manufacturer pattern) on a white background] [see, for example, FIG. 55].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained about:

This gaming machine increases the rarity of the second display mode, which has a high degree of expectation, and may be able to heighten the sense of anticipation and specialness of the second display mode. Furthermore, because the movable area of the movable means, which is closer to the player than the display means, does not include the second decoration, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the second display mode has appeared and reduce the risk of excessive excitement.

The expected probability may be the expectation of a jackpot.

The moving means may also be a moving means for stage effects (props).

Furthermore, the first decoration may be slightly different from the first display mode, as long as it is generally recognized as having a relationship with the first display mode. Furthermore, the moving means is not provided with decoration that is generally recognized as having a relationship with the second display mode.

The decoration may be a part painted with a color or pattern. In other words, it may be a part whose color or pattern does not change. Alternatively, it may be a part that displays a color or pattern (such as a liquid crystal display or light-emitting diode), or it may be a part that can display a changeable color or pattern.

Furthermore, the display means may be capable of displaying the suggestion image in a fourth display mode, and the first display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is higher than the fourth display mode. The fourth display mode may be a normal display mode, i.e., a default display mode. The fourth display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is lower than the first display mode, a display mode that suggests that the expectation level is 0%, or a display mode that does not suggest the expectation level.

Also,
"The display means is capable of displaying the suggestion image in a third display mode [for example, a rainbow-colored display mode shown in Figure 54(e) and Figure 61(a)],
the third display mode is a display mode that suggests that the expectation is higher (for example, 100%) than the second display mode,
The moving means does not include a third decoration [e.g., rainbow-colored decoration] according to a display mode that represents the third display mode [see, for example, FIG. 55].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The movable means may be provided with a first portion [e.g., the second finger (index finger) 822] on which a display in a display mode representing the first display mode is displayed, and the movable means may be capable of switching between a state in which the first portion is invisible to the player and a state in which the first portion is visible to the player, and the movable means may not be provided with a second portion on which a display in a display mode representing the second display mode is displayed. Furthermore, the movable means may not be provided with a third portion on which a display in a display mode representing the third display mode is displayed (see FIG. 55).

Also,
"The first decoration is a decoration in a display manner that is the same as or similar to the first display manner,
the second decoration is a decoration in a display manner that is the same as or similar to the second display manner,
The third decoration is a decoration in a display manner that is the same as or similar to the third display manner.
He also explained.

The first decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the first display mode, the second decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the second display mode, and the third decoration may be a decoration in a display mode related to the third display mode.

For example, if the only difference between the first decoration and the first display mode is due to differences in the media, such as the moving means and the display means, then the first decoration can be said to be the same display mode as the first display mode.

Furthermore, the second display mode may be a display mode using multiple colors, and the third display mode may also be a display mode using multiple colors.

Furthermore, the third display mode may be a display mode that suggests that the expectation rate is 100%.

Also,
"The movable means is more easily movable when the suggestive image in the second display mode is displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 60(g)] than when the suggestive image in the first display mode is displayed on the display means [for example, FIG. 59(g)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"The second display mode is a display mode that symbolizes the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine."
He also explained.

The second display mode may be a display mode that allows the manufacturer or distributor of the gaming machine to be identified.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, even if a component is included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, or various examples described above, that component may be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, or various examples. In other words, as long as there are no factors preventing such application, the component included only in the description of an embodiment, example, modification, or various examples can be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, or various examples and still form a unified technical idea.

100 Pachinko machine 106 Front frame door 124 Play area 126 Ball storage tray 136 Performance button 190 Operation key unit 191 Up button 192 Down button 200 Game board 201 Game board 206 Performance lamp 207 Sub LCD display device 208 Decorative pattern display device 210 Normal pattern display device 212 First special pattern display device 214 Second special pattern display device 228 Normal pattern start port 23 Attack unit 234 First variable winning port, variable winning port 2341 Door element 235 Second variable winning port 2351 Door element 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 Memory 7 First performance movable body 71 Light emitting unit 8 Second performance movable body 81 Upper arm 82 Forearm 821 First finger (thumb)
822 Second finger (index finger)
823 3rd finger (middle finger)
824 4th finger (ring finger)
825 5th finger (little finger)
h11, h12 Hold icon h0 Variable icons LT1 to LT5 Reach title ZT Zone title MC Song selection display MD Song selection decision display LH1 Left hit 1st display LH2 Left hit 2nd display RH1 Right hit 1st display RH2 Right hit 2nd display

Claims (1)

a first vibration means capable of performing a first vibration motion;
a display means capable of displaying a first image associated with the first vibration means at a certain timing;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is capable of displaying a changing display of decorative patterns,
the display means is capable of displaying a first reach effect,
the display means is capable of displaying a second reach effect having a higher expectation of a jackpot game being executed than the first reach effect,
The display means is capable of displaying a variable icon,
the first vibration means is capable of starting to execute the first vibration action after the first image is displayed;
The display means is capable of displaying an image relating to a pass/fail determination result after displaying the first image,
There are a first case in which the first vibration action is executed at a first timing after the display of the first image is started at the certain timing, a second case in which the first vibration action is executed at a second timing after the display of the first image is started at the certain timing but later than the first timing, and a third case in which the first vibration action is not executed during the execution of the second reach performance even if the display of the first image is started,
the display means displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the first case, and also displays the certain image after starting to display the first image in the second case,
the first vibration means ends the first vibration operation before the end of display of the certain image in either the first case or the second case,
an execution period of the first vibration operation in the second case overlaps with a part of a display period of the certain image,
the first timing is a timing during execution of the second reach effect,
the second timing is a timing during execution of the second reach effect,
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the first case than in the third case,
The jackpot game is more likely to be executed in the second case than in the third case,
The first image is not an image showing the variable icon,
When the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing , there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, and when the execution of the first vibration action is started at the second timing, there is no case where the execution of the first vibration action is started at the first timing .
A gaming machine characterized by the above.